JP7204315B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, information on the number of hit balls (number of hit balls) and the number of prize balls (
A game machine that displays a base value) has been proposed.

JP-A-10-118314

However, there is a possibility that accurate information cannot be displayed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to display accurate information.

The game machine of means CA is
A shooting device (for example, a batted ball shooting device, etc.) for shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball, etc.) to a game area (for example, the game area 10, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is established (for example, the first, second Derivation display of confirmed special symbols that are big hits and small winnings on special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, derivation display of confirmed decorative symbols that are big hit combinations on image display device 5, passage of game balls in specific areas, etc.) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) based on
Detecting means capable of detecting game media shot into the game area (for example, a ball detector provided on the guide rail (FIG. 85), ball detectors 701 and 702 (FIG. 96) provided in the game area etc.) and
variable means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which game media launched into the game area can enter;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A serving as the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D serving as the general winning areas, and the big winning hole payout means (e.g., ball payout device, payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 or the like for determining whether or not the game state based on the probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.),
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) information display means (for example, the display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) having a display area capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 83);
A variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc.) that performs variable display and derives and displays the display result,
The variable means changes to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in Figs. at the big prize entrance door changes from closed state to open state, etc.)
The judging means determines whether the variable means changes to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, as shown in Figs. Timing t2 before time T3, etc.), it is determined that it is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 88, at timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses, a round game setting the middle flag to ON state, etc.),
The state before the predetermined period (for example, the state at timing t2) is a special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed , and the special state is started. A specific period has passed since
The information display means is
Having a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area as the display area,
A plurality of types of predetermined information corresponding to each of a plurality of calculation periods can be displayed in the first display area as the predetermined information,
Period information indicating which of the plurality of calculation periods is a calculation period can be displayed in the second display area at the same time as the predetermined information,
displaying special information in the first display area and the second display area without displaying the period information and the predetermined information when a predetermined error occurs;
It is characterized by
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.
The gaming machine of means C1 is
A shooting device (for example, a batted ball shooting device, etc.) for shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball, etc.) to a game area (for example, the game area 10, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is established (for example, the first, second Derivation display of confirmed special symbols that are big hits and small winnings on special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, derivation display of confirmed decorative symbols that are big hit combinations on image display device 5, passage of game balls in specific areas, etc.) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) based on
Detecting means capable of detecting game media shot into the game area (for example, a ball detector provided on the guide rail (FIG. 85), ball detectors 701 and 702 (FIG. 96) provided in the game area etc.) and
variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which game media launched into the game area can win;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A serving as the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D serving as the general winning areas, and the big winning hole payout means (e.g., ball payout device, payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 or the like for determining whether or not the game state based on the probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.),
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, an information display means (for example, the display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 83),
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the big winning opening at timing t3 based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol at timing t1 door changes from closed state to open state, etc.),
The determination means is
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, time T3 before the timing t3 at which the big winning door changes from the closed state to the open state. Timing t2 etc.), it is determined that it is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 88, the round game flag is turned on at timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses state, etc.).
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
A variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc.) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display result is provided,
The state (for example, the state at timing t2) before the change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the image display device 5 is performing a fanfare effect, etc.) is.
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The detection means can be detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 96, a first ball detector 701 and a second ball detector 702 can The part above the dashed line P including is detachable, etc.).
According to this, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. Moreover, maintenance becomes easy.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C3,
The detection means is
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2) that forms a game area (for example, the first ball detector 701 and the second ball detector 702 are shown in FIG. 96). is constructed as a unit above the dashed line P).
This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
A gaming machine of means C4,
In the game area,
A left game area (for example, the left game area 10A, etc.) and a right game area (for example, the right game area 10A, etc.) are provided as areas through which the game medium ejected by the shooting device can pass,
The unit (for example, the portion above the dashed line P in FIG. 96) is
Left detection means (for example, the first shot ball detector 701, etc.) for detecting game media passing through the left game area, and right detection means (for example, for detecting game media passing through the right game area)
second firing ball detector 702, etc.).
According to this, it can be detected even if it is shot to any of the game areas.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C5,
The detection means is
Any winning area provided in the game area is provided on the upstream side in the flow path of the game medium (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, the shot ball detector 700 may It is provided above the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning ports 50A to 50D, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, as shown in FIG.
The shot ball detector 702 includes the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the general winning hole 50.
A to 50D, provided above the special variable winning ball device 7).
According to this, it can detect reliably.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decoration pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means for executing (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area (1 minute, 2 minutes,
Or 5 minutes) under predetermined conditions (effective start winning to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening,
A production execution means (production control CPU 120) for executing a specific production (a specific production F (forecasting announcement production), a specific production G (fluctuation result announcement production)) when a ready-to-reach state is established,
A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with 47th presentation mode to 49th presentation mode).
According to this, it is possible to arouse interest in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is executed after the game medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to increase interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Execution of a notification effect for executing a notification effect to identifiably notify that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning to the general winning opening). The gaming machine is characterized by further comprising means.
According to this, the player can be made to recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as a notification effect for identifiably informing that the state after the game medium has entered, the player can check whether or not a predetermined specific period has passed since the game medium entered the general winning area. and an effect in which it is easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined specific period has passed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, a sound effect is played for a relatively short period (for example, 0.5 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area.
seconds to about 2 seconds), and as the latter effect, the character continues to be displayed on the image display device until a predetermined specific period (for example, 1 minute) elapses immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area. There is a directing to display.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is a effect that indicates whether or not it is the specific period (the specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, the interest in the game can be enhanced until the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period differs depending on the mode of the notification effect (the display period when character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display period when character C appears is 1 minute). duration is 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, interest can be improved by making the player pay attention to the mode of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to means B4 may be, for example, as follows.
First, based on the entry of the game medium into the general prize winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120), among a plurality of predetermined specific periods (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes) Select any one of the specific periods, determine the effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 5) based on the selected specific period, and perform the notification effect (character is displayed during the specific period display) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, the display of character A) is displayed more than when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is preferable to make the determined ratio high. Further, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, character B display) is displayed more than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is preferable to make the determined ratio high.
In addition, when the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond one to one (1 minute for character A, 2 minutes for character B, and 3 minutes for character C) ), the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) determines one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes based on the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. , it is preferable to execute the notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4,
The variable display means displays a starting condition (
A game ball wins a prize (effective start prize winning) in a first start winning port when the number of first reserved memories does not reach the upper limit value, and a second start prize wins when the number of second reserved memories does not reach the upper limit value. After the game ball wins in the mouth (effective start winning) is established, the start condition (not being controlled to the jackpot game state and not executing the variable display of the special game) is established. to perform variable display,
The effect executing means provides an advance notice effect for announcing the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met (corresponding to the variable display game targeted for notice in the start prize winning storage display area 5H). A game machine (a pachinko game machine 1 of the 47th and 49th performance modes) is characterized by executing, as the specific performance, a pending change performance in which a display portion is changed from a normal mode to a special mode.
According to this, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area is triggered by giving notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied, thereby generating an interest that the game medium does not enter the general winning area. It is possible to enhance interest from the time to the execution of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine of means B5,
Hold information corresponding to the variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed corresponding to the existence of the variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied) It further comprises a pending information display control means (effect control CPU 120) for displaying the display part) on the display device (image display device 5),
Said advance notice effect is to give notice of the display result of the variable display corresponding to said reserved information depending on the mode of said reserved information (if the start winning judgment result designation command is a command to designate "big hit", the The display part corresponding to the command is changed from a normal mode (e.g. blue or red) to a special mode (e.g. gold) at a higher rate than the command specifying "miss"). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to heighten interest in announcing the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied, triggered by the entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
The effect execution means displays objects (characters A to C) on the display device to identifiably notify the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area Immediately after winning the prize, one of the characters A to C will appear) Execute the notification effect,
The advance notice effect is an effect that can be recognized by the player when the object changes the state of the reserved information (the displayed character performs some action, and the state of the display part corresponding to the reserved special game is displayed). is changed from a normal mode to a special mode).
According to this, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied can be suggested by the common object, and the game to the general winning area can be suggested. It is possible to further enhance interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific performance.
Specifically, by creating an effect in which the state of the pending information changes as the display state of the object changes (for example, a predetermined action), the player can recognize when the object changes the state of the pending information. Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7,
The specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period).
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8,
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D),
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered (the first general winning opening 50
In the case of winning A or the second general winning opening 50B, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning can be a specific period (characters A to C can appear), but the third general winning 50C
Alternatively, the gaming machine is characterized in that only five minutes from the general winning can be the specific period (only character C can appear) when winning the fourth general winning slot 50D.
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B10 to B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decorative pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means for executing (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Action detection means capable of detecting actions of the player (operation buttons 30 and effect control CPU 120
)When,
After the game medium has entered the general winning area, when the action detection means detects the player's action (continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation), a specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo continuous effect) a game machine (a pachinko game machine 1 of 50th to 53rd presentation modes) characterized by comprising a presentation execution means (a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice presentation, a chance notice presentation, and .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific performance is executed with the action of the player as a trigger, so that the excitement when the game medium enters the general winning area can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
A gaming machine of means B10,
The state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is identifiably notified (in the 50th and 51st presentation modes, the button icon 400
Decide the notice effect ("cut-in", "pseudo run", "chance eye") that can be executed each time a prize is won in the general winning hole in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form that increases 0, This gaming machine is characterized by further comprising notification effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a notification effect (characters 4000a to 4000c are displayed according to the determination result).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
The gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of action (continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for making the specific effect executable, the mode of the notification effect (“cut-in” character 4000a, “pseudo continuous” The gaming machine is characterized in that the character 4000b and the character 4000c of the "chance eye" are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of action enables execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A game machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are multiple general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the rate at which the notification effect is executed differs (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning hole 50A of the left game area 10A or When winning the second general winning opening 50B, it is notified at a higher rate than when winning the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D in the right game area 10B). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B13,
There are multiple general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the mode of the notification effect differs (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning port 50A or the second general winning port 50B is won). If you do, the character 4000a of "cut in" and the character 4 of "pseudo ream"
000b can be displayed, the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D
In the case of winning, the character 4000a of "cut-in" and the character 400 of "chance"
0c can be displayed).
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B14,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the rate at which the notification effect is executed differs Case (first general winning opening 50A or second general winning opening 50 in left gaming area 10A
In the case of winning B), when winning the general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state (when winning the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D in the right game area 10B) than reported at a high rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately vary the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B15,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the state of the notification effect differs (in the fifty-first effect mode and the fifty-third effect mode, "cut-in" when in the normal state).
characters 4000a and characters 4000b of "pseudo-run" can be displayed, and characters 4000a of "cut-in" and characters 4000c of "chance eye" can be displayed in the variable probability state or time-saving state. )
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately vary the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B16,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect when the predetermined action is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the fiftieth effect mode and the fifty-first effect mode, the general Pseudo continuous notice effect can be executed when winning two or more times in the winning mouth,
When you win 3 times or more in the general winning mouth, the chance eye notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B17,
There are multiple general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs (in the 52nd effect mode and 53rd effect mode, In the case of winning, the advance notice effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case of winning in the third general prize-winning port 50C or the fourth general prize-winning port 50D)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B18,
There are multiple general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the type of specific effect that can be executed differs (in the fifty-second effect mode and fifty-third effect mode, the first general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole In the case of winning 50B, either cut-in notice effect or pseudo continuous notice effect can be executed, and in the case of winning the third general prize opening 50C or the fourth general prize opening 50D, the cut-in notice effect is performed. and chance eye notice production can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player pay attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B19,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, when winning the general winning slot in the normal state ( If you win the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B in the left game area 10A), if you win the general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state (the third general winning opening in the right game area 10B When winning the winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D), notification is made to enable execution of the specific effect at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately vary the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B20,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the type of specific effect that can be executed differs (in the 51st effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, cut-in notice effect and pseudo-continuous effect are performed in the normal state). Either of the notice effects can be executed, and either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed when the variable probability state or the time saving state)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately vary the interests according to the state of the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B22 to means B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decoration pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means for executing (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect),
When the variable display is being performed (within the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being performed, within the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being performed or determined to be performed), the general winning area and when the variable display is not executed (within the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed and it is also decided to execute it). A gaming machine (pachinko with 27th performance mode to 30th performance mode) characterized in that the rate at which the specific performance is executed differs depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period during which the game is not performed). Gaming machine 1).
According to this, the execution ratio of the specific performance is different between when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, thereby increasing interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. can be done.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is further provided. ,
A gaming machine (a pachinko game machine 1 of the 27th performance mode and the 29th performance mode) characterized in that the specific performance is a performance (specific performance C: point giving performance) unrelated to the display result of the variable display. be.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is further provided. ,
The specific effect is a effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect), and when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area The game machine (Pachinko game machine 1 of the 28th presentation mode and the 30th presentation mode) is characterized in that the game is not executed when a game medium enters the .
According to this, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decorative pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means for executing (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect),
When the variable display is being performed (within the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being performed, or within the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being performed or determined to be performed), the general winning area and when the variable display is not executed (within the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed and it is also decided to execute it). A game machine characterized in that a different specific effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area during a period during which the game medium is not played (Pachinko game machine 1 of the 31st effect mode and the 32nd effect mode) ).
According to this, the different specific effects are different between when the variable display is performed and when the variable display is not performed. .

The gaming machine of means B26 is
A gaming machine of means B25,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is further provided. ,
When a game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B
: Look-ahead notice effect) is executed as the specific effect,
When a game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is not being executed, an effect unrelated to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. It is a game machine (Pachinko game machine 1 of the 31st production mode and the 32nd production mode).
According to this, when the variable display is performed, it is possible to further enhance interest when the game medium enters the general winning area, and even when the variable display is not performed,
To appropriately enhance interest when a game medium enters a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B26 (pachinko gaming machine 1 with 27th presentation mode to 32nd presentation mode),
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs (for example, when winning the general winning slot, the special game The division of whether or not is being executed, the division of the number of pending memories at the time of winning to the general winning mouth, and furthermore, the game state at the time of winning to the general winning mouth is the normal state, or the probability variable state or time saving state Specific effects are executed at different rates depending on the classification, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B27 (27th presentation mode to 32nd presentation mode pachinko gaming machine 1),
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, a different specific effect is executed (for example, a special game is executed when the general winning slot is won). The classification of whether or not there is, the classification of the number of pending memories when winning a prize to the general winning mouth, and whether the game state at the time of winning a prize to the general winning mouth is a normal state, or a variable state or a time saving state Depending on the classification, etc., different types of specific effects are executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B29 to means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 33), the winning rate to the start winning opening in the game machine is calculated, and characters wearing clothes of different colors are selected according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine has been proposed that executes a presentation display to be displayed. However, it is necessary not only to simply display the information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information easier to see. Means B29
The invention relating to means B39 has been made in view of the above situation, and is intended to make it easier to visually recognize information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B29 is
Entry areas where game media (game balls) can enter (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.,
Information capable of displaying entry information related to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general prize pool, the number of wins in the first start prize pool, the number of wins in the second start prize pool, etc.) Display means (image display device 5) is provided,
The information display means displays effect information different from the entry information (for example, decorative patterns, fourth patterns, etc.) in an area where the visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 42, each winning opening is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α where the number of prizes won is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B30 is
A gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the entry information irrespective of the aspect of the performance information (as shown in FIG. 42, regardless of whether or not the decoration pattern is displayed variably, Regardless of whether or not is displayed variably, the number of winnings to the general winnings, the number of winnings to the first start winnings,
and the number of winnings to the second start winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and the displayed winning number can be updated according to the winning to each winning opening)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized regardless of the aspect of the effect information.

The invention according to means B31 is
Entry areas where game media (game balls) can enter (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.,
Error detection means (for example, magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, radio wave anomaly, etc.)
Abnormality detection sensor group 26),
Information capable of displaying entry information related to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general prize pool, the number of wins in the first start prize pool, the number of wins in the second start prize pool, etc.) and a display means (image display device 5),
The information display means displays the error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error in an area where the visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIGS. 42 and 43, to each winning opening is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α where the number of wins is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B32 is
A gaming machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as shown in FIG. 43, regardless of whether an error message is displayed or not, the general prize winning opening , the number of prizes won to the first start prize gate, the number of prizes won to the second start prize gate, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and according to the wins to each prize gate, can update the number of winnings
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33 is
Entry areas where game media (game balls) can enter (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.,
Information capable of displaying entry information related to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general prize pool, the number of wins in the first start prize pool, the number of wins in the second start prize pool, etc.) A display means (image display device 5) is provided,
The information display means displays the display result of the variable display executed based on the entry of the game medium into the starting area (for example, the display result of the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) or the fourth symbol) as the entry information. A gaming machine characterized by displaying in an area where the visibility of is not hindered (as shown in FIG. 42, a second area β different from the first area α where the number of winnings to each winning hole is displayed) is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B34 is
The gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the variable display is performed (as shown in FIG. 42, regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern is variably displayed,
Regardless of whether the 4th pattern is variably displayed, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening, etc. is displayed in the first area α It is possible to update the displayed number of prizes according to the number of prizes won in each prize slot.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the variable display is being performed.

The invention according to means B35 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B34,
operable operation means (operation button 30);
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means according to the operation of the operation means (as shown in FIG. and an effect control CPU 120 for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the approach information.

The invention according to means B36 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B35,
Operation means (operation buttons 30) operable by the player;
Aggregation period setting means for setting the aggregation period of the entry information according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 46, production control CPU 120 for setting the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 30); The gaming machine is characterized by further comprising
According to this, it is possible to set the counting period according to the judgment of the player.

The invention according to means B37 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B36,
Game state control means (game control microcomputer 100
),
The information display means can display the entry information according to the game state (as shown in FIG. 45, the number of wins in the low base state and the number of wins in the high base state can be displayed separately. is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information corresponding to the game state.

The invention according to means B38 is
A gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for executing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the entry of the game medium into the starting area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) is further provided,
The game state control means includes a low frequency state (low base state in which high opening control for the second start winning opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (second 2 It is possible to control to a high base state where high opening control targeting the start winning opening is executed),
The information display means displays the entry information relating to the period during which the low frequency state is controlled (such as the number of general wins in the low base status illustrated in FIG. 45) and the entry information relating to the period during which the high frequency state is controlled. This gaming machine is characterized by being able to display information (such as the number of general wins in the high base state illustrated in FIG. 45).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the low frequency state and the entry information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B38,
Notification is made when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as exemplified in FIG. 46, when the number of prizes won per set counting period is less than a predetermined reference value, notification is made to that effect.) This gaming machine is characterized by further comprising notification means (image display device 5) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the approach information satisfies the predetermined condition.

Further, the mode for carrying out the invention described later includes inventions related to means B40 and means B41 shown below. Conventionally, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 32 and 33)
, when the player enters a password to accept the start of the game, the winning rate for the starting winning slot in the gaming machine is calculated, and characters wearing clothes of different colors are changed according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine has been proposed that executes a presentation display to be displayed. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than a player (for example, a store clerk at a game arcade) to confirm information about the entry of a game medium into an entry area such as a starting prize winning opening. Means B40, Means B41
The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and is intended to allow only persons other than players (for example, game parlor staff) to confirm information.

The invention according to means B40 is
Gaming machines (e.g., pachinko) having an entry area (e.g., first start winning port, second starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.) into which game media (e.g., game balls) can enter A game machine 1),
giving means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) based on the game medium passing through the entry area;
specific operation means (for example, mode changeover switch 31, reset button) that cannot be operated by the player;
Cumulative value information (for example, FIG. 1
7, a notification means (for example, an image display device 5) for notifying the number of payouts of each general winning opening, the number of payingouts of each starting winning opening, and the total number of payingouts);
The notification means notifies the accumulated value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, when the mode changeover switch 31 is operated to enter the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device. 5)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk at the game arcade) can confirm the information.

It should be noted that the ``specific operation means that cannot be operated by the player'' may be any means that can be operated by, for example, a store clerk in a game arcade or an inspector/inspector of a game machine.

The invention according to means B41 is
A gaming machine of means B40,
Provided with effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing effects related to games,
The notification means, in a mode corresponding to the mode of the performance executed by the performance execution means,
Notifying the cumulative value information (for example, outputting a display or voice such that a character appearing during the advance notice effect or the ready-to-win effect reads out the information of the prize number management table)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of game machine the information is from the mode of notification.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B42 to means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning hole (general winning area), the number of winning balls is counted up and displayed on a production display device. , a gaming machine has been proposed in which a game player is informed of the occurrence of a memory-in-remembered game when the counted number reaches the number of execution opportunities determined by lottery. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-73187, when a game ball enters a normal winning hole, the number of entered balls is uniformly displayed by counting up by one. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions relating to means B42 to B51 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to increase the interest in games in gaming machines having general winning areas.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decorative pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) Variable display means for executing (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (a specific effect D that gradually increases the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Executable specific production execution means (production control CPU 120
) and
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (such as the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed),
In the specific effect, the ratio of changing the effect mode is different (the ratio of executing the effect of increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 by one level is different).
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with 33rd presentation mode to 37th presentation mode).
According to this, the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance differs according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. can be done.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
A gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 5) has a predetermined period of time (effect control CPU
variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by 120), the variable display (
Variable display of decorative patterns) is executed,
Depending on the remaining period of variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the remaining time until derivation display of the fixed decoration pattern is 10 seconds or more and less than 10 seconds) , a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 of a thirty-fourth presentation mode) characterized in that the rate of change of the presentation mode in the specific presentation is different.
According to this, the interest of the specific performance can be further enhanced by changing the rate of change of the performance mode in the specific performance according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
Remaining period of the variable display that is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (remaining time until derivation display of the fixed decoration pattern is 10 seconds or more, and less than 10 seconds) ) and the display result (jackpot pattern, losing pattern) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general prize winning area, the rate of change of the production mode in the specific production is made different. can be Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbols being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance may be different (for example, when the pattern is a big hit, the rate is changed at a high rate, and when the pattern is lost, the rate is changed at a lower rate). .

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A game machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 5) displays the start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed after the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special pattern, variable display of the second special pattern, variable display of decorative patterns) is executed based on the establishment of ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern);
A notice effect (forecast notice effect) that foretells that the display result of the variable display will become a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (the variable display that is the target of the predictive notice effect is executed). before) to execute the notice production execution means (production control CPU1
20) and further comprising
The period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area until the execution of the variable display to be the target of the announcement effect (the target of the pre-reading announcement effect when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the general winning hole designation command) A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance differs according to the classification of the number of times of variable display until the variable display is executed (a pachinko machine with the 35th performance mode) 1).
According to this, according to the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area to when the variable display targeted for the advance notice effect is executed, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
A period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the announcement effect (the target of the pre-reading announcement effect when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the general winning hole designation command) The division of the number of times of variable display until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display to be the target of the advance notice effect (big hit pattern, losing pattern). You may make it the ratio which a mode changes differs. Specifically, the number of times of variable display until the variable display targeted for the advance notice effect (the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice) is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range. (for example, 2 times or less), depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different (high when it becomes a big hit pattern) It may be changed at a rate and changed at a lower rate in the case of a missing pattern).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B44,
A reach effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect accompanying the variable display (variable display of the first special pattern, variable display of the second special pattern, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the ready-to-win effect is executed (when the game ball enters the general winning hole before the ready-to-win state is established in the ready-to-win fluctuation), and after the ready-to-win effect is executed When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation),
The game machine (Pachinko game machine 1 of the thirty-sixth presentation mode) is characterized in that the rate of change of the presentation mode in the specific presentation is different.
According to this, the performance mode in the specific performance changes depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the ready-to-win performance is executed or when the game medium enters the general winning area after the ready-to-win performance is executed. By having different ratios, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B45,
Having a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C, the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 with a thirty-seventh presentation mode) is characterized in that the rate at which the presentation mode changes in the specific presentation differs depending on whether the game ball wins in any of the above.
According to this, by varying the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance according to the general winning area into which the game medium has entered, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decorative pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) Variable display means for executing (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (a specific effect D that gradually increases the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Executable specific production execution means (production control CPU 120
) and
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (such as the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed),
The stages in which the rendering mode changes in the specific rendering are different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is different).
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with 38th presentation mode to 42nd presentation mode).
According to this, the step of changing the performance mode in the specific performance differs according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. can be done.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
The gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 5) has a predetermined period of time (effect control CPU
variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by 120), the variable display (
Variable display of decorative patterns) is executed,
Depending on the remaining period of variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the remaining time until derivation display of the fixed decoration pattern is 10 seconds or more and less than 10 seconds) , a game machine (a pachinko game machine 1 of a thirty-ninth production mode) characterized in that the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production is different.
According to this, the stages in which the performance mode changes in the specific performance are different according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific performance can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
Remaining period of the variable display that is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (remaining time until derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern is 10 seconds or more, and less than 10 seconds) ) and the display result (jackpot pattern, losing pattern) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the step of changing the production mode in the specific production is made different. can be Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbols being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the stages in which the production mode changes in the specific production are different (for example, when the pattern is a big hit, the number of stages changes, and when the pattern is lost, the number of stages changes less than that). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A game machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 5) displays the start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed after the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special pattern, variable display of the second special pattern, variable display of decorative patterns) is executed based on the establishment of ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern);
A notice effect (forecast notice effect) that foretells that the display result of the variable display will become a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (the variable display that is the target of the predictive notice effect is executed). before) to execute the notice production execution means (production control CPU1
20) and further comprising
The period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area until the execution of the variable display to be the target of the announcement effect (the target of the pre-reading announcement effect when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the general winning hole designation command) A gaming machine characterized in that the stages in which the performance mode changes in the specific performance are different according to the classification of the number of times of variable display until the variable display is executed (a pachinko game machine of the 40th performance mode) 1).
According to this, according to the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area to when the variable display targeted for the advance notice effect is executed, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
The period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area until the execution of the variable display to be the target of the announcement effect (the target of the pre-reading announcement effect when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the general winning hole designation command) The division of the number of times of variable display until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display to be the target of the advance notice effect (big hit pattern, losing pattern). The stage at which the aspect changes may be different. Specifically, when the game media enters the general winning area, the number of times of variable display until the variable display targeted for the notice effect (the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice) is executed is within a predetermined range. (for example, 2 times or less), depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect, the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different (for example, in the case of a big hit pattern, The number of steps may be changed in a large number, and if the pattern is lost, the number of steps may be changed in a smaller number.

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B49,
It further comprises a reach effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a reach effect with the variable display (variable display of the first special pattern, variable display of the second special pattern, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the ready-to-win effect is executed (when the game ball enters the general winning hole before the ready-to-win state is established in the ready-to-win fluctuation), and after the ready-to-win effect is executed When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing at which the game ball enters the general winning opening is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation),
The game machine (Pachinko game machine 1 of the 41st production form) is characterized in that the stages in which the production mode changes in the specific production are different.
According to this, the performance mode in the specific performance changes depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the ready-to-win performance is executed or the game medium enters the general winning area after the ready-to-win performance is executed. By having different stages, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B50,
Having a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C, the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D The game machine (Pachinko game machine 1 of the 42nd production mode) is characterized in that the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on whether the game ball wins in any of the above.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect by changing the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect according to the general winning area into which the game medium has entered.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B52 to means B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning hole (general winning area), the number of winning balls is counted up and displayed on the production display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game player is notified that a memory-in-memory recurrence will occur when the counted number reaches the number of execution opportunities determined by lottery. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, an effect (count-up display) is executed each time a game ball enters a normal winning hole. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, it is necessary to know when game media do not enter the general winning area, but this is not taken into consideration in the prior art. The inventions relating to means B52 to B56 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to make it possible to grasp that game media do not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of the second special symbol, variable display of the decoration pattern) when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) Variable display means for executing (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
If the number of game media entering the general winning area during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number (
When the number of prizes won in the general prize gates is 0 in the 10 minutes during which the game is detected, or when the number of prizes won in the general prize gates in the 30 minutes when the game is detected is less than 3 ), a specific effect (announcement image 2200, etc., including an image simulating the form of a general prize hole and the text "There is no general prize") is displayed on the image display device 5.
) and specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing ).
According to this, it is possible for the player and the game hall to know that the number of game media entering the general winning area is smaller than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
A gaming machine of means B52,
A setting means for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means (an effect for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game hall setting and the player setting in the display setting table) control CPU 120);
clerk operation reception means (display changeover switch 32) for accepting a setting operation by a clerk,
When the setting operation is received by the store clerk operation receiving means, the setting means performs setting to permit the execution of the specific effect (specific effect E based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32 (notifying that there is no general winning). , announcing that the number of general prizes is small))
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53,
Storage means (R
Winning number counter area formed in AM 122) is further provided,
The game machine is characterized in that the number of entries stored in the storage means is not retained when power is cut off (the value in the winning number counter area is erased when power is cut off).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control load for keeping the number of entries in memory at the time of power failure.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B54,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed differs (for example, the specific effect E is executed at different ratios between the normal state and the variable probability state or time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B55,
A different specific effect is executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in different modes in the case of the normal state and in the case of the variable probability state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific presentation.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B57 to means B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering the game medium into the big winning opening during execution of the jackpot game, A gaming machine has been proposed that performs an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering a game medium into a normal winning slot (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the game hall or the player is not reflected as to whether or not to execute an effect when a game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions relating to the means B57 to B64 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and reflect the intentions of the game hall and the players regarding whether or not to execute an effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. We aim to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
When the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative pattern),
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displaying information of the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switching switch 31, setting of the display switching switch 32 and operation button 30 Based on the settings, increase the number of objects each time a game ball enters a general winning slot, display the number of winnings in a general winning slot in a jackpot game state, specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look ahead a notification means (image display device 5) capable of executing an advance notice effect);
and setting means (a mode changeover switch 31, a display changeover switch 32, and an operation button 30) for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
A gaming machine of means B57,
further comprising clerk operation receiving means (mode changeover switch 31, display changeover switch 32) for receiving setting operation by the clerk;
The setting means, when the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation accepting means, makes a setting to permit the execution of the specific effect (based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, the number of winning prizes management table is set in the maintenance mode). Based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32, the number of objects is increased each time a game ball enters the general winning opening, The number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is displayed, Specific effect A : Makes it possible to execute a variable result notice effect, Specific effect B: Makes it possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58,
further comprising a player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by a player;
The setting means performs setting to permit execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the player operation receiving means (general winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 30 while the demo screen is displayed). Increase the number of objects each time a game ball enters the game. Display the number of prizes won in the general winning opening in the jackpot game state based on the setting of the operation button 30 during the demonstration screen display. Specific effect A: Variable result notice effect can be executed, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B59,
The specific effect notifies the number of game media entering the general winning area during a predetermined period (the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled) so as to be identifiable (the number of winning balls entering the big winning opening and the number of winning balls). and the number of winning balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are separately displayed).
According to this, it is possible to improve the playability in the predetermined period.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B60,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect mode and the 26th effect mode) when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B61,
The specific effect executing means executes different specific effects according to the number of game media entering the general winning area (executes the effects of the twenty-fifth effect mode and the twenty-sixth effect mode). is.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B62,
The specific effect is a effect for identifiably reporting the number of game media entering the general winning area (increase the number of objects each time a game ball enters the general winning hole),
When a game is not played in the gaming machine (variable display of decorative patterns is not executed, and a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a large winning opening winning command are received for a predetermined period) Production control CPU 12 for determining the end of the game based on the fact that there was no
0), identifiably announcing that the number of game media entering the general winning area in the specific effect is 0 (when the game end determination is made, the general number displayed on the image display device 5 is All objects equivalent to the number of prizes won in the prize gate will be deleted.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B63,
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information corresponding to the number of game media entering the general winning area (objects corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is displayed.
According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general winning area.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions relating to means B65 to means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole during a big hit, one aspect of the starting memory display changes and the starting memory is displayed. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is "hit" or "lose". In a gaming machine having such a general winning hole, there is room for further enhancing interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning hole. The inventions relating to means B65 to B77 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to increase the interest in games in gaming machines having general winning slots.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
When the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative pattern),
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first game state (normal state), and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second game state (probability variable or time saving state) , The ratio of executing the specific production is different (in the normal state, the specific production is executed at a higher rate than the probability variable or time saving state)
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 with first to fourth presentation modes) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
When the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative pattern),
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first game state (normal state), and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second game state (probability variable or time saving state) , Execute different specific effects (execute specific effect A in normal state, execute specific effect B in probability variable or time saving state)
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 with fifth presentation mode to twelfth presentation mode).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
Game machine of means B65 or means B66 (2nd production form to 4th production form, 10th production form to
A pachinko gaming machine 1) in a twelfth production mode,
In the first game state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches the first number of entries,
In the case of the second game state (probability variable or time saving state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second number of entries different from the first number of entries. It is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
When the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol),
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), and in the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established)
When the game medium enters the general winning area at the time of , the ratio of executing the specific effect is different (after the state of reach fluctuation is established, during a period other than reach fluctuation or before the reach state of reach fluctuation is established) Specific effects are executed at a high rate)
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 with 13th presentation mode to 16th presentation mode).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A game machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which game media (game balls) can enter machine 1),
When the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol),
Giving means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result preview effect, specific effect B: pre-reading preview effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), and in the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established)
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a different specific effect is executed (
After the ready-to-reach state is established, the specific performance A is executed, and before the ready-to-reach state is established, the specific performance B is executed. executes a specific effect B)
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with 17th presentation mode to 24th presentation mode).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
A game machine of means B68 or means B69 (14th production mode to 16th production form, 22nd production form to 24th production form pachinko game machine 1),
during the first period (after establishment of the reach state of the reach fluctuation), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches the first number of entries;
During the second period (period other than reach fluctuation or reach state establishment of reach fluctuation),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a second number of entries different from the first number of entries.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B70 A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Having a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B71 (5th production form to 12th production form, 17th production form to 24th production form Pachinko game machine 1),
The variable display means displays a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the jackpot game state is displayed after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). Based on the establishment of the identification information (first special figure,
Variable display of the second special figure, decorative pattern) is performed,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern). )When,
Before the start condition is established, pre-start determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (control to the big win game state based on the random number for big win determination extracted at the time of start winning) It further comprises a game control microcomputer 100) that determines whether to
The specific effect execution means is
Based on the pre-start determination, an effect (pre-reading forewarning effect) that foretells control to the advantageous state is performed before the start condition of the target variable display is established (the specific effect (specific effect B)). It is a gaming machine characterized by executing as
According to this, it is possible to make the player more interested in the specific effect by announcing that the control will be in an advantageous state before the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 1 with first presentation mode to twenty-fourth presentation mode),
The variable display means displays a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the jackpot game state is displayed after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). Based on the establishment of the identification information (first special figure,
Variable display of the second special figure, decorative pattern) is performed,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern). )When,
When the start condition is satisfied, the start time determination means for determining the start time to determine whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state (when starting variable display of special symbols, the stored jackpot determination means A game control microcomputer 100) that determines whether or not to control to the jackpot game state based on random numbers,
The specific effect execution means is
The game machine is characterized in that, based on the determination at the time of start, an effect (fluctuation result announcement effect) for notifying that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to make the player more interested in the specific performance by notifying that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B73 (Pachinko game machine 1 with third production mode and fifteenth production mode),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution ratio of the specific effect differs according to the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B74 (11th performance mode, 23rd performance mode pachinko gaming machine 1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B75 (pachinko game machine 1 with fourth presentation mode, eighth presentation mode, twelfth presentation mode, sixteenth presentation mode, twentieth presentation mode, and twenty-fourth presentation mode) and
Having a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order in which the game media enter the plurality of general prize areas in a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B76 (pachinko game machine 1 with fourth presentation mode, eighth presentation mode, twelfth presentation mode, sixteenth presentation mode, twentieth presentation mode, and twenty-fourth presentation mode) and
Having other winning areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning area,
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on a specific order of entry of the game medium into the general prize area and entry of the game medium into the other prize area. .
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the game media enter the general winning area and the other winning areas.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions according to means A1 to means A9 shown below. Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-117576, a game machine has been proposed in which a number of game nails and a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of game balls are provided on the surface of the game board. In this type of gaming machine, the passing rate of the winning openings and passing gates is
It fluctuates due to the adjustment of game nails provided on the game board, etc., and the game ball payout rate may be designed by adjusting the game nails. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the game machine what kind of adjustments were made to the game nails, etc., it was difficult to judge whether or not the payout rate was as designed. The inventions according to means A1 to A9 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows recognition of what kind of adjustment has been made.

The game machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.)
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B that becomes the second start winning hole, the special variable winning ball device 7 that becomes the big winning hole, the normal winning ball device 6A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the general winning area and A gaming machine in which game values (for example, game balls, slot machine medals, etc.) are paid out by winning a prize in the general winning openings 50A to 50D, displaying a predetermined symbol combination on the activated line of the slot machine, etc. is provided on a main board (for example, the main board 11, the main board of a slot machine, etc.) that controls the game, and predetermined information (for example, the combination (relation ratio), the role ratio, the machine allocation, etc.) related to the game value to be paid out. ) can be displayed (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.), and can be released by opening the door frame (for example, game machine frame 3, slot machine door frame, etc.) In response to the occurrence of an error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65), the display of the predetermined information is restricted (for example, the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) ratio is stopped). It is characterized by
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made. In addition, when the error is canceled along with the opening of the door frame, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A game machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
When the above-mentioned errors (for example, door opening required errors such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65) occur, the above-mentioned restrictions (for example, stopping the display of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) ratio) are performed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A game machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
When the door frame (eg, gaming machine frame 3, slot machine door frame, etc.) is opened after the error (eg, door opening required error such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65) occurs Then, the restriction (for example, stopping the display of the consecutive (continuous ratio) ratio) is performed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any game machine selected from means A1 to A3 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is operated under the condition that the above-mentioned errors (for example, door opening required errors such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65) do not occur. , the predetermined information (for example, the role combination (relation ratio), role ratio, machine ratio, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any game machine selected from means A1 to A4 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
After the error (for example, the door opening required error such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65) is canceled, a predetermined time (for example, the measurement time t measured by the measurement timer in the display limit confirmation process of FIG. 63, etc.) ) has passed, the predetermined information (for example, the role combination (relationship ratio), role ratio, machine allocation, etc.)
display.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any game machine selected from means A1 to A5 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) displays a plurality of pieces of the predetermined information (for example, the winning combination (running ratio), the winning ratio, the machine allocation, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). It is possible to switch and display each.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of members.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any game machine selected from means A1 to A6 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) displays the predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls (for example, the number of prize balls) as the predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls) is 60000).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any game machine selected from means A1 to A7 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.) displays information for each predetermined unit (for example, The short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), short-term winning combination ratio) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), cumulative cumulative winning combination ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the above configuration, the information for each predetermined unit and the total information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any game machine selected from means A1 to A8 (for example, pachinko game machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is provided with the main board (for example, the main board 11, the main board of the slot machine, etc.) and is crimped in a board case (for example, the board case). 201, 202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (a) A diagram showing winning number information managed by a winning number management table, and (b) a diagram showing winning number information managed by a display control table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the game hall setting and the player setting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a display setting is performed by an operation button that can be operated by a player; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of displaying an object corresponding to winning a prize in a general winning slot; It is an explanatory diagram for displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each production|presentation performed according to a variation pattern. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change result notice effect and a look-ahead notice effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of first to fourth presentation modes; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of fifth to eighth presentation modes; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the ninth to twelfth presentation modes; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the thirteenth to sixteenth presentation modes; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the seventeenth to twentieth presentation modes; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the 21st to 24th presentation modes; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th production|presentation form and the 26th production|presentation form. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing winning number information managed by a winning number management table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of point provision production|presentation. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the twenty-seventh to thirtieth presentation modes; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st production|presentation form and the 32nd production|presentation form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of gauge update production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the 33rd to 36th presentation modes; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the thirty-seventh presentation mode; It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the thirty-eighth effect mode to the forty-first effect mode. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the forty-second presentation mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a non-winning notification effect; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the forty-third to forty-sixth presentation modes; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing appearance ratios of characters A to C in the forty-seventh to forty-ninth presentation modes; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing display periods of characters A to C in the forty-seventh to forty-ninth presentation modes; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the forty-seventh to forty-ninth presentation modes; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending|holding change production|presentation in the 47th production|presentation form. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change result foretelling effect in the forty-eighth effect mode; It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each production|presentation in the 47th production|presentation form and the 48th production|presentation form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th production|presentation form and the 51st production|presentation form. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of repeated hit operation notification and cut-in announcement effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each pattern stop operation alerting|reporting, and pseudo|simulated consecutive notice production|effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each pattern stop operation alerting|reporting, and pseudo|simulated consecutive notice production|effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all-patterns stop operation alerting|reporting, and a chance eye announcement production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all-patterns stop operation alerting|reporting, and a chance eye announcement production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd production|presentation form and the 53rd production|presentation form. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution ratio of each advance notice effect for each general winning opening in the fifty-second effect mode and the fifty-third effect mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of display areas for each effect information in the setting for displaying information on the number of prizes won; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode of an error message; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of display areas for each effect information in a setting in which winning number information is not displayed; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of winning number information items that can be displayed in the first area; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a method for setting an aggregation period; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the display area of each effect information in the setting of displaying the number-of-wins information and the setting of not displaying the number-of-wins information. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the display area of each effect information in the setting of displaying the number-of-wins information and the setting of not displaying the number-of-wins information. It is a configuration diagram showing in more detail various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. (A) is a simplified front view of a main board, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board. 4 is a diagram showing a memory map of a built-in ROM area in a CPU; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a used area program area and a non-used area program area in an internal ROM area; FIG. 4 is a table showing call instructions used in the built-in ROM area; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another configuration of a used area program area and a non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area; (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is the processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. is a diagram conceptually showing the . (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the role consecutive (continuous ratio) and role ratio related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a role consecutive (repeated ratio) and a role ratio display control process. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing; 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display switching control processing; It is a table showing the types of errors in the gaming machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow and the monitor display state when the third interrupt process is executed, and (B) is the signal flow and the monitor when the first interrupt process is executed. 4 is a time chart showing the relationship between display states such as . It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a main board on which display monitors are arranged in a first display monitor arrangement mode; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is released from the outer frame; (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a wing-shaped variable winning ball device; FIG. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball device provided in the game board from the front. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing examples of counters for the total number of winning balls, the number of winning ball balls, and the number of consecutive winning ball balls; (A) to (D) are front views showing simplified modifications of the main board. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method of summarizing and calculating information relating to game wins; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram related to performance information; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram related to performance information; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special figure processing (special figure process processing). 4 is a flowchart showing an example of state control processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a big winning opening determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining state change switching waiting time and the like; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining state change switching waiting time and the like; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of state control processing; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining state change switching waiting time and the like; It is a configuration example of an out-sphere detector. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error notification processing; It is an example of the display mode which notifies an error. It is an example of the display mode which notifies an error. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of performance information update processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of performance information update processing; It is an example of the arrangement position of an out-sphere detector.

As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area has a greater impact on the game than the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area where the variable display of the special symbols is executed by the entry of the game medium. is low. In addition, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbols becomes the specific display result, the control is performed in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Compared to entering, the player's interest is low, making it difficult to increase interest. Due to such circumstances, there is a case where the game nail is maintained on the game hall side so as to substantially make it difficult for the game medium to enter the general winning area.

However, game machine manufacturers usually design the game board so that game media enter the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Therefore, originally, it is desirable that the maintenance state of the game nail is such that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test) on the game hall side. , increase the interest of players in the entry of game media into the general winning area,
It is necessary to make the player aware of the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. A gaming machine according to an embodiment, which will be described later, makes it possible to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . In addition, pachinko machine 1
has a frame-shaped glass door frame 3a which is openable and closable on the frame 3 for a game machine. The game machine frame 3 is attached to the outer frame by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable.
This outer frame is fixed to a so-called game island where a plurality of pachinko game machines are arranged side by side. By opening the game machine frame 3 with respect to the outer frame, the back side of the game machine frame 3 and the inside of the game island can be visually recognized by a store clerk or the like.

The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area 10 surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area 10 . The game area 10 consists of a left game area 10A and a right game area 10B. The game area 10 is an area through which game balls can pass on the game board 2, and the game area 1
With the center of 0 as a reference, the left side is the left game area 10A and the right side is the right game area 10B.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area 10 in the example shown in FIG. 1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like. Special symbols (“special symbols”) that are possible multiple types of identification information (special identification information)
) is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display multiple types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". do. In addition, the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "-
" is not limited to those composed of symbols and the like. Below, the first special symbol display device 4
The special symbol variably displayed by A is also called "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also called "second special symbol". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A in the special symbol game
Corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, in the decorative design display area that becomes a variable display unit divided into a plurality of , variably display decorative patterns, each of which is a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (decoration identification information). The variable display of this decoration pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, in response to the start of either the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, "Left , "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5
At L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decoration pattern (for example, vertical scroll display) is started.
After that, when the fixed special pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special game,
"Left", "Center", and "Right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5 in the image display device 5
At R, a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) as a result of variable display of decorative patterns is stop-displayed. Thus, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, or the special symbol using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B In synchronism with the drawing game, a plurality of types of ornamental patterns that are each identifiable are variably displayed, and a determined ornamental pattern as a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping the display of the identification information such as the decoration pattern (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) to end the variable display.

In the image display device 5, as the display areas that become the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R,
The three regions may be provided either glued or separated or capable of being glued and separated. The display operation of the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 is the first
When the special symbol display device 4A is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the image display device 5 is made to perform the performance display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the variable display is executed, the effect display is executed by the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

For example, the decorative patterns variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include eight types of patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). There are numerals "one" to "eight", English letters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, letters or symbols and character images, etc. Note that character images. may be a decorative image representing, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a letter, or any other arbitrary figure.). In addition to these 8 types of decorative patterns, there are also decorative patterns (designs composed of the letters "Tokutoku") corresponding to becoming a "definite hit" (also known as "2R probability variation jackpot") and blank designs ( Symbols that do not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding design number is attached to each of the decorative designs. Note that the number of decoration patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations, such as a winning combination or a losing combination, can be formed.

During the variation of the decorative design, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C,
In 5R, for example, a scrolling display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow from small to large in sequence from top to bottom. Subsequently, the decoration pattern with the smallest pattern number (for example, "1") is displayed.
Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" decorative design display area 5L, etc.), the design is displayed by scrolling from the larger design number to the smaller design number. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed subsequently.

In the lower right part of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are provided fourth pattern display areas 5A and 5B for displaying the fourth pattern next to the decoration pattern, the special pattern and the normal pattern which will be described later. In this embodiment, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. In synchronization with the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special figure is performed, and the derived display of the display result of the variable display is performed. A fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is provided.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special design. (This is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When the effect using the image display device 5 is performed, for example, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. are performed, and an effect is performed in which all or part of the screen is shielded by a movable object. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen of the image display device 5, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by further performing variable display of the fourth pattern on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to check the state of the fourth pattern to determine whether it is currently in the state of variable display. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the fourth pattern is always variably displayed in a constant motion and is always visible because it does not disappear from the screen or is blocked by a shield.

In addition, the fourth design for the first special design and the fourth design for the second special design may be collectively referred to as the fourth design, and the fourth design display area 5A for the first special design and the second special design The fourth symbol display area 5B for drawing may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variable display (variable display) of the fourth pattern is performed by displaying the fourth pattern display areas 5A and 5B in a predetermined display color (
For example, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is white, and the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is black), and the lighting (display) and extinguishing (non-display) are performed at predetermined time intervals. It is realized by continuing the repeated blinking state. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol are synchronized.
Synchronization means that the start and end points of variable display are the same, and the period of variable display is the same.

Also, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display device 4A
The fourth symbol display area 5A for the special figure lights up in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of a big hit (
displayed). In addition, you may change a display color according to a jackpot classification. again,
When the missing symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol remains illuminated (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the failure. Become. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is stop-displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5A.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B, the second special symbol display device 4B
The fourth symbol display area 5B for the special figure lights up in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of a big hit (
displayed). In addition, you may change a display color according to a jackpot classification. again,
When the second special symbol display device 4B stops displaying the missing symbol, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol remains illuminated (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the failure. Become. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special figure is stop-displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5B.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning memory display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a reservation memory display that displays the variable display reservation number (special figure reservation memory number) in a identifiable manner is performed. Here, suspension of variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. do. That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special game or variable display of decorative patterns is satisfied, the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, etc., the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is suspended. done.

As an example, the starting winning memory display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display portions whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied first based on the occurrence of the starting winning. there is Then, when the starting condition (first starting condition) of the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first starting winning hole, it is not displayed. One of the display portions in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the display portion at the left end of the display portions in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. In addition, when the starting condition (second starting condition) of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode is changed to red display. After that, when either the starting condition of the special game using the first special figure (first starting condition) or the starting condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second starting condition) is satisfied, for example The display at the leftmost display portion is removed, and the display at each display portion is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display portions that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the rightmost display portion among the display portions whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

That is, when a starting prize is generated, pending information (an object indicated by a circle in FIG. 1, FIG. 31, etc.) corresponding to a special game to be executed based on the starting prize is stored in the starting prize storage display area 5H. Newly displayed display control is performed. For example, the pending information is displayed in order from the left in accordance with the order in which the starting conditions for the special game corresponding to the pending information have been established (in the above example, the order in which the starting conditions are established). When n pieces of pending information are displayed (n
When a new starting prize is generated when the number of special game is suspended), the (n+1)th pending information from the left is newly displayed corresponding to the new starting prize. and,
When the condition for starting the reserved special game is satisfied, the leftmost reserved information corresponding to the special game is erased, and the n-th (n≧2) reserved information from the left is shifted one by one to the left. and is displayed at the (n-1)th.

In addition, the order in which the starting conditions for the special game are established is not limited to the order in which the starting conditions occur, and the starting condition for the special game regarding the second special is higher than the starting condition for the special game regarding the first special. It may be established preferentially (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). Also, on the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure is established with priority over the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation) You can do it.

It should be noted that, in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, by displaying a number indicating the number of special figure reserved memory, the player or the like may be able to recognize the number of special figure reserved memory. Along with the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, or instead of the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, an indicator for displaying the number of special figure pending memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, along with the start winning memory display area 5H, on the upper part of the first special design display device 4A and the second special design display device 4B, the first reservation for identifiably displaying the number of special design reservation storage A display 25A and a second pending display 25B are provided. The first reservation display 25A identifiably displays the first reservation memory number as the number of effective starting winning balls entered into the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. The second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation memory number as the number of effective starting winning balls entered into the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B so as to be identifiable. 1st holding indicator 25A and 2nd
Each of the pending indicators 25B includes, for example, the number of LEDs (eg, four) corresponding to the upper limit value (eg, "4") of each of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. A movable accessory 1000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 .

The movable accessory 1000 incorporates a motor and a lamp for operating the star-shaped member. The movable accessory 1000 operates (turns and lights up) when an effect for notifying a big hit, for example, a variable result foretelling effect or a look-ahead foretelling effect, which will be described later, is executed.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball device 6B has a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a normal open state, which is a vertical position, and an enlarged open state, which is a tilted position, by means of a solenoid 27 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normal variable prize ball device 6B, when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing is in a vertical position, so that the game ball does not enter or enters the second start prize hole. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the game ball enters the second starting winning hole by tilting control in which the movable wing is in the tilting position. It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to use.

A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, for example. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the number of first reserved storage is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ), the first starting condition is met. Based on the detection of game balls by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ), the second starting condition is met. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the first starting port switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the second starting port switch 22B may be the same number as each other, or may be different numbers.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is a solenoid 28 for the big winning opening door shown in FIG.
A large prize winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by the large winning prize opening door is provided, and the large winning prize opening that changes between an open state and a closed state is formed by the large winning prize opening door. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening when the solenoid 28 for the large winning opening door is in the OFF state. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening when the solenoid 28 for the large winning opening door is on. A game ball entering a big winning hole formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG.
Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15
) are paid out as prize balls.

In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game that was started earlier is being executed, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, etc. When the start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the suspension of the variable display occurs. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first start condition based on the establishment of the first start condition is satisfied.
If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the special figure is not satisfied, the number of first reserved memories is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. be done.
Also, when the second start condition is established, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not met, the second reservation storage The number is incremented by 1, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when execution of the special game using the first special figure is started, the number of first reserved memories is decremented by 1, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. when the second
The number of pending stores is decremented by one. In addition, the added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be called the total reserved memory number or the special figure reserved memory number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, is composed of 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs, etc., and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. A normal pattern (also referred to as "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Variable display of such normal patterns,
It is called a normal map game (also called "normal map game"). The normal symbol display device 20 is, for example, "
It variably displays a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating 0 to 9 and symbols indicating -. In addition, the normal symbol display device 20 is not limited to those that variably display numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" as normal symbols, for example, "○" and "X". By alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) shown, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle", and "right" in a predetermined order, the normal pattern is variably displayed. can be anything. Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The normal map reservation display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal map reservation memory number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 41A and 41B.

On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails are provided. In addition, as the winning openings different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 50A to 50D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A prize area is provided.

The general winning openings 50A to 50D are constituted by ball receiving members projecting forward (toward the player) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above through the opening. smaller than an individual diameter. Therefore, two or more game balls are prevented from passing through the opening of the ball receiving member in a row in the horizontal direction. In addition, each general prize mouth 50A ~
The interval between each ball receiving member provided with 50D is an interval through which at least one or more game balls can pass. In addition, a winning ball device for switching between opening and closing of the openings of the general winning openings 50A to 50D (for example, a function corresponding to the normal variable winning ball device 6B for switching opening and closing of the second start winning opening) is not provided. It is always open. In addition, general prize gates 50A to 5
Even if the game ball wins at 0D, neither the condition for starting the variable display of the special game nor the condition for starting the variable display of the normal game is satisfied based on the winning.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded to the player as a specific value based on the winning of the game balls in the general prize winning opening. With the game ball entering the winning hole, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B for controlling the opening and closing of the second start winning hole and a special variable for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning hole The act of activating the winning ball device 7 to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole or the big winning hole may be the specific value given when the game ball enters the general winning hole.

Also, the specific value given to the player may be varied according to the general winning opening.
prize balls are given, but when game balls win in the first general prize winning port 50A or the fourth general prize winning port 50D, 10 prize balls are given (that is, specific values of different sizes are given granted). In addition, the specific value given when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening When a game ball wins in 50D, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 7 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

Also, different effects may be executed according to the specific value that is given according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening. is awarded, and when the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole (that is, when the type of the specific value is different), different effects are executed. Also good. In addition, there are cases where 10 prize balls are given according to the winning of game balls to the general winning opening, and cases where 5 winning balls are given according to the winning of game balls to the general winning opening. (That is, when the magnitude of the specific value is different), different effects may be executed.

Winning of game balls to the first general winning opening 50A, the second general winning opening 50B, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening 50D is, as shown in FIG. It is detected by the opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. When game balls are detected by the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out as prize balls.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 10
At 0, it is possible to detect not only that a game ball has entered a general winning hole, but also which general winning hole a game ball has won.

It should be noted that the structure is not limited to the configuration in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for each general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that the general winning opening provided in the left game area 10A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B. , A common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that the general winning opening provided in the right game area 10B has been won) is provided for the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. You can do it. In addition, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D
A common general prize winning port switch (a switch for detecting that any of the general prize winning ports has been won) may be provided for all the general prize winning ports.

At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports. The game balls taken into the out port are recovered to the game island via a ball recovery passage (not shown) communicating with the out port. Game balls that have entered each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st to 4th general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collection trough (not shown), and the balls It is designed to be collected to the game island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball recovery passage. As a result, in the out-ball detector, the game balls driven into the game area 10 (the game balls led to the out-port without winning in any of the winning ports, and the winning balls Game balls collected in the gutter) Detect all game balls. Every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 12, so that the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of game balls hit into the game area 10, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. If the out-ball detector is configured to have a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, each time the value of the counter increases by a certain number (for example, 10), effect control is performed. By outputting an out number increase signal to the substrate 12, the number of outs may be tallied in units of a certain number (for example, in units of 10) on the CPU 120 side for effect control.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc.
is provided, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 3a, there is an upper tray 60 for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. is provided. For example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 60, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is installed.

A keyhole 61 of a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 60 . By inserting a key corresponding to the keyhole 61 into the keyhole 61 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, the glass door frame 3a can be opened forward with respect to the frame 3 for gaming machines. In addition, by inserting the key into the keyhole 61 and rotating the key in the other direction, for example, clockwise, the gaming machine frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the keyhole 61, and when the key is released or pulled out after the key is inserted into the keyhole 61 and rotated counterclockwise or clockwise, the keyhole 61 rotates in the opposite direction. direction to return to the neutral position. When the keyhole 61 is at the neutral position, the glass door frame 3a can be closed and locked with respect to the game machine frame 3, and the game machine frame 3 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. becomes possible. again,
By opening the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the game machine frame 3, maintenance of the game board (gauge board including game nails and prize winning openings) 2 (for example, countermeasures for solving ball jams), A mode changeover switch 31 and a display changeover switch 32, which will be described later, can be operated.

Directly below the upper tray 60, a lower tray 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 60 is provided. A batting operation handle (operation knob) 63 is provided which is operated by a player or the like for shooting. For example, the hitting ball operation handle 63 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball-hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping the driving of the firing motor of the ball-hitting device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. Note that the operation button 30 is not limited to one that can be pressed or rotated. For example, the operation button 30 may be one that can be touched or pressed like a touch panel, or can be tilted like a lever switch. It may be one that can be operated, or one that can be pushed and tilted like a joystick. Also, instead of the operation buttons 30, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 may be configured so as to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined act of operation by the player. The player's act of operating the operation button 30 is detected by a depression detection switch (not shown) that detects the depression of the operation button 30 and a rotary encoder (not shown) that detects the direction and amount of rotation of the operation button (jog dial) 30. not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 1, game balls that have passed through the first passage gate 41A provided in the left game area 10A and the second passage gate 41B provided in the right game area 10B enter the first passage gate 41A shown in FIG. The normal pattern start condition for executing the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 20, such as being detected by the corresponding first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B corresponding to the second pass gate 41B, is After establishment, based on the fact that the general pattern start condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the completion of the previous general pattern game, is satisfied, the general pattern display device 20 starts the general pattern game. be.

In this general pattern game, when a predetermined period of normal pattern variation time elapses after the normal pattern variation is started, fixed normal symbols that result in variable display of the normal pattern are stopped and displayed (derivative display).
At this time, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern hit pattern) such as a number indicating "7" is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern hit". On the other hand, if a normal pattern other than a normal pattern per pattern, such as a number or symbol other than a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern will be "normal pattern lost". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern hit", expansion opening control (tilting control) is performed so that the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B are placed at the tilting position. After a predetermined time has elapsed, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position.

The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is the first special symbol game formed in the normal winning ball device 6A.
After the first start condition is met by the game ball entering the starting winning opening being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. is started when the first start condition is met. In the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball entering the second starting winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second starting condition is satisfied by, for example, the second starting condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when a predetermined time to become the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol To derive and display the finalized special symbol (special symbol display result). At this time, if a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern, it will be a "big hit" as a result of the specific display, and if a special pattern (lost pattern) other than the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, it will be "losing". "
becomes. A specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as a fixed special symbol differs depending on the type of the big win, and for example, the fixed special symbol differs between the definite variable big win and the non-definite variable big win. After the variable display result in the special game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to a big win game state as a specific state in which a round game (simply called "round") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times.

In a jackpot game state that is controlled after a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern in a special game, the opening/closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds), which is the first period, or for a predetermined number of times. A round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to a first state that is advantageous to the player by opening the big winning hole until (for example, nine) winning balls are generated. be. In this way, the opening/closing plate that opens the big winning hole during the execution of the round game catches the game balls falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the big winning hole, thereby providing a special variable winning ball device. 7 is changed to a second state that is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is ended. In the jackpot state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the cycle of opening the jackpot, is, for example, 15 times. In addition, you may provide the jackpot classification of several types from which the number of times of execution of a round game differs.

After the jackpot state is over, as one of the advantageous states for the player, a time reduction control is executed in which the variable display time of the special symbols in the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) is shortened compared to the normal state. It is controlled to a time saving state that is performed, and a probability variation state that probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed along with time reduction control.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a game state different from a specific state such as a jackpot game state, a time saving state, and a variable probability state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset) , the same control as in the state where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on) is performed. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special game is executed, or the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", one of the conditions is met first Then you can exit. In addition, in the probability change state, in the variable display of each special game and decorative pattern, the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is further controlled to the big hit game state is higher than the normal state and the time saving state. improves. Such a variable probability state continues until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) of special figure games are executed.

A big hit (type) that is controlled to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is also called a variable probability big hit. The jackpot (type) controlled to the time saving state without being controlled to the variable probability state after the jackpot game state is completed is also referred to as the non-variable probability jackpot.

In the probability variable state and the time saving state, the normal pattern display device 20 controls the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern game to be shorter than in the normal state, and the normal pattern variable in each normal pattern game. Control for improving the probability that the display result will be a "normal hit" than in the normal state, and tilting control of the movable wing in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being a "normal hit". The second start condition is set by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state, control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of success. In addition, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole in the variable probability state or the time saving state and is advantageous for the player is also called high open control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged open state is increased compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the special game can be executed frequently, so that the following In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" is shortened. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it becomes easier to become a big hit game state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state. A state in which high opening control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which high opening control is not being performed is also referred to as a low base state.

"Left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C provided in the image display device 5
, In 5R, any one of the special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B In response to the start of the picture game, the variable display of decorative patterns is started. After the variable display of decorative patterns is started, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are displayed.
During the period until the variable display ends due to the stop display of the fixed decorative design in , the variable display state of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-reach state. Here, the ready-to-win state means the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are still not stopped and displayed when they constitute a part of the jackpot combination (“ready-to-win fluctuation pattern”). ) is a display state in which fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating synchronously while constituting all or part of a big winning combination. Specifically, "left", "
Part of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left" and "right")
In the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), the decorative patterns constituting a predetermined jackpot combination (for example, the decorative patterns showing alphanumeric characters "7") are still stopped when they are stopped. In the remaining decorative design display areas (for example, "middle" decorative design display area 5C, etc.), the display state in which the decorative design is fluctuating, or "left", "middle", "right" decorative design display area 5L , 5C, and 5R, all or part of the decoration symbols constitute all or part of the jackpot combination and fluctuate synchronously.

In addition, in response to reaching the ready-to-win state, the variation speed of the decoration pattern is reduced, or a character image (a production image simulating a person or the like) different from the decoration pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.
, changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decoration pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decoration pattern. Actions may be performed. The performance operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the playback display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are
This is called reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the ready-to-win effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5 but also the voice output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) of the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. A different mode of operation than the previous mode of operation may be included. As the effect action in the ready-to-win effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "ready-to-win patterns") having different operation modes (ready-to-win mode) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") differs in each reach mode. That is, depending on which one of the multiple types of reach effects is executed, the variable display result is "
The possibility of becoming a "jackpot" can be varied. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. Then, when the ready-to-win mode of super-reach appears, the possibility (reliability of big win) of the variable display result to be a "big hit" is higher than when the ready-to-win mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the ready-to-win effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the ready-to-win state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit".
A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed by a variable display mode of the decoration pattern. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "pseudo run" and "slip" can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 11 side. It is determined whether

During the variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or variable display effects such as "pseudo run" and "slip", decoration images such as predetermined character images and message images are displayed. The player is notified that the variable display state of decorative patterns may become a ready-to-win state or that the result of variable display may be a "jackpot" by a performance action different from the variable display action of the patterns. A notice effect for doing may be executed.

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not enter the ready state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the predetermined A fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of decorative symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of "no reach" (also referred to as "no reach") when the variable display result is "loss".

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in a special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the ready-to-win effect is executed, or without the ready-to-win effect being executed, there are cases where the determined decorative symbols that form a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also referred to as a ready-to-win losing combination) are stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of decorative symbols is called a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". It should be noted that the determined decorative symbols that are a non-reach combination and the determined decorative symbols that are a reach-losing combination are also collectively referred to as the determined decorative symbols of the losing combination (non-specific combination).

When a special pattern to be a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern in a special pattern game, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the change in the variable display state of the decorative pattern to the ready-to-win state. Afterwards, fixed decorative symbols that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.
Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are the jackpot combination are, for example, "left", "
The pattern number variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the middle and right is 1
” to “8” are stop-displayed aligned on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Anything is fine.

In addition, after the decorative symbols to be the jackpot combination are derived and displayed, a pre-reading for notifying and announcing that pending data is stored in which the special pattern display result is "jackpot" is stored during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state. An advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, the game area 10 consists of the left game area 10A and the right game area 10B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) to control the left game area 10A. It is possible to switch between left-handed hitting that shoots a game ball toward and right-handed hitting that shoots a game ball toward the right game area 10B.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball is shot to the left game area 10A (the left game area 10A
), the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guide member (not shown) causes the game ball to enter the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is shot to the right game area 10B. It is designed to win prizes. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (normal pattern fluctuation time) is longer than when the game state is the probability variable state and the time saving state, and the variable display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern hit". Since the probability of becoming is low, the left game area 10A in the normal state
The percentage of the game balls shot to win the second starting winning opening is extremely low compared to the percentage winning the first starting winning opening.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is shot to the right game area 10B (when a game ball enters the right game area 10B), the left Compared to the case where the game ball is shot into the game area 10A, the rate of the game ball winning the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win the first starting winning opening. there is Therefore, even if the game ball hits right in the normal state, the percentage of the game balls winning the starting prize opening (either the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening) is the same as hitting left in the normal state. It is extremely low compared to the percentage of game balls that sometimes win the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player hits to the left in the normal state.

In addition, the rate at which the game ball shot to the right game area 10B passes through the second passage gate 41B is determined by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), so that the game ball shot to the left game area 10A is second. It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 41A. Then, the ratio of the game balls shot to the right game area 10B to enter the second start winning opening in the open state is determined by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), which is the game shot to the left game area 10A It is higher than the percentage of balls winning the second start winning opening in the open state.

Then, in the probability variable state and the time saving state, the variation time of normal patterns (normal pattern variation time) is shortened more than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of normal patterns is ``per normal pattern'' is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the game ball is hit to the right in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the starting winning hole (first
The percentage of winning the starting winning mouth and the second starting winning mouth) is the starting winning mouth (first starting winning mouth and second starting winning mouth) when the game ball hits left in the variable probability state and the time saving state ) is higher than the winning percentage. Therefore, the player hits to the right in the variable probability state and the time saving state.

In addition, the ratio of the game ball launched to the right game area 10B entering the large winning opening in the open state is
Due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the percentage of game balls shot to the left game area 10A entering the large winning opening in the open state is higher. Therefore, the player hits to the right in the jackpot game state. In this way, the player hits to the left in the normal state, switches to hitting to the right when the big win game state occurs, continues to hit to the right in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game state, and returns to the normal state. It will be returned to left-handed with the transition (for example, the end of the probability variable state or the time saving state without the jackpot game state).

In addition, the game ball launched to the left game area 10A is provided in the left game area 10A.
The ratio of winning the general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B depends on the position where the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B are provided, and the game nail or game ball induction member not shown. Depending on the arrangement, the game ball launched to the right game area 10B is the first general winning opening 50A
Or, it is higher than the ratio of winning the second general winning opening 50B. On the other hand, right game area 10
The ratio of the game ball launched to B winning the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D provided in the right game area 10B is the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D
, and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball shot to the left game area 10A is the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50
It is higher than the rate of winning D.

In addition, for some or all of the plurality of general winning openings (first general winning opening 50A and second general winning opening 50B) provided in the left gaming area 10A, only the game ball launched to the left gaming area 10A It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball launched to the right game area 10B may not win a prize. 50D), only game balls shot to the right game area 10B can win, and game balls shot to the left game area 10A may not win.

Thus, since left-handed hitting is performed in the normal state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B among the four general winning openings, and the jackpot game state and , In the probability variable state and the time saving state, since right-handed hitting is performed, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D among the four general winning openings. In accordance with the game state and the like, the general winning opening through which the game ball is likely to win changes as the game area where the game ball is shot changes. In addition, in the left game area 10A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game where the game ball enters in the jackpot game state, the probability variable state and the time saving state. In the area 10B, the frequency of winning the general winning openings may be changed according to the game state, such as providing the general winning openings at positions where it is difficult for game balls to win (or vice versa).

Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. again,
The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. - 特許庁In addition, pachinko machine 1
Various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like. The power supply board is the main board 11
, the effect control board 12 and the like. In addition to the main board 11 and the performance control board 12, the power supply board includes the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the relay board 15.
It is also connected to other boards such as , and supplies power. The power board is provided with a power switch, and when the power switch is turned on, the power is turned on, and the power supply board starts supplying power to each board. Also, by turning off the power switch, the power supply to each board is stopped. Further, the main board 11 includes a payout control board. In addition, the payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 11 . The payout control board is a board for controlling the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is composed of a ball payout device (not shown) and the like in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11). A payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to execute the payout of prize balls.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 mainly has the function of setting random numbers used in the special game, the function of inputting signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions,
A function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal to a sub-side control board composed of the production control board 12 etc., a function of outputting various information to the hall management computer, etc. I have it. In addition, the main board 11 is the first special symbol display device 4A.
And to control the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure by performing lighting / extinguishing control such as each LED (eg segment LED) constituting the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 2
It also has a function of controlling the variable display of predetermined display symbols, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display 20 by performing lighting/extinguishing/coloring control of 0 and the like. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that captures detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and signals from the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 27 and 28 is mounted.

Also, the switch circuit 110 takes in signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 (details will be described later) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . Although details will be described later, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is for detecting an abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and the relay board 15
receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the image display device 5, the speaker 8L
, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, various circuits for controlling performance operations by electrical parts for performance are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 controls all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the turning on/off operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It has a function to determine the control content for causing the electric parts for the performance to execute a predetermined performance operation.

The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the speakers 8L, 8R
It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for outputting audio from. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12, lighting / extinguishing in the game effect lamp 9 etc. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit for driving.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main substrate 11 includes a first gate switch 21A, a second gate switch 21B, a first start switch 22A, a second start switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a switch 23.
, 1st general winning slot switch 24A, 2nd general winning slot switch 24B, 3rd general winning slot switch 24C, and 4th general winning slot switch 24D are connected.

In addition, the first gate switch 21A, the second gate switch 21B, the first starting port switch 2
2A, second starting switch 22B, count switch 23, first general winning switch 24
The A to fourth general prize winning port switches 24D may have any configuration, such as a sensor, which can detect a game ball as a game medium. Moreover, the main board 1
1 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20,
Wires for transmitting command signals for controlling the display of the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal drawing hold display 25C, etc. are connected. Wiring for transmitting signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is connected to the main board 11 .

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 via the relay board 15, and blocks the input of the signal from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. - 特許庁Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the performance control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

The relay board 15 may be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit is
A diode whose anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and whose cathode is connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode and the other end to the ground (GND) connected resistor. With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can block the input of the signal from the performance control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the performance control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulation circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting control signals on the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. is provided, it is possible to prevent the input of an unauthorized signal to the main substrate 11 from the outside.

The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and lamp control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Such production control commands include, for example, a game state designation command that designates a game state (normal state, variable probability state, or time saving state), a variation start command that designates the start of fluctuation in a special game, a special in a special game Variation pattern specification command for specifying variation pattern such as pattern variation time and decoration pattern in image display device 5, variable display result notification command for specifying variable display result such as special pattern and decoration pattern, decoration pattern in image display device 5 A decorative pattern stop command that designates the stop of the variable display, a jackpot start designation command that designates the start or end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot end designation command, a game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening The start winning command output when the game ball wins, the general winning mouth designation command output when the game ball wins in the general winning mouth, the big winning mouth winning command output when the game ball wins in the big winning mouth, etc. included.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like.
(Read Only Memory) 101 and RAM (Random A
ccess Memory) 102 and a CPU (Ce
103 , a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data representing random numbers independently of the CPU 103 , and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 . As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 is a ROM
By executing the program read from 101, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. At this time, the CPU 103 is stored in the ROM 101
a fixed data read operation for reading out fixed data from the CPU 103;
2, a fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the CPU 103;
is a receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a transmission operation for the CPU 103 to output various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. etc. are also performed.

Thus, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103
Since game control is performed by executing the game control program stored in the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) hereinafter, the execution (or processing) is specifically, The CPU 103 executes control according to the program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on other boards different from the main board 11 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 provides a production control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the production control CPU 120. A RAM 122 that updates numerical data indicating a random number independently of the RAM 122 that performs the processing for determining the control contents of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the display control unit 123 that performs processing for determining the control content of the display operation, and the production control CPU 120. circuit 124
and I/O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 executes the production control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing processing for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts. At this time, the performance control CPU120 fixed data reading operation to read the fixed data from the ROM121, the performance control CPU120 writes various variable data to the RAM122 and temporarily stored variable data write operation, the performance control CPU120 to the RAM122 Variation data reading operation to read various variation data temporarily stored, effect control CPU 120 is I / O 12
5, a reception operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the production control board 12, and a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 by the production control CPU 120 through the I/O 125. .

The production control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting video signals to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting sound effect signals as information signals indicating sound number data to the audio control board 13, Wiring for transmitting illumination signals as information signals indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting control signals to the movable accessory 1000, and the like are connected. In addition, to the effect control board 12, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation act on the operation button 30 has been detected is sent from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, the position of the operation part (first
position or second position), and wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32, which will be described later. It is connected.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 contains the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8
R, light emitters such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operation buttons 30, movable accessories 100
0, furthermore, in order to control the performance operation using the performance device (electric parts for performance) including the movable members provided in the performance accessory, a plurality of types of pattern data constituting the performance control pattern are prepared in advance. remembered.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG.
Based on the display control command from 0, the contents of control of the display operation in the image display device 5 are determined. For example, the display control unit 123 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and executes various effect displays such as the variable display of decorative patterns and the effect display in the ready-to-win effect. control. The display control unit 123 controls the VD
P (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (
Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 confirms the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 etc., the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode changeover switch 31 Including an input port for taking in various signals such as a signal that enables and a signal that enables confirmation of the state of the display changeover switch 32, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 Configured. For example, from the output port of the I/O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. A command (driving signal) or the like to be transmitted to the movable accessory 1000 is output.

The voice control board 13 includes, for example, an input/output driver, voice synthesis IC, voice data ROM,
Amplification circuit, volume, etc. are installed. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated by the sound effect signal transmitted from the performance control board 12 is input to the voice synthesizing IC via the input/output driver. The voice synthesizing IC generates voice and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit amplifies the output level of the voice synthesizing IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the voice signal to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesizing IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voices and sound effects. The data stored in the voice data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of voices and sound effects in a time series for a predetermined period.

An input/output driver, a lamp driver, and the like are mounted on the lamp control board 14, for example. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the illumination signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input/output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko game machine 1, the abnormality is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13, or by controlling the lamp control board 14. Through the display control unit 123, an abnormality notification image (error message) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by controlling the lighting/extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. Notify by displaying. Anomalies include magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, radio anomaly, and the like, and are detected using the anomaly detection sensor group 26 and the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is composed of one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality that occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 . The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is not limited to sensors, and may include circuits for detecting abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to sensors, and the like.
The abnormality detection sensor group 26 may be composed of sensors for detecting abnormality. One or more sensors, etc., included in each abnormality detection sensor group 26 are prepared according to each type of abnormality. What the abnormality detection sensor group 26 specifically includes may be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. Abnormalities that occur in the pachinko game machine 1 are phenomena that do not occur or are extremely unlikely to occur in normal games played on the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, and and phenomena such as abnormal radio waves) and phenomena that may interfere with the progress of the game.
In particular, it refers to a phenomenon that requires notification to players and employees of game halls (such as pachinko parlors).

The abnormality detection sensor group 26 includes, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects predetermined radio waves (such as radio waves in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26 . It should be noted that a well-known method can be appropriately used to detect an abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 100 detects magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, and radio anomaly based on the output signal from the anomaly detection sensor group 26, an anomaly detection designation command specifying that an anomaly has occurred is sent to the main board. 11 to the production control board 12, the display of an error message on the image display device 5, the output of a warning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 when an abnormality occurs, etc. Notification is made. For example, when an abnormality occurs, an image of characters "An error has occurred." is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 43(f).

Here, the notifying means such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 indicate that not only an abnormality has occurred, but also any type of abnormality such as magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and opening of the front door. It may be notified in a identifiable manner whether an abnormality is detected.

The magnetic anomaly notification is an anomaly notification performed when a magnetic anomaly (an anomaly in which a magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko game machine 1, in which case there is a possibility of fraud) is detected.
There is cheating such as moving game media with a magnet to win a prize, or clogging a predetermined area with game media in order to guide the game media to the prize winning port. By reporting magnetic anomalies,
To prevent such acts from occurring. For example, one of the abnormality detection sensor group 26
As one sensor, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic anomaly by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (indicates magnetic force→exists of magnetic anomaly). When a magnetic anomaly is detected, an anomaly detection designation command designating that the magnetic anomaly has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the magnetic anomaly. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters "A magnetic error has occurred."

Notification of vibration abnormality is, for example, notification of abnormality that can be executed in a pachinko game machine or the like in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. There is a fraudulent act of intentionally shaking a pachinko game machine to change the flowing direction of a game medium toward a winning opening such as a big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, such an action is prevented in advance. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 . CPU 103
determines whether there is an abnormality due to vibration (vibration abnormality) by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates a vibration with a strength equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (vibration abnormality). → vibration abnormal). When the vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command designating that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the vibration abnormality. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters "a vibration error has occurred."

The radio wave anomaly notification is an anomaly notification that is performed when a radio wave anomaly (a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko game machine 1, in which case there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. By applying radio waves to the starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), the count switch 23, etc., these switches are switched on/off, etc., thereby illegally generating winning prizes and playing prize balls. There is cheating to get. To prevent such an act from being performed by announcing radio wave anomaly. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided. The CPU 103 determines the presence or absence of radio wave abnormality by determining whether the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicates reception of predetermined radio wave→abnormal radio wave). When the radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the radio wave abnormality. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5,
An image of characters "A radio wave error has occurred." is displayed.

Both the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are DIP switches (Dual
In-line Package switch), and is provided outside the game area of the game board 2 . A mode changeover switch 31 and a display changeover switch 3 configured by a DIP switch
2, by switching the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, by switching the position of the knob between one end side and the other end side), the effect control CPU 1
The processing (control program) executed by 20 can be switched. When the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 3, the glass door frame 3a covers the front surface of the game board 2, so the player cannot operate the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32. It has become. Note that the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are operated by the player via the glass door frame 3a when the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 (the state shown in FIG. 1). It is not shown in FIG. 1 because it is installed in an invisible position.

As described above, the game hall clerk inserts the key into the keyhole 61 to open the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the game machine frame 3. It is possible to operate the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 provided on the game board 2 (switching of DIP switches). Then, the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32
When the operation is completed, the glass door frame 3a is returned to the closed state with respect to the game machine frame 3, and the key is inserted into the keyhole 61 to close the locking device (not shown).

When the operation portion of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in a Low state, and when the operation portion of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, effect control. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the main CPU 120 becomes High.
When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the operating portion of the mode switching switch 31 is at the first position, that is, the image display device 5 displays information for the player (for example, demo screen, etc.) is specified, and the information of the prize number management table, which will be described later, is not displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operating portion of the mode switching switch 31 is at the second position, that is, the information for the clerk on the image display device 5 (for example, The number of winnings to each winning slot, etc.) is specified, and information of a winning number management table, which will be described later, is displayed on the image display device 5 .

When the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is at the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in a Low state, and when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is at the second position, effect control The voltage of the display switching terminal of the display CPU 120 becomes High. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operating portion of the display switching switch 32 is at the first position, that is, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening is displayed on the image display device 5. By specifying that display is not permitted, information (
information that can specify the number of prizes won in the general prize pool) is prohibited from being displayed on the image display device 5.
On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the operating portion of the display switching switch 32 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 is set to the general winning slot. Permission to display the number is specified, and information based on a display control table to be described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winnings) is permitted to be displayed on the image display device 5. do.

In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are
, the mode changeover switch 31 and/or the display changeover switch 32 may be provided on the back side of the game board 2 (on the game island side).
In the case of such a configuration, by rotating the gaming machine frame 3 forward with respect to the outer frame,
A mode changeover switch 31 and/or a display changeover switch 32 provided on the back side of the game board 2
can be operated.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, there is a starting winning command as described above. As the starting winning command, a starting winning mouth designation command indicating whether the starting winning mouth has occurred for the first starting winning mouth or the second starting winning mouth, and a starting winning mouth designation command for the first starting winning mouth or the second starting winning mouth There is a determination result specifying command at the time of start winning, which indicates the big hit determination result and the big hit type determination result at the time of winning of the game ball.

The CPU 103 determines the effective starting winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, that is, the number of game balls to the first starting winning opening in the state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, a random number for judging a big hit and a random number for judging a big hit type are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted random number for judging a big hit and a random number for judging a big hit type are stored in the first random number storage area for the first special figure. It stores in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the number of first reserved memories after addition including the effective start winning prize), and sets a command designating "first starting prize winning opening" as a starting winning prize opening designation command. In addition, the CPU 103 extracts (stores) the random number for judging a big hit,
Start-up winning judgment is executed for judging whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in the jackpot judging table corresponding to the current game state (normal state, time-saving state, or variable probability state) is matched.

In this startup winning judgment, if the big-hit judgment random number does not match the big-hit judgment value in the big-hit judgment table, a startup winning judgment result designating command designating "loss" is set. If the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value in the jackpot judgment table,
Further, it is determined whether the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number matches with any of the determination values stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. Then, a determination result designation command at the time of start winning, which designates "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value, is set. For example, a command specifying "non-probability variable big hit" or a command specifying "probability variable big hit" is set as the command for specifying the judgment result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set starting winning opening designation command ("first starting winning opening" designation) and determination result designation command at the time of starting winning are output to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁

In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the starting winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value When detecting an invalid start prize that is paid out but is not the target of the special game, a command to designate the "first start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command,
Blank data specifying that it is not a valid start winning is set as a start winning determination result designation command. Then, the set starting winning mouth designation command ("first starting winning mouth"
Designation) and start winning judgment result designation command (blank data) is output to the effect control board 12.

The CPU 103 determines the effective starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, that is, the number of game balls to the second starting winning opening in the state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, a random number for judging a big hit and a random number for judging a big hit type are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted random number for judging a big hit and a random number for judging a big hit type are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. It stores in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning prize), and sets a command designating a "second starting prize winning opening" as a starting winning prize opening designation command. In addition, the CPU 103 extracts (stores) the random number for judging a big hit,
Start winning judgment is executed for judging whether or not a big hit judgment value stored in a big hit judgment table according to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state) is matched.

In this startup winning judgment, if the big-hit judgment random number does not match the big-hit judgment value in the big-hit judgment table, a startup winning judgment result designating command designating "loss" is set. If the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value in the jackpot judgment table,
Further, it is determined whether the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number matches with any of the determination values stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. Then, a determination result designation command at the time of start winning, which designates "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value, is set. For example, a command specifying "non-probability variable big hit" or a command specifying "probability variable big hit" is set as the command for specifying the judgment result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set starting winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and starting winning timing determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines the starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value (that is, the second starting winning opening When detecting an invalid start prize that is paid out but is not the target of the special game, a command to specify the "second start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command,
Blank data specifying that it is not a valid start winning is set as a start winning determination result designation command. Then, the set start winning mouth designation command ("second starting winning mouth"
Designation) and start winning determination result designation command (blank data) is output to the effect control board 12.

In addition, in this embodiment, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the start winning is determined, and based on the determination result Although we are trying to execute the pre-reading notice effect, it is not limited to such a form,
A variation pattern of variable display corresponding to the starting prize may be determined based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of starting winning, and a look-ahead foretelling performance may be executed based on the determination result. For example, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a variation pattern of super reach, compared to the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a non-reach variation pattern, so that the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate. good to do

Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects the effective starting winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole, the CPU 103 extracts a variation pattern determination random number from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted variation pattern determination random number as a jackpot determination. Together with the random number and the random number for judging the jackpot type, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the random number storage area for the first special figure (the first reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning prize). In addition, when the CPU 103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts a variation pattern determination random number from the random number circuit 104, and converts the extracted variation pattern determination random number into a jackpot determination random number and a jackpot. Together with the random number for type determination, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number in the random number storage area for the second special figure (the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning prize).

Here, in the ROM 101, a variation pattern determination table for losing, in which a random number range corresponding to each of the losing variation patterns shown in FIG. A big hit variation pattern determination table in which the random number range is set is stored.

When the determination result of the start winning time determination (the display result specified by the start winning time determination result designation command) is "loss", the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table and extracts (stores It is determined whether the random number for determining the variation pattern is included in the random number range of any variation pattern, and the variation pattern corresponding to the random number for determining the variation pattern is specified, and the specified variation pattern is "non-reach out". , "Normal Reach Loss", and "Super Reach Loss".

On the other hand, the CPU 103, when the determination result of the start winning determination (the display result specified by the start winning determination result designation command) is either "non-probability variable big hit" or "probability variable big hit", the big hit variation With reference to the pattern determination table, determine which variation pattern random number range the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination random number is included in, and specify the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number Then, a variation pattern determination result specification command at the time of starting winning is set to specify whether the specified variation pattern is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot".

When the invalid start winning is detected, the CPU 103 sets blank data designating that the start winning is not a valid start winning as a variation pattern determination result designation command at the start winning.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set start winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the performance control board 12 as a start winning command along with the start winning opening designation command and the start winning determination result designation command.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a starting winning opening designation command specifying the "first starting winning opening" and a starting winning judgment result designation command including valid data that is not blank data (and a starting winning opening including valid data that is not blank data). When the winning variation pattern judgment result designation command) is received, the start winning judgment result designation command (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) are stored in the first reservation in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the number of first reserved memories after addition including the valid start winning prize), and store the start winning mouth designation command designated as "second start winning mouth" and valid data that is not blank data When receiving a start winning judgment result designation command including valid data other than blank data (and a start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command containing valid data that is not blank data), the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment Result designation command) is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning prize) in the start winning prize command storage area for the second special figure. The effect control CPU 120 confirms the start winning judgment result designation command (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start winning command storage area, so that the first special is executed before the start condition is established. By estimating the display result (and variation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure, it is possible to execute the pre-reading announcement effect.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 includes a start winning opening designation command specifying "first starting winning opening" and a start winning judgment result designation command including blank data (and a start winning judgment result designation command including blank data) is received, it is specified that the invalid start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred, and the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) for the first special figure It is possible to store the winning history to the first starting winning port in the winning history storage area described later without storing it in the starting winning command storage area (excluding it from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect), and the "second When receiving the starting winning opening designation command and the starting winning judgment result designation command including blank data (and the starting winning judgment result designation command including blank data), the second
Identifying that an invalid start winning to the start winning opening has occurred, the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) to the start winning prize command storage area for the second special figure It is possible to store the winning history to the second starting winning port in the winning history storage area described later without storing (excluded from the execution target of the pre-reading announcement effect).

As a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, there is a variation pattern designation command as described above. As shown below, the main board 11 determines a variation pattern according to the special symbol display result to be derived and displayed when starting the variable display of the special symbol, and notifies the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern. Outputs a variation pattern specification command for The performance control data corresponding to each variation pattern is stored in advance in the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 provides performance control data corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern specification command. Data is selected, and performance control is executed according to the selected performance control data.

CPU103, when the first start condition is established and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for judging the kind of the big hit stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure;
And among the random numbers for determining the variation pattern, the random number for determining the jackpot and the random number for determining the type of the jackpot in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of retained memories = 1), and the random number for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent The random number for judging the big win, the random number for judging the type of big win, and the random number for judging the variation pattern in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, the read random number for judging the big hit is the current game state (normal state or time saving state, or variable probability state)
Start time determination is performed to determine whether or not the value matches the big hit determination value stored in the big hit determination table according to.

In this start time determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command designating "loss", and together with the big hit determination random number. It is determined whether the random number for determining the variation pattern read from the first storage area is included in the random number range of any variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, and the random number for determining the variation pattern is determined. By specifying the variation pattern, the "loss variation pattern" is determined.

When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, along with setting a variable display result notification command that specifies "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value, the random number for judging the variation pattern read out from the first storage area together with the random number for judging the big hit is the variation for the big hit. A ``jackpot variation pattern'' is determined by determining which variation pattern is included in the random number range set in the pattern determination table and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs a variable display result notification command that has been set and a variation pattern designation command that designates the determined variation pattern along with a variation start command that designates the start of variation of the first special figure.

CPU103, when the second start condition is established and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for judging the kind of the big hit stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure;
And among the random numbers for determining the variation pattern, the random number for determining the jackpot and the random number for determining the type of the jackpot in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of retained memories = 1), and the random number for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent The random number for judging the big win, the random number for judging the type of big win, and the random number for judging the variation pattern in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, the read random number for judging the big hit is the current game state (normal state or time saving state, or variable probability state)
Start time determination is performed to determine whether or not the value matches the big hit determination value stored in the big hit determination table according to .

In this start time determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command designating "loss", and together with the big hit determination random number. It is determined whether the random number for determining the variation pattern read from the storage area at the beginning is included in the random number range of any variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, and the random number for determining the variation pattern is determined. By specifying the variation pattern, the "loss variation pattern" is determined.

When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. Determines which of the existing determination values matches. Then, along with setting a variable display result notification command that specifies "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value, the random number for judging the variation pattern read out from the first storage area together with the random number for judging the big hit is the variation for the big hit. A ``jackpot variation pattern'' is determined by determining which variation pattern is included in the random number range set in the pattern determination table and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs a variation pattern specification command that specifies the set variation display result notification command and the determined variation pattern along with the variation start command that specifies the variation start of the second special figure.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the fluctuation start command specifying the start of fluctuation of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the fluctuation pattern designation command, it selects the production control data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command. At the same time, it determines a fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure, the first storage area = storage area corresponding to 1) Delete the start winning determination result designation command (and start winning variation pattern determination result designation command), and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result designation command (and start winning command) is shifted one by one to the previous storage area.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the variation pattern in the ROM 121, and the reach state is established at the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls variable display of symbols.
That is, the effect control CPU 120 can grasp the establishment timing of the ready-to-win state according to the variation pattern.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the variation start command specifying the start of variation of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, it selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, it determines a fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure, = storage area corresponding to 1) Delete the start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning variation pattern judgment result designation command), and the subsequent storage area start winning judgment result designation command (and start winning time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted one by one to the previous storage area.

In addition, when the first general winning opening switch 24A to fourth general winning opening switch 24D detects that the game ball has entered the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the game ball enters any of the general winning openings. A general prize winning port designation command designating whether or not has won is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加That is, the first general winning opening switch 24
When a game ball is detected by A, a general winning hole specification command designating a prize to the first general winning hole 50A is output, and when a game ball is detected by the second general winning hole switch 24B, a second general winning hole designation command is output. When a general winning hole designation command for designating winning to the winning hole 50B is output and the game ball is detected by the third general winning hole switch 24C, general winning hole designation to designate winning to the third general winning hole 50C When the command is output and the game ball is detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, a general winning opening designation command for designating winning to the fourth general winning opening 50D is output.

Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and which of the general winning openings the game ball has won based on the received general winning opening designation command. . In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, starts winning to specify which starting winning opening the game ball wins. It is designed to receive mouth-specified commands. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 stores information capable of identifying the general winning opening in which the winning has occurred and information capable of identifying the starting winning opening in which the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 in accordance with the order of occurrence of the winning. It is possible.

The effect control CPU 120 selects the general winning opening specified by the received general winning opening designation command (
Check which of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the general winning opening in which the game ball has won), and the starting winning opening specified by the received starting winning opening designation command (game It confirms which of the first start prize winning port and the second start prize winning port is the starting prize winning port (where the ball has won), and stores the winning history of each general prize winning port and each starting prize winning port in a RAM 122.例文帳に追加For example, the second general winning opening 50B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 50A, the second starting winning opening,
When the game ball wins in the order of the third general winning opening 50C, it is called [second general winning opening, first starting winning opening, first general winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening]. history is RAM122
is stored in the winning history storage area.

In addition, when the winning to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 issues the starting winning opening designation command and the starting winning judgment result designation command. , may be transmitted prior to the general winning slot designation command. For example, detection by one of the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, and one of the first general winning switch 24A to the fourth general winning switch 24D By the general winning switch When the detection is confirmed at almost the same time (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 100 replaces the starting winning opening designation command and the starting winning judgment result designation command with the general winning opening designation command. It is better to give priority to sending first. By adopting such a transmission order, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that it has already received the starting winning opening designation command and the starting winning judgment result designation command when it receives the general winning opening designation command. It is possible, and as a specific effect to be executed based on the winning in the general winning hole, it is possible to execute a pre-reading advance notice effect based on the previously received start winning determination result specifying command.

It should be noted that, if winning to a general winning slot occurs multiple times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a plurality of general winning slot designation commands in accordance with a predetermined priority order. do. For example, when the detection by the first general winning opening switch 24A and the detection by the second general winning opening switch 24B are confirmed almost at the same time (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 100 , a general winning slot specifying command for specifying a winning to a general winning slot, which is more difficult to win, may be transmitted first with priority. In addition, if the number of prize balls to be given differs depending on the general prize winning opening, the general winning opening designation command that designates the winning to the general winning opening with the larger number of prize balls may be transmitted first with priority. good.

Further, when the count switch 23 detects that the game ball has entered the large winning slot, a large winning slot winning command designating that the game ball has entered the large winning slot is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12. output to Therefore, the production control CPU 120
It is possible to specify the winning of the game ball into the large winning opening based on the received large winning opening winning command, and the winning history is stored in the same manner as the winning history of the starting winning opening and the winning history of the general winning opening described above. It is possible to store the winning history to the big winning opening in the area.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 receives a big win start designation command that designates the start of the big win game state and receives a big win end designation command that designates the end of the big win game state. , and the number of receptions of the general winning hole designation command can be counted separately. As a result, the number of winnings to the big winning openings and the number of winnings to the general winning openings during the period in which the jackpot game state is controlled can be counted separately. 5 can also be displayed.

Further, when the game ball is launched into the game area 10, the game ball usually wins any one of the start winning opening, the general winning opening and the big winning opening at a certain frequency. When the variable display of the decoration pattern is not executed and the game ball has not won any of the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), the game There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-playing state in which the player is not playing a game. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbols, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to determine the end of the game to determine that the game has ended.

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by a winning number management table stored in the RAM 122. FIG. In this prize number management table, the first general prize gate 50
The number of winnings to each general winning opening of A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is stored. Production control CP
The U120 can tally the number of winnings to each general winning opening for each game state based on the jackpot start designation command, jackpot end designation command, game state designation command, and general winning gate designation command. In addition, the game state designation command is the timing at which the game state changes (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state to be controlled, for example, when the jackpot game state ends or when the time saving state ends). ), or at the timing when the variable display of the special symbols is started (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state when the special game is executed).

In this example, the number of winnings to the second general winning opening 50B is 50 (total for the entire period), of which the number of winnings in the normal state is 46, the number of winnings in the jackpot gaming state is 2, and the number of winnings in the variable state. is 1, and the number of prizes in the time saving state is 1. That is, the number of wins during the left-handed period is 46, and the number of wins during the right-handed period is 4. The total number of winnings to the general winning openings is 108, of which the number of winnings during the left-handed period is 81, and the number of winnings during the right-handed period is 27.

In this way, along with the number of winnings to each general winning slot, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored and displayed on the image display device 5 (or corresponding to the pachinko game machine 1). is transmitted to a game device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided as a controller and displayed on a display device provided in the game device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device provided in the information management device. Therefore, in the game arcade, it is possible to grasp the ease with which a game ball enters each general winning hole and use it for the maintenance of the game nail. For example, when the number of winning game balls into a certain general winning hole is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail in the vicinity of the general winning hole is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

Winning number information in the winning number management table (number of winnings to each general winning slot, number of winnings to general winning slots in each game state, number of winnings to general winning slots during left-handed and right-handed periods, general winning slots ) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation part of the mode switch 31 is in the second position (in the case of maintenance mode), and when it is in the first position (in the case of game mode) Do not show. The game parlor clerk switches the mode changeover switch 31 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information on the winning number management table, and performs maintenance of the game nail with reference to this, and transfers to the general winning opening. To make the winning frequency of game balls appropriate. After the maintenance is completed, the mode changeover switch 31 is returned from the second position to the first position.

In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability variable state, time saving state, jackpot game state), and the execution status of the special symbol game (special symbol Whether or not the variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the special game), the execution status of the general game (whether the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed, and the number of reserved memories of the general game) Regardless, the image display device 5 continues to display the image while the operating portion of the mode changeover switch 31 is at the second position. However, it is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information of the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the game state. The operating portion is at the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and the operating portion of the mode changeover switch 31 is at the second position.
Even if it is in the position, it may not be displayed in the variable probability state, the time saving state, and the jackpot game state.

Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the execution status of the special game.
position, the variable display of special symbols is not executed and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game can be displayed only during the period of 0, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is at the second position. However, it may not be displayed during the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed or during the period when the reserved memory number of the special symbol game is not 0. Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the execution status of the normal game.
For example, the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the variable display of the normal pattern is not executed, and it can be displayed only during the period when the number of reserved memories of the normal pattern game is 0, and the mode is switched. Even if the operating portion of the switch 31 is at the second position, it may not be displayed during the period during which the variable display of normal symbols is executed, or during the period when the number of pending memories of the normal symbol game is not 0.

The winning number information stored in the winning number management table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 31, the setting state of the display changeover switch 32, and the display setting by the operation button 30 (FIG. 5 (1
) to (3) settings on the setting screen)), it is updated based on the reception of the general winning hole designation command. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko game machine 1 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the game hall is closed. Then, the winning number information for each game machine is stored in the game information management device for each business day. Also, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is erased (reset) when the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased (reset) based on the execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area. is not erased, and after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, or the reset operation by the clerk (for example, the operation button when the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 3
0 operation).

For example, in a state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 (the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (display setting)), the store clerk of the game hall presses the operation button 30 in a predetermined manner. By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of prizes for all items stored in the number of prizes management table (the number of prizes for each general prize gate and the total number of prizes for general prize gates) is set to 0.
can be reset to

FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of win number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 122. As shown in FIG. In this display control table, the first general prize winning port 50
The number of prizes won in each of the general prize-winning openings A to the fourth general prize-winning opening 50D is stored. Production control CP
U120 can tally the number of wins for each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of winnings to the general winnings is 11, of which the first
The number of prizes won to the general prize-winning port 50A is 3, the number of prizes to the second general prize-winning port 50B is 5, the number of prizes to the third general prize-winning port 50C is 2, and the number of prizes to the fourth general prize-winning port 50D is 1. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 4, the number-of-wins information in the display control table (specifically, the number of objects to be displayed according to the total number of wins) is displayed when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is at the second position (display setting). case) and the operation button 30 is used to set the display of the number of general winnings, it is displayed on the image display device 5 . When the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), regardless of whether or not the operation button 30 is set to display the number of general winnings, the winnings of the display control table are displayed. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Also, even if the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of display setting), if the operation button 30 is not set to display the number of general winnings (in the case of non-display setting), , the winning number information in the display control table is not displayed.

That is, when the store clerk of the game arcade sets the display prohibition of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. there is Only when the store clerk of the game parlor performs the display permission setting of the winning number information with the display changeover switch 32, the winning number to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect) is executed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole. Regarding effects, as shown in FIG. 4, when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the operation button 30 is used to set the display of the number of general winnings (
Execution setting of specific effect) is performed, it becomes executable. When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (in the case of execution disapproval setting), depending on whether or not the operation button 30 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution setting of the specific effect) However, the specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited). Also, even when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), when the display setting of the number of general winnings is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-execution setting). , no specific effect is executed.

That is, when the game parlor clerk sets the display changeover switch 32 to prohibit the execution of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the player's execution setting operation. Only when the store clerk of the game parlor performs execution permission setting of the specific performance with the display changeover switch 32, the specific performance can be executed according to the player's execution setting operation.

Thus, in this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winnings is
It also serves as a setting for whether or not to execute a specific effect, and the operating means for setting is also common (
Game arcade side: display changeover switch 32, player side: operation button 30). Not limited to such a form, whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening, whether to enable execution of a specific effect,
They may be individually settable, or may be set by different operation means.

The winning number information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 31, the setting state of the display changeover switch 32, and the display setting by the operation button 30 (Fig. 5 (1
) to (3) settings on the setting screen)), it is updated based on the reception of the general winning hole designation command. Further, the winning number information (the number of winnings to each general winning slot and the total number of winnings) stored in the display control table is a specific Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the effect (A or B), it is not erased, and when the game end determination is performed by the effect control CPU 120, for example, the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed. It is erased (reset to 0) when the start winning opening designation command, general winning opening designation command, and big winning opening winning command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute).

When the number of winnings to each general winnings slot and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winnings slot displayed on the image display device 5 The winning number of is also reset to 0. For example, on the screen of FIG.
The coin-shaped object (display corresponding to winning) that was displayed on the right side of the character is no longer displayed, and the number of displayed objects becomes zero. Note that when the number of winnings to the general winning slots is not displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings to each general winning slot and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are used to determine the end of the game. If reset to 0 based on, then:
When the number of prizes won in the general prize pool is displayed on the image display device 5, the total number of prizes (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of prizes) stored in the display control table at that time is displayed. It will be.

In addition, the store clerk or the player of the game parlor can confirm that the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5 .
(a state in which objects equivalent to the total number of winnings are displayed), by pressing the operation button 30 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), regardless of the game end determination, the display control It is possible to reset the number of prizes for all items (the number of prizes for each general prize slot and the total number of prizes for general prize slots) stored in the table to 0. Winning number information is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are erased).

The display setting operation of the player is accepted by operating the operation button 30 during the display of the demonstration screen that is not related to the progress of the special game and the progress of the normal game, as shown in FIG.
A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the variable display of the decoration pattern is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening winning command are set for a predetermined period (for example, 1 When no signal has been received for more than 1 minute), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the screen of FIG. 5(1) is displayed at predetermined intervals during the display of the demo screen.

On the screen of FIG. 5(1), a message "Press the enter button to set the display of the number of general winnings."
An arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 30 is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 30 according to the instruction, the selection screen of FIG. 5(2) is displayed. On the selection screen, "Show"
and an icon containing the characters "do not display" are displayed, along with the message "Decision button after selection with jog dial" is displayed. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed.

In order to display the number of prizes won in the general prize pool, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is turned to the left to select an icon containing the characters "display", and the icon for the general prize pool is displayed. In order not to display the number of prizes won, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select an icon including the characters "not displayed". In this example, an icon containing the characters "display" is selected.

Then, when the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon including the word "display" selected in FIG. 5(2), the message "general winning number is displayed" is displayed as shown in FIG. 5(3). A message is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. 5(4). By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the number of winnings to the general winnings can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can grasp it. Here, it is assumed that the total number of prizes stored in the display control table (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of prizes in FIG. 6) is immediately displayed when the setting operation is completed. The total winning number is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 5 when the variable display of the special symbols is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You can do so.

On the other hand, if the user presses the operation button 30 while selecting the icon containing the words "Do not display" in FIG.
Return to the normal demo screen of (4). By this setting operation, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening is not displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is at the second position, that is, the game hall side displays the winning number information stored in the display control table to the image display device 5.
5 (1) to (3), a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings opening is displayed on the image display device 5 shall be displayed on When the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is at the first position, that is, when the game hall does not permit the image display device 5 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table, The screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of prizes won in the general prize slots, as shown in FIGS. 5(1) to 5(3), is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 4 mentioned above,
Regardless of the display setting/non-display setting of the player, only the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 32 determines that the number of prizes won in the general winning opening is not displayed.

In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game hall and the players regarding whether or not to display the number of winning game balls into the general winning openings. In this embodiment, only when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position) on the game arcade side, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings opening. It is possible. In other words, in this embodiment, the intention of the gaming facility takes precedence over the intention of the player. Therefore, if the game hall does not want the player to know the number of prizes won in the general prize gates, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position.
It is better to set it to the position (hidden position).

In addition, in the case where the intention of the game hall takes precedence over the intention of the player, even if the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (
Despite the fact that it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings regardless of the settings on the player's side, the player's side as shown in FIGS. 5(1) to 5(3) If the setting screen is displayed, the player may misunderstand that the number of winnings to the general winnings can be displayed by the player's own setting operation.

In order to prevent such misrecognition, in this embodiment, the display changeover switch 3
5 (1 ) ~ (
The setting screen for the player as shown in 3) is not displayed. In other words, the notification itself that "the number of winnings in the general winnings opening can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player's side" is not performed.

The display setting on the game arcade side (the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (the icon containing the word "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 5(2) When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winnings by pressing the operation button 30 in the selected state, as shown in FIG. "General Award"
characters are displayed. And general winning mouth (1st general winning mouth 50A to 4th general winning mouth 50
When the game ball wins in D), as shown in FIG. 6(2), a coin-shaped object (win-win display) is displayed on the right side of the characters "general win".

The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 5 corresponds to the total winning number of the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 6(3), each time a game ball wins in a general winning port (first general winning port 50A to fourth general winning port 50D), the total winning number on the display control table is incremented by one. As a result, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. again,
The coin-shaped object contains the number "10", which indicates the number of prize balls awarded when game balls enter the general prize winning opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of prize balls provided according to the winning in the general prize opening. It should be noted that the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins in each winning opening (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, big winning opening) is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. and

In this way, by displaying the objects corresponding to the winning of game balls into the general winning openings and increasing the number of displayed objects according to the increase in the number of winnings, the player can use the general winning openings. It is possible to easily grasp that a game ball has won a prize in the normal winning slot and the number of game balls that have won a prize in a general winning hole.

When the effect control CPU 120 determines the end of the game, as described above, the winning number of game balls into the general winning openings and the total winning number stored in the display control table are 0.
As shown in FIG. 6(4), all the coin-shaped objects displayed to the right of the characters "general winning" are erased. In other words, it is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is 0.

In this way, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in the non-game state, the notified number of winnings to the general winning opening is reset to 0 (general It is possible to prevent the number of winnings in the general winnings from being grasped by the player who plays the game on the gaming machine after that. .

In this embodiment, the condition for judging the end of the game and the condition for shifting to the above-described demo screen are set as common conditions, so that when the demo screen is displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning slots notified is 0. will be reset to In this way, when the demo screen is displayed, the reported number of winnings to the general winnings may be reset to zero.

As described above, when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). is set so as not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (Fig. 5), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each winning to the general winnings opening shown in Fig. 6 is not executed. . In these cases, the characters "general winning number" shown in FIG. Do not show.

It should be noted that if the number of objects (regular objects) displayed for each winning in the general prize pool is increased, the screen becomes more difficult to see as the number of winnings increases. In that case, instead of the predetermined number of normal objects, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a different aspect from the normal object containing the number "100"). As a result, it is possible to notify a predetermined number of wins and the number of winning balls corresponding to the predetermined number of wins in one special object display area without requiring a predetermined number of normal object display areas.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects increases by one each time a prize is won in the general prize-winning opening. Objects may be displayed in accordance with winning times. For example, the number of displayed objects may be incremented by one for each five wins to the general prize pool.

In addition, the display setting on the game arcade side (the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 5(2) When the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon selected), when it is determined to display the number of winnings in the general winnings, as shown in FIG. , the number of prizes won to the general prize gates is displayed together with the number of prizes won to the big prize gates.

FIG. 7(1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 5 when the jackpot game state is controlled. When the first round game is started, characters of "general winning number" are displayed, and on the right side of the characters, the winning number to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is displayed, and "large winning number" is displayed. is displayed, and the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big winning game state is displayed on the right side of the character. In this example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the general winning opening is 10 [0×10]. is displayed. In addition, since the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big winning game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the big winning opening is 15, [0×15] is displayed. It is In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of prize balls [0×10] given in response to winning in the general prize opening and the number of prize balls given in response to winning in the big prize opening [0×15] is displayed as [total 0 balls].

As shown in FIG. 7 (2), as a result of the first round game, the game ball wins seven times in the big winning hole (special variable winning ball device 7), and the general winning hole (first general winning hole 50A The number of general prizes is 1, and the number of big prizes is updated to 7 by winning one game ball in (4th general prize-winning port 50D). In addition, the number of prize balls [1 × 10] given according to the winning of the general prize opening,
[Total 115 balls] is displayed because the sum of the number of prize balls [7×15] awarded according to the winning to the big prize opening is 115. In addition, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general prize opening [1 x 10 = 10 balls] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big prize opening [7 × 1
5=105 balls] may be displayed separately.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7 (3), as a result of performing the 2nd to 15th (final) round games, in the jackpot game state, game balls are counted in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7). 1
05 wins, and game balls win a total of 3 times in the general prize gates (1st general prize gate 50A to 4th general prize gate 50D), the number of general prizes is 3, and the number of big prizes is updated to 105. ing. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning in the general winning opening [
3×10] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning in the big prize hole [105×15] is 1605, so that [total 1605 balls] is displayed.

In this way, the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled in the jackpot gaming state,
By displaying the number of prizes to be won separately from the number of prizes to be won to the big prize gate, the player will be interested in not only the number of prizes to be won to the big prize gates, but also the number of prizes to be won to the general prize gates. Also, by distinguishing between the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the main prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize winning prizes in the general prize opening, the player can easily win the prize in the main prize opening. They are interested not only in the number of prize balls given in accordance with the prize, but also in the number of prize balls given in accordance with the winning in the general prize opening.

In addition, not limited to the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled in the jackpot game state,
The number of winnings to the general winning opening in the probability variable state or the time saving state may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the number of winning to the general winning opening in the normal state may be displayed on the image display device 5. . In addition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the right-handed period (jackpot game state, variable probability state or time-saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state). The number of wins to the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Also, the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the reserved memory number of the special symbol game) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). is set so as not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (Fig. 5), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period when the jackpot game state shown in Fig. 7 is controlled is displayed. No display control is performed. In these cases, the "general winning number" shown in FIG.
During the period when the character itself is not displayed and the jackpot game state is controlled, the number of winning balls in the general winning opening, the number of winning balls corresponding to this, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning in the general winning opening , and the total number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening are not displayed. Only the number of winnings to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winnings are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 6, the example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general prize opening is displayed on the object has been described, but the image display device 5 does not display the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening. You can set it so that it is not displayed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 7, the number of prize balls (
10) and the number of prize balls given according to the winning in the general prize hole have been described, but these may not be displayed on the image display device 5 .

In this way, only the number of winnings to the general winning openings may be displayed, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning openings and the number of winning balls given according to the winning of the general winning openings may not be displayed. . With such a configuration, when the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed in the design process of the game machine, the display information of the image display device 5 must be changed according to the change. You can prevent it from disappearing. Conversely, it is also possible to display only the number of prize balls awarded according to the winning in the general prize opening.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game arcade side, the player settings of FIGS. An example has been described in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the number of winnings can be displayed/hidden). Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. The player may be notified that the

In such a configuration, even if the player sets to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), C for production control
The PU 120 does not display the number of winnings for the general winnings on the image display device 5 based on the fact that the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-displaying position) on the game arcade side. (Priority is given to playground settings). At this time, the image display device 5 may display that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to priority given to the setting of the game hall.

When the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. is notified to the player), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, FIG. 5(1)
Even if the operation button 30 is pressed on the player setting screen, the screen does not shift to the selection screen of FIG. Also good.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game hall settings are prioritized over the player settings, but conversely, the player settings may be prioritized over the game hall settings. That is, the player setting screens of FIGS. Assuming that it can be displayed on the image display device 5,
The operation button 30 is pressed while an icon containing the words "display" is selected on the selection screen of (2).
is pressed, the number of winnings to the general winnings is displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed), and the selection screen of FIG. When the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon selected, the number of winnings to the general winnings may not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening according to the order of received setting operations, with the same priority given to the game hall setting and the player setting. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning openings with priority given to the last accepted setting operation (latest setting operation). For example, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (
hidden position), after that, on the player setting screen of Fig. 5 (1) to (3),
When the setting is made to display the number of prizes won in the general prize pool, the number of prizes won in the general prize pool is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). Also, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 5(1) to 5(3) are set so as not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings slot, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is then set to the second position. If (display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winnings opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed). In addition, Fig. 5 (1) ~
Even if the player setting screen (3) is set to display the number of winnings for the general winnings, if the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) after that. for,
The number of winnings to the general winning openings is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the display changeover switch 32 is operated by the store clerk of the game arcade to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 5. By operating the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 5, but not limited to such a form, the display is switched by the store clerk at the game hall. By operating the switch 32, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 5. It is also possible to make it impossible to set whether or not to display (for example, setting screens on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5(1) to 5(3) are not provided). In this way, only on the amusement center side,
It may be possible to set whether or not the image display device 5 displays the number of winnings to the general winnings.

Conversely, by operating the operation button 30, the player (and the store clerk of the game arcade) can set whether or not to display the number of prizes won in the general prize gate on the image display device 5. On the other hand, it is also possible to omit the means for enabling the game hall side to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the image display device 5 (for example, omitting the display changeover switch 32). In the case of such a configuration, a common setting operation (operation button 3
0 operation), it becomes possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winnings slot on the image display device 5 . In this way, it may be possible for the player and the game arcade to set whether or not to display the number of winnings for the general winnings on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table is displayed on the image display device 5. An information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1
The information may be transmitted to the display device of the card unit provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 1 or the call lamp device provided above the pachinko game machine 1 and displayed on the information display device. Also, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The number of prizes won may be stored and displayed on the display device. note that,
As a configuration in which the pachinko game machine 1 is not provided with the mode switching switch 31, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the game machine (image display device 5), and the information display device and the information management are not displayed. It may be displayed only on the device.

In this embodiment, the win number information stored in the win number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 by setting the mode changeover switch 31, and is stored in the display control table by setting the display changeover switch 32. An example has been described in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 5. In this way, the winning number management table and the display control table can be displayed without separate switches for controlling the display of each of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch may be provided for controlling the display of both the number management table and the display control table. For example, by setting the common switch to the display setting, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 5.
By setting the common switch to non-display, neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5. You can do it.

In FIG. 8(A), a special design other than a specific special design (jackpot design) (
When the lost pattern) is stopped and displayed, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 1
00) is exemplified. Moreover, in FIG. 8(B),
When a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern, the main board 11
A big hit variation pattern determined by (game control microcomputer 100) is illustrated. By setting the special figure fluctuation time for each variation pattern, the production control CPU 120 that receives the variation pattern designation command can execute the production according to the special figure fluctuation time.

Of the loss variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach loss production modes, PX003 is a variation pattern that is a normal reach loss production mode, and PX004 is a super reach loss production mode. It is a variation pattern. Of the jackpot variation patterns, PY003 is a variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot presentation mode, and PY004 is a variation pattern for a super reach jackpot presentation mode. Here, the super ready-to-win variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the ready-to-win state is established. The normal ready-to-win variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the battle effect is not executed after the ready-to-win state is established.

A battle effect is a effect that suggests whether or not a ally character and an enemy character battle and win or lose a big win. P which is a variation pattern of super reach out
In X004, a defeat effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, whereas in PY004, which is the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot, a victory effect is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character.

The effect control CPU 120, as described above, the game control microcomputer 100
When the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed, the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command are received. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed (before the fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed), the specific special symbols (big hit symbols) are stopped and displayed as the determined special symbols of the variable display (that is, the big hits). be controlled to the game state)
It is possible to execute a variable result forewarning effect that forewarns.

In the fluctuation result announcement effect shown in FIG. 9(a), the speakers 8L and 8R say, "Now is your chance!"
A variable notice effect of the first mode in which only the voice effect in which the sound is output is executed, and a second mode in which the role object effect in which the movable accessory 1000 operates (rotating and lighting) is executed along with the voice effect It is possible to execute a change notice effect. Due to such a difference in presentation mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that a big hit symbol will be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied).

The effect control CPU 120, when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning slot is satisfied, based on the foretelling effect determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 124, Determines the aspect of the variable result announcement effect. Specifically, the timing at which the game ball enters the general winning slot (the timing at which the winning condition based on the winning in the general winning slot is established)
Then, the mode of the variable result foretelling effect is determined, and the variable result foretelling effect is executed in the determined mode. It should be noted that, as will be described later, if the variable display of the special design (variable display of the decorative design associated with this) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result notice effect is suspended, or the fluctuation result notice effect is performed. don't run

For example, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the variable display that is currently being executed) specifies "missing", the voice effect is given at a rate of 80%. The variable advance notice effect of the first mode accompanied by the only performance is executed, and the variable notice effect of the second mode accompanied by the voice effect and the character object effect is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the variable display that is currently being executed) specifies "jackpot", the voice effect is given at a rate of 25%. The variable advance notice effect of the first mode accompanied by the only performance is executed, and the variable notice effect of the second mode accompanied by the voice effect and the character object effect is executed at a rate of 75%.

In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120, when the game control microcomputer 100 generates an effective start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening,
It receives the start winning opening designation command and the start winning determination result designation command. This will
Prior to the establishment of the special symbol start condition, a notice is given that a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) will be stop-displayed as a fixed special symbol of the variable display that has not yet been executed (i.e., will be controlled to a big winning game state). It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect to do.

In the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 9(b), the speakers 8L and 8R say, "Chance coming soon!
and a second mode in which a character effect in which the movable accessory 1000 moves (rotates and lights up) along with the voice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect. Due to such differences in production mode,
It is possible to suggest the possibility that a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of a variable display in which the starting condition is not satisfied although the starting condition is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 performs prefetching based on the random number for determining the foretelling effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 when the conditions for executing the specific effect (specific effect B: prefetching foretelling effect) based on the winning of the general winning slot are satisfied. Determines the manner of advance notice production. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (timing when the winning condition based on winning in the general winning opening is established),
The mode of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the determined state. As will be described later, if the number of pending memories is 0, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is suspended or is not executed.

For example, if the start winning judgment result designation command that specifies "big hit" is not included in the start winning judgment result designation command stored in the start winning prize command storage area (all start winning judgment result designation commands that designate "loss" If it is a time determination result designation command), the first mode of pre-reading announcement effect with only voice effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with voice effect and character effect is executed at a rate of 15%. Execute the pre-reading forewarning effect. On the other hand, if the starting winning judgment result specifying command that specifies "big hit" is included in the starting winning judgment result specifying command stored in the starting winning command storage area, the voice effect will be given at a rate of 10%. first with only
The pre-reading advance notice effect of the mode is executed, and the second-mode pre-reading notice effect accompanied by the sound effect and the character object effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a specific effect that is executed based on the winning of a game ball into a general winning hole. A variable result announcement effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed will result in a big hit symbol is executed as the specific effect A in the present embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading forewarning performance for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not established will be a big hit pattern, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined to be a big hit, is used in the present embodiment. It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning openings also serves as the setting of whether or not to enable execution of the specific effect, and the number of winnings to the general winning openings is notified. When the setting is performed (when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 30 is used to set the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect) Only when it is performed), the effect control CPU 120 can execute the specific effect.

As described above, every time the effect control CPU 120 receives a general winning opening designation command and a start winning opening designation command, it stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122. However, this prize winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, a prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are separately provided.
1st general winning opening 50A, 2nd general winning opening 50B, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 3rd
When winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D, [first
General prize gate, 2nd general prize gate, 1st start prize gate, 2nd start prize gate, 3rd general prize gate, 4th
] is stored.

In the effect mode in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (the timing at which the winning to any of the winning holes occurs). ), it confirms whether or not the prize winning condition has been established, and determines the execution of the specific effect A based on the fact that the prize winning condition has been established. In addition, in the performance mode in which only the specific performance B can be executed, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B (at the timing when the winning to any of the winning openings occurs). It confirms whether or not the condition is satisfied, and determines the execution of the specific performance B based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. In addition, in the effect mode in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (either at the timing of the winning to the winning slot), it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect A is established in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and the specific effect A is supported. The execution of the specific performance A is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific performance B is established in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B. , execution of the specific performance B is determined based on establishment of a winning condition corresponding to the specific performance B.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a specific effect A execution flag when execution of the specific effect A (fluctuation result advance notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, at the timing when the winning condition is established, the special pattern is displayed variablely (variable display of the decorative pattern accompanying this).
is being executed, as described above, the aspect of the specific effect A (sound effect only, or both the sound effect and character object effect) is determined according to the result of the variable display, and the determined mode , the specific performance A execution flag is erased. That is, the specific performance A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole without suspending the variable result notice performance.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbols (variable display of the decorative symbols associated with this) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is established, there is no target for the variable result notice effect, so the specific effect A is executed. is reserved and the specific performance A execution flag remains set.
The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that execution of the specific effect A is determined by setting the specific effect A execution flag, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the conditions for starting the variable display of the special symbols (variable display of the decorative symbols associated therewith) are established, the mode of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, and the status is set as a pending state. The set specific performance A execution flag is erased while executing the specified performance A which has been set.

It should be noted that the execution of the specific effect A is suspended when the variable display of the special symbols (the accompanying variable display of the decorative symbols) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is met, without being limited to such a form. Execution of the specific effect A may be stopped without any change, and the specific effect A may not be executed even when the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied after that.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a specific effect B execution flag when execution of the specific effect B (pre-reading advance notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, if the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1 or more, as described above, 1 Determine the aspect of the specific effect B (only voice effect, or both voice effect and character effect) according to the above start winning judgment result, execute the pre-reading advance notice effect of the determined mode, and execute the specific effect Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific performance B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole without suspending the pre-reading notice performance.

On the other hand, when the number of pending memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is established, there is no target for the pre-reading advance notice effect, so the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag remains set. state. The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that execution of the specific effect B is determined by setting the specific effect B execution flag, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more) due to the occurrence of a prize in the start prize winning port, the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the result of determination at the time of start prize winning, The specific performance B in the pending state is executed, and the set specific performance B execution flag is erased.

In addition, not limited to such a form, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and then Even if the starting condition is satisfied and the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the specific effect B
You can choose not to run

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (for example, when a power failure is detected), the winning history storage area (the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and The winning history stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B) and the specific performance execution flag (the specific performance A execution flag and the specific performance B execution flag) are all erased. As a result, during execution of a specific effect (fluctuation result notice effect, pre-reading notice effect), or
Even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in a state where the specific performance is not yet executed after the execution of the specific performance is determined, and then the power supply is resumed, the execution is still in progress. The existing specific effect or the specific effect decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, for a predetermined period after power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the specific effect is not executed because the winning record and the specific effect execution flag are erased. When it is confirmed that the prize winning condition is established based on the prize winning history after the power supply is started, the specific performance is newly executed.

[First presentation form]
In the first effect mode shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (1) normal state, the game ball in one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D A winning condition (first winning condition) is established each time a wins. When the first prize winning condition is established, the presence or absence of execution of the specific performance is determined based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 124, and execution of the specific performance A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D that are the first winning condition) (including the winning history to either) is deleted.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, each time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D A winning condition (which will be referred to as a second winning condition) is established. When the second prize winning condition is established, whether or not to execute the specific performance is determined based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 124, and execution of the specific performance A is determined at a rate of 20%. And every time the specific effect A is executed,
Winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (including at least the winning history to any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, which is the second winning condition)
is erased.

In the first production form and the second production form to the fourth production form described later, (1) the ratio of executing the specific production based on the game ball winning the general winning opening in the normal state is (2 )
It is higher than the rate at which the specific performance is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening in the probability variable state or the time saving state. In the variable state and time saving state, the player usually
I am more interested in the winning status of the game ball into the second start winning opening and the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. It is difficult to generate the same interest as time. Therefore, in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the execution ratio of the specific performance is lowered compared to the normal state, and the decline in interest in the specific performance is suppressed.

Note that, in the second to fourth presentation modes, which will be described later, unlike the first presentation mode, execution or non-execution of the specific presentation is not determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific presentation. The second production form to the fourth production form described later are all capable of executing a specific production when the winning condition is established, but (2) the winning condition in the probability variable state or the time saving state is (1) normal The number of wins required is greater than the win condition in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution ratio of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than the execution ratio of the specific effect in the (2) probability variable state or the time saving state.

Thus, by varying the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. In addition, the first production form to the fourth
Contrary to the example of the production form, (2) the rate at which the specific production is executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state, (1) in the general winning opening in the normal state It may be made to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball.

It should be noted that, in the second to fourth presentation modes, which will be described later, as in the first presentation mode, when the winning condition is established, whether or not to execute the specific presentation is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific presentation. You can do it. For example, in the second production form to the fourth production form, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the variable probability state or the time saving state are the same winning conditions, Like the performance form, by differentiating the lottery probability when the winning condition is met in the normal state and the lottery probability when the winning condition is met in the probability variable state or the time saving state, the ratio of executing the specific performance normally and the probability change You may make it differ from the ratio with which specific production|presentation is performed in a state or a time saving state.

Further, the specific effect may be executed at different rates depending on not only the game state but also the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is the jackpot pattern, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is the winning pattern. When there is a pending memory determined as a big hit, it is compared with a case where there is no pending memory determined as a big hit at the time of starting winning (when there is only a pending memory determined as a deviation at the time of starting winning), A specific effect may be executed at a high rate. Also, the number of times the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type,
Alternatively, specific effects of different types may be executed only once for each type, etc.).

[Second staging form]
In the second effect mode shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the general A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when a game ball wins one or more times in each of the winning holes. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, to two or more general winning openings out of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, respectively A winning condition (as a second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins two or more times. When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

Thus, in the second production form, and the third production form and the fourth production form described later, the number of winnings to the general winning opening required to execute the specific production in the normal state, the variable probability state or By differentiating the number of winnings to the general winning openings required for executing the specific performance in the time saving state, the number of winnings of the game balls to the general winning openings can be made interesting according to the game state. .

In addition, in the second production mode, in order to execute the specific production, the first general winning opening 50A ~
It is a condition that the game ball wins at least once or more for each of two or more general winning openings out of the fourth general winning openings 50D. In this way, by making winning for each of a plurality of general winning holes a condition for executing a specific effect, not only whether or not a general winning hole wins, but also whether a game ball wins any of the general winning holes It can make people interested in how they did it.

In addition, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode which will be described later, the start of the big win game state is designated based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 has controlled the game control microcomputer 100 to the big win game state. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A and the specific performance B
The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to is all deleted.

In addition, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode which will be described later, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area is not deleted based on the game state being changed. . Therefore, when the first winning condition is met, it means that the first winning condition is met as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state.
It is not necessarily the case that the first winning condition has been established based on the winning history only in the normal state. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the variable probability state or the time saving state. The second prize winning condition is not always satisfied based on the prize winning history of only the time saving state. In addition, not limited to such a form, the winning history of the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, and the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state Also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition has been established based on the winning history of only the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition has been established is confirmed based on the winning history of only the variable probability state or the time saving state. You can check it.

[Third production form]
In the third effect mode shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (1) normal state, within 120 seconds, the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when a game ball has won a prize in the winning hole 50D) three times or more. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. and,
Each time the specific performance A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, within 120 seconds, the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D)
A winning condition (as a second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of five times or more. When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). set). And if the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (specific effect A
When the timer times out), the prize winning history of the specific performance A in the prize winning history storage area is erased without the specific performance A being executed. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are met within the period of 120 seconds (
When the winning condition is satisfied before the timer for the specific effect A times out), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased.

In this way, the winning frequency required to execute the specific effect in the normal state (the number of winning prizes within a predetermined period) and the winning frequency required to execute the specific effect in the variable probability state or the time saving state (predetermined period The number of prizes in the number of wins) is different from the number of wins, so that it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of winning prizes in the general prize openings according to the game state.

In addition, in the third effect mode, when the specific effect A targeting the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning hole in the predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only one variable display period If the winning conditions are satisfied based on the winning history), a specific effect A is executed that targets a variable display different from the variable display that was executed when the first general winning slot was won in a predetermined period (120 seconds). In some cases, the winning condition is established based on the winning history in a plurality of variable display periods.

It should be noted that, as in the third effect mode, when the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slots in a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number, the specific effect is executed, and the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. The specific effect may be executed when the number of winnings to the general winning openings in the period reaches a predetermined number. For example, until the reserved memory of the special game is completely consumed, that is, when the number of prizes won in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number within the period during which the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is executed. A production may be executed.

[Fourth presentation mode]
In the fourth effect mode shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 determines that when the game state is (1) normal state, the starting winning hole (either the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole) , starting winning mouth (either the first starting winning mouth or the second starting winning mouth), general winning mouth (one of the first general winning mouth 50A to the fourth general winning mouth 50D), the game ball wins in the order A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is established by winning a prize. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), starting winning opening (first starting Winning mouth and second starting winning mouth), general winning mouth (any of 1st general winning mouth 50A to 4th general winning mouth 50D), general winning mouth (1st general winning mouth 50A to 4th General prize gate 50
D), the winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball enters the winning hole in the order of D). When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. and,
Each time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased.

In this way, other winning openings different from the general winning opening and the general winning opening (first start winning opening, second
By executing a specific effect on the condition that the winning order to the starting winning gate) is in a specific order, not only the winning status to the general winning gate but also the winning order to the general winning gate and other winning gates can arouse interest in

It should be noted that the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in the general winning opening and the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in other winning openings may be varied. For example, the winning conditions may be established by winning two or more consecutive prizes in the general prize winning opening after three or more consecutive winnings in the starting prize winning opening. In addition, which one of a plurality of general prize openings or which of a plurality of other prize openings the player has won may be used as a prize condition. For example, the winning conditions are established by the game balls entering the winning openings in the order of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 50A, and the second general winning opening 50B. Also good. In addition, the winning condition is not limited to the order in which the winning in the starting winning opening is followed by the winning in the general winning opening. may be established.

Also, the winning condition may be established based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls into the plurality of general winning holes becomes a specific order. For example, when the game state is (1) normal state, the winning condition ( The first winning condition) is established, and the game state becomes (
2) In the case of variable probability state or time saving state, first general winning opening 50A, second general winning opening 50
B. Furthermore, the winning conditions (second winning conditions) are established by the game balls entering a plurality of general winning holes in the order of the third general winning hole 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D. can be

Also, the winning condition may be established based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls to a plurality of general winning holes and the winning order of the game balls to one or a plurality of starting winning holes becomes a specific order. . For example, when the game state is (1) normal state, the winning condition ( If the first winning condition) is established and the gaming state is (2) a probability variable state or a time saving state,
The game balls win in the order of the first general winning opening 50A, the first start winning opening, the second general winning opening 50B, the third general winning opening 50C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 50D. Thus, a winning condition (as a second winning condition) may be established.

In addition, the order of entering the general winning gate and entering the start winning gate is not limited to the order of entering the general winning gate and entering the main winning gate in a specific order. The condition may be established, and the entrance to the general winning opening and the first passage gate 41A or the second passage gate 4
The winning condition may be established based on the specific order of entry into 1B. Also, if there is a specific area in which the type of jackpot (for example, variable jackpot) is determined based on the entry of the game ball, the order of entering the general winning opening and entering the specific area is specified. The winning condition may be established based on the order.

In addition, in the first production form to the fourth production form, the example of executing the variable result notice effect (specific effect A) as the specific effect was explained, but the pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. can be

[Fifth Rendering Form to Eighth Rendering Form]
In the fifth production form to the eighth production form shown in FIG. 11, unlike the first production form to the fourth production form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the variable probability state or the time saving state. , there is no difference in the winning conditions, and the winning conditions are common. In the examples of the fifth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the first winning conditions in the first to fourth effect modes, respectively, that is, the winning conditions adopted in the normal state are provided as common winning conditions. ing. Then, (1) when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the variable result announcement effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. As a result, the type of the specific effect can be differentiated according to the game state when the game ball enters the general winning slot, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball entering the general winning slot. Interest can be improved.

In the fifth effect mode shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120, when the winning condition is established,
Execution of the specific effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and All the prize winning histories in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state is (2) a probability variable state or a time saving state,
A specific performance B is executed, and each time the specific performance B is executed, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B are deleted. be done.

In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific effect A when the game state when the winning condition is established is (1) normal state, Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and
All the prize winning histories in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, when the game state when the winning condition is established is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, the specific performance B is executed, and each time the specific performance B is executed, the specific performance A is performed. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased.

In addition, in the sixth production form to the eighth production form, the game control microcomputer 10
When the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the control to the jackpot game state by 0, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A. , and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are all deleted. In addition, in the sixth to eighth presentation modes, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the game state being changed. In addition, not limited to such a form, the winning history of the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, and the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state Also good.

In the seventh effect mode, the specific effect timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage areas of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. . When the specific effect timer times out, neither the specific effect A nor the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history in the specific effect A winning history storage area and the winning history in the specific effect B winning history storage area are deleted. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are satisfied before the specific effect timer times out, (1) in the case of the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect B of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All the winning history in the winning history storage area are erased, and (2) in the case of a variable probability state or a short working time state, a specific effect B
is executed, both the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance A and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance B are erased.

[Ninth production form to 12th production form]
In the ninth production form to the 12th production form shown in FIG. 12, unlike the first production form to the eighth production form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the variable probability state or the time saving state. , the winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is established in the normal state, the variable result announcement effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probability variable state or the time saving state. is established, a pre-reading announcement effect (specific effect B) is executed as a specific effect. As a result, the execution ratio of the specific performance and the type of the specific performance can be varied according to the game state when the game ball enters the general winning slot, and the game ball wins the general winning slot. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance that is executed based on this.

In the ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (1) normal state, the game ball is placed in either the first general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole 50B. A winning condition (first winning condition) is established each time is won, and execution of the specific performance A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, each time the game ball wins in either the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In the tenth effect mode shown in FIG. 12, when the game state is (1) normal state, the effect control CPU 120 sets 1 to both the first general winning port 50A and the second general winning port 50B. A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins one or more times, and execution of the specific performance A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, production control CPU 120
, when the game state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the game ball wins two or more times in both the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. A condition (as a second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In addition, in the ninth production form to the 12th production form, the game control microcomputer 1
00, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the control to the jackpot game state, the prize history of the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A. , and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are all deleted. Further, in the ninth to twelfth presentation modes, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the game state. In addition, not limited to such a form, the winning history of the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, and the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state Also good.

In the eleventh effect mode shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first general winning hole 50A and the second general winning hole 50 within 120 seconds when the game state is (1) normal state.
A winning condition (as a first winning condition) is established when a game ball wins a total of three times or more in B, and execution of a specific performance A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the specific effect A
Only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to is erased. On the other hand, production control CPU12
0 is the third general winning opening 50C when the gaming state is (2) variable probability state or time saving state
And the winning condition (the second
) is established, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In addition, in the eleventh effect mode, the specific effect A timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning hole is stored in the specific effect A winning history storage area. Then, when the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the first winning condition is established in the normal state before the timer for the specific performance A times out, the specific performance A is executed and only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance A is erased. Further, a timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history of the first general winning hole is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B. - 特許庁Then, when the timer for the specific performance B times out, only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance B is erased without executing the specific performance B.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the second prize winning condition is established in the variable probability state or the time saving state before the timer for the specific performance B times out, the specific performance B is executed and only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific performance B is erased. be done.

In the twelfth effect mode shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (1) normal state, the first starting winning port, the first starting winning port, the second general winning port 50B, A winning condition (first winning condition) is established when the game ball enters the winning hole in this order. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. And a specific production A
is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variable state or the time saving state, the second start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening 50
A winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball enters the winning hole in the order of D. When the second winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

As in the ninth production form to the 12th production form, the general winning opening (general winning opening and starting winning opening in the 12th production form), which is the winning target of the game ball for executing the specific production, is changed according to the game state. , the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the game state. In addition, in the ninth production form to the 12th production form, in order to establish the target winning opening to win in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state and the second winning condition in the probability variable state or the time saving state The target winning openings to be awarded are all different examples, but not limited to such a form, the target winning opening in the normal state and the target winning opening in the probability variable state or the time saving state are partially It may be common. For example, both the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include winning to the second general winning opening 50B.

[13th to 16th production forms]
The thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form shown in FIG. 13 are the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. However, when the timing at which the second prize winning condition is established is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific performance A is higher.

Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically, the reach state is established in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern with the reach production (normal reach, super reach), and the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.
In addition, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation,
Specifically, the period excluding the period during which the variable display of the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) is executed, or the start of the variable display of the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) It is a period from after that to before establishment of the reach state.

The first and second winning conditions for the 13th to 16th presentation modes are the same as the first and second winning conditions for the 1st to 4th presentation modes, respectively. It's becoming Regarding any production form, when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is When the established timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is higher. In this way, by differentiating the execution ratio of the specific performance according to the game period when the prize winning condition is established, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general prize winning opening.

[17th presentation form to 20th presentation form]
In the 17th production mode to the 20th production mode shown in FIG. 14, the timing when the winning condition is satisfied is
(1) If it is a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed, and the timing at which the winning condition is established is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation When it is the period, the specific effect B is executed.

The winning conditions in the 17th production form to the 20th production form are respectively the 5th production form to the 8th production form.
It is the same as the winning condition (common winning condition) in the production mode. In any production form, if the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is established is (1) the period after the ready-to-win condition is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific production A is executed and the winning condition is established. When the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific performances according to the game period when the winning condition is established, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning hole.

[21st presentation mode to 24th presentation mode]
In the 21st effect mode to the 24th effect mode shown in FIG. 15, when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation, the specific effect A
is executed, and when the timing at which the second prize winning condition is established is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

The first and second winning conditions for the 21st to 24th presentation modes are the same as the first and second winning conditions for the 9th to 12th presentation modes, respectively. It's becoming In any production mode, if the timing at which the first prize winning condition is established is the period after (1) the reach state establishment in the reach fluctuation, the specific production A is executed, and the second prize winning condition is established. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by varying the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied and executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied,
To improve interest when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole.

[25th Rendering Mode and 26th Rendering Mode]
In the 25th production form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st production form to the 24th production form, regardless of the game state or the game period, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D) The first winning condition is established when the game ball wins three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. Also, regardless of the game state or the game period, the second prize winning condition is established when the game ball wins a total of five times or more in the general prize winning openings (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D). When the second prize winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In the 26th production form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st production form to the 24th production form, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50A to the The first prize winning condition is established when the game ball has won the prize winning port 50D) three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the game state or the game period, within 120 seconds, the second winning by winning a total of 5 or more game balls in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D) Condition is met. When the second prize winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the prize winning history in the prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In this way, regardless of the game state or the game period, different effects are executed according to the number of prizes won in the general prize gates and the frequency of prize wins (the number of prizes won in a predetermined period), thereby increasing the number of prizes in the general prize gates. and the frequency of winning prizes. In this example, the effect mode (output sound) differs according to the number of prizes won in the general prize gate and the frequency of winning, and the variable display that is the target of the notice differs (specific effect A: variable display being executed, Specific effect B: variable display that is not executed), but not limited to this, depending on the number of prizes won in the general prize gate and the frequency of winning, a different effect ( For example, an effect that foretells the display result of the variable display and an effect that is not related to the display result of the variable display) may be executed, and effects that indicate whether or not the game state is suggested (for example, high probability It may be possible to execute an effect for notifying that it is in a state and an effect that is not related to the game state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning hole designation command, and determines that the general winning hole has been won, and the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has won, and by receiving the start winning mouth designation command, the fact that the winning to the starting winning mouth has occurred and the first starting winning mouth and the second starting winning mouth The game It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won a prize, and it is possible to specify that a prize has been won in the large prize opening by receiving a prize command for the large prize opening. Therefore, as the winning number management table, the winning number management table of the form shown in FIG. 17 can be stored and updated.

The second start-up winning port is formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the opening of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is controlled (from the closed state in which the game ball does not win or is difficult to win, the opening in which the game ball can win or is easy to win) By switching to the state), the game ball can win a prize. In addition, the big winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled. By switching to the open state), game balls can win prizes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, the second starting prize winning port and the special variable winning ball device 7 are divided into prize winning ports in which a game ball can be won by the operation of the prize. On the other hand, the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50
The D and the first start winning openings are always open, and classified as non-accessory winning openings in which game balls can be won regardless of the operation of the accessory.

In the winning number management table of FIG. 17, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D
, the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins in each of the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the big prize opening (the number of prize balls corresponding to each prize opening, this In the example 10,10,10
, 10, 2, 2, 15) are stored. Then, for each winning hole, the winning number (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 42 in this example), which is the number of times the game ball has won the winning hole
0) and the number of payouts obtained by multiplying the number of prizes by the number of prize balls (the sum of the number of balls paid out due to the game balls entering the prize opening, and in this example, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508 , 63
0,6300) are stored.

Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the number of winnings of each winning opening (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420 respectively) with respect to the total number of winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example)
and (2) the total number of winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example), non-accessory winning openings (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D and 1st starting winning opening mouth) winning number (11
+36 + 22 + 14 + 754) ratio, and the ratio of the number of winning prizes (315 + 420) of the prize winning openings (second start winning opening and large winning opening), and (3) the total number of winning prizes of each winning opening (15 in this example
72), the number of winnings other than the big winnings (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315)
and the ratio of the number of winning prizes (420) of the big winning openings are stored.

In addition, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts of each winning port (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630,
6300) and (2) the total number of payouts for each winning port (9268 in this example),
Percentage of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) of non-accessory winning openings (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D and 1st starting winning opening) and winning openings (2nd starting winning opening and big winning (110 + 360 + 2
20+140+1508+630) and the ratio of the number of payouts (6300) of the big winning opening are stored.

Here, as described above, during the period in which the operating portion of the mode changeover switch 31 is at the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 120 displays the information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Displayed on the device 5. Therefore, the store clerk at the amusement arcade determines the total number of balls (9268) paid out due to the winning of game balls in each winning opening. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of balls (110+360+220+140+1508) (hereinafter referred to as "first payout ratio", which is 74.77% in this example). In addition, the total number of balls paid out due to the game balls winning in each winning opening (9268) is compared to the number of balls paid out due to the game balls winning in the big winning opening (6300). The ratio (hereinafter referred to as "second payout ratio", which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 120 notifies that effect in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 17, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first standard ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the second payout ratio is a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60
%), it shall be notified in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 17, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second standard ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 5, and compare the results with the predetermined first standard ratio and second standard ratio. It can be displayed in a comprehensible manner. Note that the mode switch 31
, for example, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 5 by setting the display changeover switch 32 and setting operation using the operation button 30. The first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed when the demo screen is displayed. Also, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the setting of the game hall side or the player side. Also, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the game state, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1.
, and the gaming device stores the received first payout ratio and second payout ratio,
It can be displayed on a display device. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and the information management device controls the first payout ratio and second payout ratio of each gaming machine. It is possible to store the ratio and display it on the display device.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100, for the effect control CPU120,
When outputting the general winning mouth designation command, the start winning mouth designation command, and the big winning mouth winning command, as external output information corresponding to these commands, the occurrence of winning to the general winning mouth and the first general winning mouth Information that can specify which of the 50A to 4th general winning openings 50D the game ball has won, the occurrence of winning to the starting winning opening, and the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening The game ball Information that can identify whether a prize has been won, information that can identify that a prize has been won in a large winning slot, etc. It shall be output to an external device.

This makes it possible to specify the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the special winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received the information, it is possible to store and update the win number management table of the form shown in FIG. 17 for each gaming machine. Thereby, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine can be grasped. Also, for each gaming machine, the first
It is possible to grasp whether the payout ratio exceeds the first standard ratio and whether the second payout ratio exceeds the second standard ratio.

Further, regarding the aggregation period of the winning number information (the values of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if no setting is made for the aggregation period, the pachinko It is a period from when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started until the power supply is stopped. As the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings to each winning hole becomes 0), and the pachinko game machine 1
When the power supply is restarted, the number of winnings to each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is in a state of 0. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped,
The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted without being backed up.

Winning number information (FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 1
The value of each item in )) can be set on the amusement center side, for example,
Using the operation button 30, it is possible to set a totaling period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) for the gaming machine. Also, in the game device (card unit or call lamp device), the game parlor clerk inputs a desired tallying period using an input device or the like, and the entered tallying period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko machine 1, and the tallying period is transmitted. (RAM 122
stored in). In addition, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs the desired total period using the input device etc. Sent to game machine 1),
It may be set (stored in the RAM 122) as an aggregation period. Then, in the pachinko game machine 1, a prize number management table is created for each totaling period set (for example, 10 hours) and displayed on the image display device 5, or a corresponding game device (card unit, call lamp device) and displayed on the display device of the game device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and displayed on the display device of the information management device. .

In addition, based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the special winning opening winning command output from the pachinko game machine 1, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is determined. In an external device that stores and updates information (values of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17), by setting a totaling period with an input device provided in the external device, every set totaling period (for example, 10 hours) It is possible to create a prize number management table and display it on a display device provided in an external device. For example, if the external device is a gaming device (a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning number management table for the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device for each predetermined period. When the external device is an information management device that manages game information for each game machine, it is possible to display the winning number management table for each predetermined period on the display device for each game machine. becomes.

[27th presentation form]
The above-mentioned specific effect A and specific effect B both predict the variable display result in the special game depending on the effect mode, but are executed in relation to the winning of the game ball to the general winning openings 50A to 50D. As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game. FIG. 18 illustrates a specific effect C (point giving effect) as an effect unrelated to the variable display result in the special game and the variable display result in the normal game.

In the twenty-seventh production form shown in FIG. 19 and the twenty-ninth production form described later, the first general winning opening 50A
~ Every time a game ball wins in one of the fourth general winning holes 50D, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect C based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124, and it is decided to execute it. , a specific effect C is executed. By executing the specific effect C, the RAM 122
1 is added to the total points in the point storage area formed in , and an image 2000 including characters "1 point" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

That is, each time a game ball wins a prize in one of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D, a lottery as to whether or not to give one point is performed, and the player wins the lottery. In this case, the effect mode is such that a point giving effect in which one point is given is executed.
A privilege is given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

For example, when the total points reach 5 (when the player wins 5 times), the image display device 5 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server. The player accesses the image providing server by having the two-dimensional code read (captured) by the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and can download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . Also, when the total points reach 10 (when the player wins 10 times), a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5 . The player can read the two-dimensional code (picture an image) with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, access the music providing server, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

In the 27th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) ), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), at a rate of 80% Execute specific effect C. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 issues a variation start command that specifies the start of variation in the special game and a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. , by receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed.

Incidentally, similarly to the specific effect A and the specific effect B, a prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C is provided. Every time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C
D) is deleted.

Here, the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 122 is set to 10 regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased, it will not be reset). After reaching (in this example, after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the specific effect C is executed.

In the twenty-seventh production form and the twenty-ninth production form described later, (1) during the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is being executed (within the pattern fluctuation period), the specific production is performed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general prize-winning opening. The ratio of execution is (2) lower than the ratio of executing the specific effect based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). is set. During the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special game (for example, the variable result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, so the player usually wins a general prize. They are more interested in these presentations including the variable display of decorative patterns than in winning prizes of game balls into the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the period (1), the interest in the specific effect may rather be lost. On the other hand, in the period (2), since the effect corresponding to the special game, which should be the target of interest, is not executed, by executing the specific effect, the player can I'm in a situation where it's easy to get interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than during the period (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game, Therefore, the specific performance can be executed at appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific performance is not spoiled. For example, if a specific effect related to the variable display result in the special game is adopted as the specific effect A, the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole is (2) the variable display of the special pattern is executed. If it is during the period (outside the symbol variation period), there is no target for the variation result announcement at this timing. Therefore, either do not execute the specific effect (stop the execution of the specific effect based on the winning to the general winning slot), or suspend the execution until the condition for starting the variable display regarding the special game is met (general winning The specific effect is not executed at the timing of winning the prize, and the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special game is satisfied. As a result, there is a risk that the frequency of execution of the specific effect will decrease, or that interest will decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting, as the specific effect, a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

In addition, in the 27th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol fluctuation If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only in the period (outside the symbol fluctuation period) in which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed. Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 27th production mode, (1) during the period when the variable display of the special pattern is executed (within the pattern fluctuation period), the game ball is specified based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning hole (2) The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). may be set to be higher.

[28th Production Form]
In the twenty-eighth presentation mode, unlike the twenty-seventh presentation mode, it is not determined whether or not to execute the specific presentation based on the random number for determining execution of the specific presentation extracted from the random number circuit 124 . In the 28th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) ), the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%; , Specific production A
do not run

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the specific effect A is either a first mode in which only the voice effect is executed or a second mode in which the character effect is executed together with the voice effect. This is a variable result advance notice performance suggesting the possibility of deriving and displaying a jackpot pattern as a variable display result of a variable display whose start condition is satisfied by, before deriving and displaying the variable display result. again,
As shown in FIG. 9B, the specific effect B is a first mode in which only the sound effect is executed, or a second mode in which the character effect is executed together with the sound effect. This is a look-ahead foretelling performance suggesting the possibility of deriving and displaying a jackpot symbol as a variable display result of a variable display in which the starting condition is not satisfied even though the starting condition is satisfied. Furthermore, the specific production C is
As shown in FIG. 18, it is related to both the display result of the variable display related to the special game (whether it will be a big hit pattern) and the display result of the variable display related to the general game (whether it will be a hit pattern). This is an effect in which points are given to the player according to the winning in the general winning opening.

In this way, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period of (2), the specific effect A is not executed (the above-mentioned "
The execution of the specific effect A is suspended, and the process of "executing when the condition for starting the variable display regarding the special game is satisfied" is not performed), and only when it is the period of (1), the specific Production A is to be executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the specific effect A
(including at least the winning history for any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, which is a winning condition) in the winning history storage area corresponding to is erased.

In the 28th production form, as a specific production, by executing a specific production A (variable result notice production) related to the variable display result in the special game executed at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, He is trying to improve his interest in a specific performance. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning slot is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a target for the variation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning slot), and after that, when the start condition of the variable display regarding the special game is satisfied, the specific effect is specified. If the effect A is executed, there is a possibility that the timing of winning a prize and the execution timing of the specific effect will deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest.
Therefore, in the twenty-eighth effect mode, when a game ball wins in the general winning hole during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect A is not executed.

In addition, in the 28th effect mode, if the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). In the case of such a form, when the winning to the general winning opening occurs during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (to the general winning opening The specific performance A is not executed at the winning timing), and then the specific performance A is executed when the condition for starting the variable display regarding the special game is satisfied. In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins in the general winning hole is either during the period (1) (within the symbol variation period) or during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). Also, the specific effect A may be made executable, and the specific effect A may be executed at different ratios.

In addition, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period), the special during execution The execution ratio of the specific effect A may differ according to the result of the variable display of the figure game, whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed, and the like. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 has decided to use the finalized decorative pattern as the big hit pattern, 80%
and when it is determined that the final decorative pattern is the lost pattern, the specific performance A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th presentation form]
In the 29th production mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories ) is within a period of 1 or more; In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the period when the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display of special symbols is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

That is, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole, the variable display of the special symbols is executed, or at least the variable display of the special symbols is determined to be executed (the above (
1) or (2) period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole. And when it is not determined to execute variable display of special symbols (when it is the period of (3) above),
The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

Every time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least the winning of any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D that is the winning condition) history) is erased.

In the 29th effect form, at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or at least when it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol (above (1) or in the case of the period of (2)), at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed and the variable display of the special symbols is performed. It is set lower than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when no decision has been made to execute it (in the period of (3) above). During periods (1) and (2), effects corresponding to the special game (for example, variable result notice effects and prefetch notice effects) are being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. , players are usually more interested in these effects including the variable display of decoration patterns than in the winning state of game balls into general winning holes. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest in the specific effect may rather be lost. On the other hand, in the period of (3), the effect corresponding to the special game, which should be the target of interest, is not executed, so that by executing the specific effect, the player can I'm in a situation where it's easy to get interested in this. Therefore, (1)
And by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (2), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game, Therefore, the specific performance can be executed at appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific performance is not spoiled. For example, as a specific effect, when adopting a pre-reading notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more like the specific effect B, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole is the number of reserved memories. is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. Therefore, either do not execute the specific effect (stop the execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening), or suspend the execution until the number of pending memories becomes 1 or more (If you win the general winning opening The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the starting condition of the variable display regarding the special game is satisfied). As a result, there is a risk that the frequency of execution of the specific effect will decrease, or that interest will decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting, as the specific effect, a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

In addition, in the 29th production form, at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol (above (1) or (2)
period), the specific effect C is not executed, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, and the variable display of the special symbols is not determined (period of (3) above ), the specific effect C may be made executable. Also, contrary to the example shown in the 29th production mode, at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, whether the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Or at least when it is determined to perform the variable display of the special symbols (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the ratio at which the specific effect is performed is the variable display of the special symbols. It may be set so as to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when the specific effect is not executed and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is not determined (in the period of (3) above).

Also, the timing at which the variable display relating to the special game is started (the timing at which the start condition is established) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including simultaneous). In the case of , the specific effect may not be executed immediately, but may be executed after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 5 seconds have passed) after the start of the variable display. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is established It is possible to prevent misleading that it is related to the special game. In addition, the timing when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening (the timing when the starting condition is established) and the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may not be executed immediately, and the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 5 seconds have passed) after the number of reserved memories increases. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the starting condition is established (for example, when the specific effect is A or C), immediately after the starting condition is established It is possible to prevent misleading that it is related to the special game.

[Thirtieth production mode]
In the thirtieth effect mode, unlike the twenty-ninth effect mode, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is to be executed based on the random number for determining execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 . In the thirtieth effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. is the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed (within the symbol variation period); If it is, the specific production B
do not run

In this way, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period of (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (
The above-mentioned "hold the execution of the specific effect B and execute when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more" is not performed), and only in the period of (1), the specific Production B is executed. Every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least the first general winning opening 50A to
(including the winning history to any of the fourth general winning openings 50D) is erased.

In the thirtieth production form, as a specific production, by executing a specific production B (pre-reading advance notice production) related to the variable display result of the special game held at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, I'm trying to improve my interest in directing. however,
If the timing at which the game ball wins the general prize-winning slot is the period (2) or (3) in which the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no target of pre-reading notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning slot), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of pending memories becomes 1 or more. If it is executed, there is a possibility that the timing of winning the prize and the execution timing of the specific effect will deviate from each other, which may actually reduce the interest. Therefore, in the thirtieth production mode, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole during the period (2) or (3) (the period when the number of reserved memories is 0), the specific production B is not executed. .

In addition, in the thirtieth effect form, when the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory) , the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and in the period of (2) or (3) (within the period without pending memory), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 20%. You can do it. In the case of such a form, execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended when a prize is won in the general prize winning slot during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without pending memory). (The specific performance B is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize winning slot), and thereafter, the specific performance B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. In this way, the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is during the period of (1) (within the period with reserved memory), and the period of (2) or (3) (within the period without reserved memory) ), the specific effect B can be executed in both cases, and the specific effect B may be executed at different ratios.

In addition, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period of (1) (within the period of the reservation memory), the reservation is further performed. The execution ratio of the specific effect B differs depending on whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable display result of the special game related to memory and the variable display of the decorative pattern accompanying the execution of the special game related to the reserved memory. You can do it. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the starting winning prize determination result specifying command specifying "big hit" in the starting winning prize command storage area (that is, when the variable display result of the special game is a big hit symbol) exists), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and if the start winning judgment result designation command designating the "jackpot" is not stored in the start winning command storage area (that is, When there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special game is a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[Thirty-first staging mode]
In the 31st effect mode shown in FIG. 20, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed ( If it is within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) In some cases, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) and the period (2), Different types of specific effects are to be executed. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the effect that is executed when the game ball wins in the general winning hole, and to improve the amusement. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning port 50A to the fourth (including the winning history to any of the general winning openings 50D) is erased.

In the 31st effect form, by executing a specific effect A (variable result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, I try to improve my interests. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning slot is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a target for the variation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effect is executed, the execution frequency of the specific effect will decrease. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the specific effect A
(Do not execute the specific effect A at the timing of winning the general winning mouth), and then execute the specific effect A when the start condition of the variable display related to the special game is satisfied. In this case, there is a possibility that the timing of winning the prize and the execution timing of the specific effect will deviate from each other, which may actually reduce the interest.

In the 31st production form, if the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the pattern fluctuation period), instead of the specific production A, the variable display result in the special game or the variable in the general game Such a problem can be avoided by executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result. It should be noted that for each winning to the general winning opening, any type of specific effect is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%), and for each winning to the general winning opening, one of the types A specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%).

[32nd presentation mode]
In the 32nd effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. is the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of pending memories is 0 and when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the specific performance C (point giving performance) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period of (1), the period of (2), and the period of (2). In the period of 3), different types of specific effects are executed. As a result, it is possible to arouse interest in the effect executed when the game ball enters the general winning slot,
Interest can be improved. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general winning condition that is the winning condition) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect winning history to any of the openings 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 32nd effect form, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the pre-reading notice exists, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice Effect) is executed, and if it is within the period of (2), that is, if there is no target for advance notice but there is a target for change result notice, specific effect A (variation result notice effect)
is executed, and when it is the period of (3), that is, when there is neither the target of the advance notice nor the target of the fluctuation result notice, the specific performance C (point giving performance) is executed.

In this way, by selecting and executing a specific effect which can be executed immediately at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole, the excitement when the game ball wins the general winning hole is appropriately improved. I am trying to let It should be noted that for each winning to the general winning opening, any type of specific effect is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%), and for each winning to the general winning opening, one of the types A specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%).

In addition, in the 32nd effect form, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning hole, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is an object for which the change result is to be announced, the pre-reading announcement effect is executed. That is, in the case where "both the target of the variable result notice and the target of the pre-reading notice exist", the pre-reading notice effect is preferentially executed. Not limited to such a form, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing, the fluctuation result notice When the effect is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at that timing, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. That is, when "both the target of the variable result notice and the target of the pre-reading notice exist", the variable result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modified Examples of 27th Rendering Form to 32nd Rendering Form]
Further, in the twenty-seventh to thirty-second presentation modes, the execution ratio of the specific presentation may be varied according to the state when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. The “state” referred to here is a result of a game played on the gaming machine, and is a state based on the game played on the gaming machine. Depending on the classification of the state, the execution ratio of the specific effect shall be changed. For example, in the 27th effect mode, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is within (1) the pattern fluctuation period, and the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect is given at a rate of 30% C is executed, and if the game state at that time is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the specific performance C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is outside the (2) symbol variation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%, If the game state at that time is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the specific performance C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further enhance interest when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole.

Further, in the twenty-seventh to thirty-second performance modes, the type of the specific performance to be executed may be changed according to the state when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. For example, in the 31st effect form, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is within (1) the pattern fluctuation period, and the number of pending memories at that time is 0, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed, and if the number of pending memories at that time is 1 or more, a specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning hole is outside the (2) pattern variation period, if the number of pending memories at that time is 0, a specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of pending memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further enhance interest when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole.

In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the classification of the state for differentiating the type of the specific effect is (1) the game state is the normal state, or (2) the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state. or (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) the number of reserved memories is 0,
is not limited to For example, (1) whether it is a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, or (2) whether it is a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. Also, (1) a period during which variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed, or (2) a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is executed, It may be a division. Also, it may be divided into (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effect is performed, or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effect is performed. . Furthermore, whether it is (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect good. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may differ according to the difference in these categories.

The specific effect C (point giving effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. It's like Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is executable only when In this way, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect C.

In addition, the specific performance C (point award performance) is not limited to the one in which 1 point is awarded for each winning in the general winning opening, but 2 points or 3 points are awarded for each winning in the general winning opening. It may be something that is done. The number of points to be given may differ, for example, depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The game state may differ depending on whether it is a normal state, or whether it is a probability variable state or a time saving state.

In addition, in the specific performance C (point awarding performance), points may be awarded according to factors other than winning a prize in a general winning slot. For example, points may be awarded in accordance with winning a prize in a start winning slot. Alternatively, points may be given according to establishment of a ready-to-win state.

[Thirty-third production form]
FIG. 21 exemplifies a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes step by step according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole. As shown in FIG. 21, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) means that the image display device 5
This is an effect that can change the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 displayed in , stepwise, from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages.

In the example of FIG. 21(a), the filled area 2100a (black part in the gauge image) in the gauge image 2100 is changed to 0 level in response to the game ball winning in one of the first general winning ports 50A to 50D. (white part occupies 10/10) to 1 step (black part 1/10)
10 and the white part occupies 9/10) is increasing (gauge +1)
. In addition, in the example of FIG. 21(b), according to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning openings 50A to 50D, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 changes from 0 to 3 stages (black part occupies 3/10 and the white portion occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

In this way, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 increases according to the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening, and when it reaches 10 stages (the black part in the gauge image is 10
/10), a privilege is given to the player. For example, similar to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5, and the player selects a desired image or music from the image providing server or the music. It becomes possible to download from the providing server to the information terminal.

Not limited to this, when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 stages, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the B character during the game may be displayed.
It may also be possible to output a special piece of music as the GM. Alternatively, fill area 2100
At the timing when a reaches 10 stages, a variable result notice effect may be executed for foretelling the possibility that the display result of the variable display relating to the special game being executed will become a big hit pattern,
At the timing when the filling area 2100a reaches the 10th stage, it is possible to execute a pre-reading forewarning effect for foretelling the possibility that the display result of the variable display relating to the reserved special symbol game will be a big hit symbol.

That is, the privilege provided when the filled area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches the 10th level may be an effect unrelated to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game. It may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a general-purpose game. Further, the effect may be related to the game state, or may be the effect not related to the game state. Also, a different effect may be executed each time the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 stages. Further, different effects may be executed according to the game state or the like when the filled area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches the ten stages.

When the filled area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 has reached the 10th level, a message to that effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is reset to 0 level. After the reset, the gauge image 21 is displayed again according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening.
The fill area 2100a at 00 will increase.

In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form shown in FIGS. 22 to 23, the first general winning opening 50A to
Each time a game ball wins in one of the fourth general winning holes 50D, based on the random number for determining execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124, the level of the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 (hereinafter referred to as gauge level) ) is to be increased by one step, and if it is determined to be executed, the gauge level is increased by one step from the current level. That is, the first general prize-winning port 5
Each time a game ball wins a prize in one of the 0A to the fourth general winning openings 50D, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the gauge level is to be increased by one level. Increases level by 1.

In the 33rd effect form, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) in a period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), at a rate of 80%. increases the gauge level by one step. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 issues a variation start command that specifies the start of variation in the special game and a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. , by receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed.

As with the specific effects A to C, a prize winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and privilege grant (
For example, the display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, the display of special characters, the output of special music, etc.), the winning history (at least the first general Winning history of 10 times or more to the winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is erased.

In the 33rd production form, and the 34th production form, the 36th production form, and the 37th production form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of a game ball during (2) the period in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) It is set lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on. During the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special game (for example, the variable result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, so the player usually wins a general prize. I am more interested in these effects including the variable display of decorative patterns rather than winning prizes of game balls into the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest in the specific effect may rather be lost. On the other hand, in the period (2), since the effect corresponding to the special game, which should be the target of the player's interest, is not executed, increasing the gauge level allows the player to I'm in a situation where it's easy to get interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than during the period (1), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 33rd effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol fluctuation (2) If it is a period (outside the symbol variation period) in which variable display of special symbols is not executed, the gauge level can be increased. Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 33rd production form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is executed (within the pattern fluctuation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on (2) winning of a game ball in a general prize-winning slot during the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). You can set it so that

[34th presentation form]
In the 34th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2)
40 when the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game is 10 seconds or more during the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). Increases the gauge level by 1 stage at the rate of %. 1st General Prize Entrance 50A~
The timing when the game ball wins in any of the fourth general winning openings 50D is (3) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is executed (within the symbol variation period) and as a variable display result in the special symbol game. When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one stage at a rate of 10%.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 issues a variation start command that specifies the start of variation in the special game and a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. , By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed, and until the variable display of special symbols is completed (the fixed special symbol is It is possible to specify the remaining time until the stop display). For example, when receiving the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern designation command, by setting the fluctuation time of the special symbol designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command as the value of the fluctuation time timer, C for effect control
The PU 120 can specify the remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbols ends (until the fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed). Further, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special game, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that is the variable display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decoration pattern ends (until the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is erased.

In the thirty-fourth effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the pattern is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) when the pattern is stopped for less than 10 seconds. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in how the fixed decorative symbols to be stopped are displayed than in the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings. for that reason,(
Even if the gauge level is increased during the period of 3), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific presentation. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than during the period (3), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 34th effect form, when the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is the period (2), it is possible to increase the gauge level. However, the gauge level may not be increased during the period (3). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning the general winning opening when the symbol stop is 10 seconds or longer is (3) ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the symbol stop is less than 10 seconds.

Also, in the thirty-fourth effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the winning pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first general winning opening 5
When the timing at which the game ball wins any of the 0A to the fourth general prize winning openings 50D is the period (2), when the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed is a big hit symbol. The gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and when the displayed result is a lost pattern, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and the game is selected from the first general prize winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the timing at which the game ball wins is during the period of (3),
The gauge level is increased at a rate of 30% when the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed is a big win pattern, and the gauge level is increased at a rate of 10% when the display result is a losing pattern. You can let them do it.

[Thirty-fifth production mode]
Specific effect B has been exemplified as the pre-reading forewarning effect for foretelling the variable display result in the reserved special game, as described above. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 9(b), whether the start winning judgment result specifying command designating "big hit" is included in the starting winning judgment result specifying command stored in the starting winning prize command storage area. Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the pre-reading advance notice effect is the first mode (sound effect only) or the second mode (sound effect and character object effect). That is, in the pre-reading notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display to be the subject of the pre-reading notice (hereinafter referred to as target change) is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target change. It is difficult.

It is also possible to employ an effect for informing target change as the look-ahead forewarning effect.
For example, as described above, in the start winning memory display area 5H, there are a plurality of display portions whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied first based on the occurrence of the start winning. is provided. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the start winning determination result designation command, if it is a command that designates "big hit", the display part corresponding to the command is changed to the display corresponding to the command that designates "loss". It is possible to execute a pending change effect that is displayed in a special mode (for example, gold color) different from the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display part displayed in the special mode, and the player can grasp the remaining number of times of variable display to be executed before the target variation.

For example, when a command specifying the judgment result at the time of start winning is received, if it is a command specifying "big hit", the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 70%,
The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode at a rate of 30%. On the other hand, when the start winning judgment result designation command is received, if it is a command that designates "missing", 5
95% of the display parts corresponding to the command are displayed in the normal form. In this way, when the display part corresponding to the reserved memory generated by the start winning is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). When the condition for starting the variable display game corresponding to the display part of the special mode (the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice) is satisfied, the special mode The display part disappears from the starting prize winning storage display area 5H. In such a mode, the pending change effect is executed during the period from the starting winning to the fulfillment of the start condition of the variable display game corresponding to the starting winning.

That is, when the condition for starting the variable display game is satisfied in the order in which the condition for starting the variable display game is satisfied, the display part displayed in the special mode (
The display part of the normal mode existing on the left of the display information corresponding to the pending memory of the variable display that is the target of the pending change effect (the display corresponding to the pending memory of the variable display that is not the target of the pending change effect) information), it is possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the pending change effect is executed.

It should be noted that the timing for displaying the display portion in the special mode is not limited to the start winning. For example, the display part may be displayed in the normal mode when the starting prize is won, and after a predetermined effect has passed, the normal mode may be changed to the special mode. may be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left. In these aspects, the time from the timing when the display portion corresponding to the variable display targeted by the pre-reading notice changes from the normal state to the special mode until the condition for starting the variable display targeted by the pre-reading notice is established. During the period, the pending change effect is executed.

In the thirty-fifth effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is determined by (1) the prediction effect not being executed and the target variation being executed. If it is a period without special mode (when there is no display part of the special mode in the pending change effect and it is not a period of execution of target variation), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

In addition, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the number of remaining variable display times until the target change is 2 or more. If it is a period (when there are two or more special games in which the start condition is satisfied before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect)
, the gauge level increases by 1 level at a rate of 40%.

In addition, when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D, (3) the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the number of remaining variable display times until the target change becomes 1. If it is a period (if there is one special game in which the start condition is satisfied before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), 2
Gauge level increases by 1 stage at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) the execution period of the target variation accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (
In the period when the variable display is executed based on the establishment of the special game start condition corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge level is increased by one level at a rate of 10%. do.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is erased.

In the thirty-fifth production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) until the target change (4) When the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) period) is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target variation to be executed next than in the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Also, during the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target variation than in the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific presentation.
On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target variation is executed, increasing the gauge level tends to attract the player's interest. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than during the periods (3) and (4), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 35th effect form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is the period (2), it is possible to increase the gauge level. However, the gauge level may not be increased during periods (3) and (4). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 35th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining variable until the target change. It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the display count is 1, and (4) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target variation.

Also, in the 35th effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4)) ), the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target variation and when the winning pattern is stopped. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first general winning opening 50A
~ 70 when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the fourth general winning holes 50D is the period (2) and the variable display result in the target variation is a big hit symbol
%, and when the variable display result is a lost pattern, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and the game is played in one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the timing at which the ball wins is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target variation is a jackpot pattern, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, and the variable display result is a losing pattern. In that case, increase the gauge level by 20%,
When the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is the period (4), 15 when the variable display result in the target variation is a big hit symbol. The gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%, and if the result of variable display is a missing pattern, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[36th presentation form]
In the 36th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. Also, the first
The timing when the game ball wins any of the general winning openings 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D,
(2) In the period during which the variable display (non-reach variation) without the reach effect is executed, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

In addition, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is (3) the period in which the variable display (reach variation) accompanied by the reach effect is being executed, and If it is a period before the ready-to-reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) it is a period in which the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the ready-to-win effect is being executed and the ready-to-win state. If it is a period after establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is erased.

In the thirty-sixth effect form, (3) the rate of increase in the gauge level based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening before the ready-to-win state is established in the ready-to-reach fluctuation is (4) general It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. During the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the rest of the decorative symbols that have not been stopped after the ready-to-win state is established, rather than the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the ready-to-reach state is not established, increasing the gauge level is likely to attract the player's interest. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than during the period (4), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the thirty-sixth effect form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is the period (3), it is possible to increase the gauge level. It may be possible, and the gauge level may not be increased during the period of (4). Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-sixth effect mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach variation is being executed and during the period before the reach state is established is (4 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach fluctuation is executed and after the establishment of the reach state.

[37th presentation form]
In the thirty-seventh effect mode shown in FIG. 23, the rate at which the gauge level is increased differs depending on which one of the plurality of general prize-winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by 1 at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins either the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by 1 stage at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when the timing when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by 1 stage at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, the first general prize-winning entrance 5
If the timing at which the game ball wins in either 0A or the fourth general winning hole 50D is (2) a period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the rate is 80%. increases the gauge level by one step.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is erased.

In the thirty-seventh effect mode, the rate of gauge level increase is different between (1) within the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and furthermore, the second general prize opening 50B or the third general prize opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between when a game ball wins in 50C and when a game ball wins in the first general winning port 50A or the fourth general winning port 50D. By varying the rate at which the gauge level increases according to the general prize winning opening into which the game ball has won, the player is also interested in which general prize winning opening the game ball has won in, thereby improving interest. be able to.

For example, the first general winning that is provided near the end of the game area 10 than the winning of the game balls to the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C that are provided near the center of the game area 10 When it is difficult for the game ball to enter the opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball enters the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D. is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the second general prize winning port 50B and the third general prize winning port 50C, so that the interest in winning in the general prize winning port, which is more difficult to win, is increased. It is better to raise it.

In addition, in the 37th production mode, when the game ball wins the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening When the game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. again,
Contrary to the example shown in the 37th production mode, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening 50B or the second 3
It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the general winning hole 50C.

[38th presentation mode]
In the 38th to 42nd presentation modes shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, whether or not to execute the specific presentation is not determined based on the random number extracted from the random number circuit 124 for determining execution of the specific presentation. Further, in the 38th to 42nd presentation modes, the gauge level that increases according to one winning in the general winning opening is not limited to one stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the gauge level may be increased by three stages in accordance with one winning in the general winning opening.

In the 38th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1), and (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the gauge level is increased by three stages. Increase (gauge +3).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of four times or more to the first general winning mouth 50A to the fourth general winning mouth 50D) is erased.

In the 38th production form, and the 39th production form, the 41st production form, and the 42nd production form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) The number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of a game ball in (2) the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the game ball winning in the general winning opening It is set less than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on. During the period of (1), the effect corresponding to the special game (for example, the variable result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, so the player usually wins a general prize. I am more interested in these effects including the variable display of decorative patterns rather than winning prizes of game balls into the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (1), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (2), since the effect corresponding to the special game, which should be the target of the player's interest, is not executed, the gauge level is greatly increased. are in a position to be interested in this. for that reason,
By increasing the gauge level more than the period of (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 38th effect form, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol fluctuation period), the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is set to, for example, 20% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 80%), and (2) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed ( outside the symbol variation period), the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more may be set to 80% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 20%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 38th production mode, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). (2) The number of stages in which the level increases is greater than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). may be set to be larger.

In addition, as a privilege given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, there are cases where a privilege with a different value is given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, there are cases where a two-dimensional code for downloading only images is displayed, and there are cases where a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music is displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is greater than that to the former. The number of stages in which the gauge level increases may indicate the size of the privilege value to be given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages. For example, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one stage is 80%), and when the privilege value is large, the gauge level is increased by two stages or more. For example, if the rate of increase is 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the privilege value is small. , the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is, for example, 50% (the percentage of changing only one stage is 50%), and if the privilege value is large, the percentage of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is, for example, 80%. (The ratio of changing only one step is 20%).

[39th presentation mode]
In the 39th effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level increases by three stages (gauge +3). The timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2)
During the period during which the variable display of the special symbols is executed (within the symbol variation period), and when the remaining time until the fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge Increases level by 2 stages (gauge +2). 1st General Prize Entrance 50A~
The timing when the game ball wins in any of the fourth general winning openings 50D is (3) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is executed (within the symbol variation period) and as a variable display result in the special symbol game. When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of four times or more to the first general winning mouth 50A to the fourth general winning mouth 50D) is erased.

In the 39th effect form, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening when the pattern is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) the pattern is stopped in less than 10 seconds. Sometimes, it is set higher than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in how the fixed decorative symbols to be stopped are displayed than in the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (3), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, increasing the gauge level by a large amount makes it easier for the player to become interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the period (3), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 39th effect form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two stages or more. For example, the ratio to change is 80% (the ratio to change only one step is 20%), (
In the case of the period of 3), the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is set to, for example, 20% (
The ratio of changing only one step may be 80%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 39th production form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning the general winning opening when the symbol stops for 10 seconds or more is ( 3) It may be set to be smaller than the number of steps by which the gauge level increases based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the symbols are stopped in less than 10 seconds.

In addition, in the 39th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed or the winning pattern is stop-displayed as a variable display result in the special game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first general winning opening 5
When the timing at which the game ball wins any of the 0A to the fourth general prize winning openings 50D is the period (2), when the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed is a jackpot pattern. The gauge level is increased by three stages, and when the displayed result is a missing pattern, the gauge level is increased by two stages, and the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. However, in the case of the period (3), if the displayed result of the variable display of decorative symbols being executed is a big win symbol, the gauge level is increased by two stages, and if the display result is a lost symbol. The gauge level may be increased by one step.

[40th Production Mode]
In the 40th effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is (1) the pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the target variation is not executed. If it is a period without (a period in which there is no special mode display part in the pending change effect and it is not a target variation execution period), the gauge level is increased by four stages (gauge +4).

In addition, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the number of remaining variable display times until the target change is 2 or more. If it is a period (when there are two or more special games in which the start condition is satisfied before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect)
, the gauge level increases by 3 stages (gauge +3).

In addition, when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D, (3) the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the number of remaining variable display times until the target change becomes 1. If it is a period (if there is one special game in which the start condition is satisfied before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge level is increased by two stages. (gauge +2).

In addition, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) the execution period of the target variation accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (
When the variable display is executed based on the establishment of the special game start condition corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1) .

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D three times or more) is erased.

In the 40th effect form, (2) the number of stages of the gauge level that is increased based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable display times until the target change is 2 or more is (3)
When the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 1, the number of gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening, (4) When the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 0 ( It is set more than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the game ball winning the general winning hole during the execution period of the target variation. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target variation to be executed next than in the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Also, during the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target variation than in the winning state of the game ball into the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the periods (3) and (4), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target variation is executed, increasing the gauge level a lot makes the player more interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

In addition, in the 40th effect mode, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two stages or more. For example, the ratio to change is 80% (the ratio to change only one step is 20%), and (3
) In the case of the period of (4), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two stages or more is set to, for example, 20
% (80% for changing only one step). Also, contrary to the example shown in the 40th presentation mode, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining number until the target change. It may be set to be smaller than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the number of times of variable display is 1, and (4) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the target variation execution period.

Also, in the 40th effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) ), the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target variation and when the winning pattern is stopped. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first general winning opening 50A
~When the timing when the game ball wins in any of the fourth general winning holes 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by 4 steps when the variable display result in the target variation is a big hit symbol. , If the variable display result is a missing pattern, the gauge level is 3
When the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D by increasing the level is the period (3), the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit pattern. In this case, the gauge level is increased by three stages, and when the variable display result is a missing pattern, the gauge level is increased by two stages, and the game ball is placed in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the winning timing is the period of (4), the gauge level is changed to 2 when the variable display result in the target variation is a jackpot symbol.
The gauge level may be increased by one step when the variable display results in a missing symbol.

[Forty-first production mode]
In the 41st effect mode, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) ), the gauge level increases by four stages (gauge +4). Also, the first
The timing when the game ball wins any of the general winning openings 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D,
(2) In the period during which the variable display (non-reach variation) without the reach effect is executed, the gauge level is increased by three stages (gauge +3).

In addition, the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is (3) the period in which the variable display (reach variation) accompanied by the reach effect is being executed, and If it is the period before establishment of the ready-to-reach state, the gauge level increases by two stages (gauge +3), and (4) it is a period in which the variable display (variable reach) accompanied by the ready-to-reach effect is being executed and the ready-to-reach state is established. If it is the subsequent period, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the winning history of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D three times or more) is erased.

In the 41st effect form, (3) the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the game ball entering the general winning hole before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, (4) after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation It is set to be larger than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the rest of the decorative symbols that have not been stopped after the ready-to-win state is established, rather than the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (4), it may rather spoil the interest of the specific effect. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the ready-to-reach state is not established, increasing the gauge level by a large amount is likely to attract the player's interest. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the period (4), the interest in the specific effect is appropriately heightened.

It should be noted that, in the 41st effect mode, if the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D is during the period (3), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, the ratio to change is 80% (the ratio to change only one step is 20%), and (4
), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two stages or more is set to, for example, 20% (1
The ratio of changing only in steps may be 80%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 41st presentation mode, (3) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach variation is being executed and during the period before the reach state is established is ( 4) It may be set to be smaller than the number of steps by which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach variation is executed and after the establishment of the reach state.

[Forty-second production mode]
In the forty-second presentation form shown in FIG. 25, the number of stages for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which one of the plurality of general winning slots is won. 2nd General Winning Gate 50B
and the timing when the game ball wins in either of the third general winning openings 50C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period), the gauge level is 1
Gradually increases (gauge +1). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins either the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by 2 stages (gauge +2)
.

In addition, when the timing when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by 3 stages (gauge +3). On the other hand, the first general prize-winning entrance 5
When the timing at which the game ball wins either the 0A or the fourth general winning hole 50D is (2) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the gauge level is 4. Increases step by step (gauge +4).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 stages, notification to that effect and provision of benefits (for example, display of two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, display of special characters,
Along with the output of a special song, etc.), the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the history of winning three times or more to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is erased.

In the forty-second presentation mode, the number of gauge level increases differs between (1) within the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period. The increasing number of stages of the gauge level is different between when the game ball wins in the opening 50C and when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D. By varying the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased according to the general prize-winning opening in which the game ball wins, the player becomes interested in which general prize-winning opening the game ball has won in, thereby enhancing interest. can be made

For example, the first general winning that is provided near the end of the game area 10 than the winning of the game balls to the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C that are provided near the center of the game area 10 When it is difficult for the game ball to enter the opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the gauge level increases when the game ball enters the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D. By setting the number to be larger than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the second general prize winning port 50B and the third general prize winning port 50C, it is possible to win the general prize winning port which is more difficult to win. It's good to make it more interesting.

In addition, in the 42nd effect form, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is, for example, 80% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 20 %), and when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two stages or more is set to 20% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 80%). Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production mode, the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening. It may be set to be smaller than the number of stages by which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in 50B or the third general winning hole 50C.

[Modifications of the 33rd production form to the 42nd production form]
In the 33rd to 37th presentation modes, the division that serves as a reference for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, and in the 38th to 42nd presentation modes, the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased is determined. The categories that serve as the criteria for this are not limited to the above examples.
For example, the division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level and the division for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased are (1) whether the game state is normal or (2) whether the game state is It may be a division of whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Also, the classification may be (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0 or not. Also, it may be divided into (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effect is performed, or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effect is performed. . moreover,
The classification may be (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect.

Note that the gauge image 2100 is displayed even when the filling area 2100a is at the minimum level of 0, but a condition for displaying this gauge image 2100 may be provided. For example, when the game state is the normal state, the gauge image 2100 is displayed, and an effect for increasing the gauge level can be executed, but when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the gauge image 2100 is not displayed (gauge The effect for increasing the level is not executed).

The display of the gauge image 2100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are executed during the period when the predetermined effect is being executed, and may not be executed during the period when the predetermined effect is not being executed. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole only during a period (predetermined performance stage period) in which the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 is a predetermined background image. Alternatively, the gauge level may increase. In addition, only during the period when the display portion in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special manner), the game ball wins in the general winning opening. The gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when the

In addition, the production control CPU 120 is provided on the production control board 12 (not shown).
When the real-time clock) reaches a predetermined time, simultaneous effects (effects that are executed at the same time on amusement machines of the same model at the predetermined time) are to be executed at the same time. The gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when a game ball wins a prize.

Also, when increasing the gauge level, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, different production sounds may be output according to the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by three steps,
Compared to the case where the gauge level is increased by one step, the volume of the effect sound may be increased.

Moreover, it is preferable to output the effect sound for increasing the gauge level with a volume different from the effect sound related to the special game and the effect sound related to the normal game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the normal game, but smaller than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game. Also, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game, but smaller than the volume of the error sound for notifying the game machine error.

Also, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be changed according to the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be higher than the volume in the variable probability state or the time saving state.

In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes step by step according to the winning in the general winning slot is not limited to the specific effect D in which the gauge level is changed, and the displayed character mode is changed in stages. It may change (for example, the size of the displayed character increases, or the item owned by the character changes), and the characters that can be selected by the player increase step by step. Also good. Also, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed stepwise, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed stepwise. Also, the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R may change stepwise.

A specific effect D (gauge update effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. It's like Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is executable only when In this way, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect D.

[Forty-third production mode]
The above-mentioned specific effects A to D are all effects executed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not enter the general winning hole. You can do it. For example, the effect control CPU 120, in the game period of 10 minutes, when the game ball does not win any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, as shown in FIG. An image simulating the shape of the general prize entrance and "There is no general prize.
A specific effect E in which the notification image 2200 or the like including the character "" is displayed on the image display device 5 can be executed.

In this way, the specific effect is not limited to the effect executed based on the game ball entering the general winning hole, but the effect executed based on the non-winning of the game ball in the general winning hole (general winning It may be a production that suggests the difficulty of winning a prize to the mouth). That is, the specific effect may be any effect that is related to the game event of winning a game ball into a general winning hole (effect that is executed with the occurrence of a game event or non-occurrence of a game event).

In the forty-third effect form shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 stores a non-win determination timer for determining a period during which no game ball has won in the general winning hole. Production control CP
U120, from the game control microcomputer 100 when the value of the non-winning judgment timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, When any one of the big winning opening winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started. Then, before the non-winning judgment timer times out (before 10 minutes have passed since the timer was set), if the general winning mouth specification command is received, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning judgment timer, and again. Start a timer.

On the other hand, when the non-winning judgment timer times out due to the fact that the general winning mouth designation command is not received until the non-winning judgment timer times out, as shown in FIG.
A specific effect E for displaying the notification image 2200 on the image display device 5 is executed. In addition, specific production E
is executed, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 2200) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the non-winning determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it does not receive either, it judges that the game has ended, and suspends the update of the non-winning determination timer (prevents the value of the timer from being updated). When the update of the non-winning judgment timer is suspended, the processing (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the timeout of the non-winning judgment timer is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited) during the period in which the game is not played.
. In addition, when the update of the non-winning determination timer is not suspended, the effect control CPU 1
In 20, it becomes possible to perform processing (specifically, execution of a specific effect E in response to detection of timeout when the value of the timer becomes 0) due to timeout of the non-winning determination timer. Then, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any one of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command while the update of the non-winning judgment timer is suspended. , resumes updating the non-winning judgment timer.

That is, the non-win determination timer is updated while the player is playing the game (the end of the game is not determined), and is generally set for 10 minutes during the period when the player is playing the game. When the number of winnings to the winning opening becomes 0, it times out (the effect control CPU 120 detects the time out). As a result, when the player is playing the game, the specific performance E is executed if no winning to the general winning opening occurs for 10 minutes.

It should be noted that whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being shot toward the game area 10 in the above-described effect mode. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance of the game area 10, and whether or not the player is playing a game is determined according to whether the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the shooting motor provided in the hitting ball shooting device is operating). good.

As described above, when the player does not win a prize in the general prize winning slot for a predetermined period (10-minute game period) even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. To notify that no prize has been awarded to a general prize winning slot. By this notification, the player can grasp that no prize has been won in the general prize-winning slot, which can be used as a reference when playing a game (for example, as a judgment material for machine selection). In addition, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko game machine 1 on which the specific effect E is executed (or the frequency of execution of the specific effect E is high), it is possible to increase the frequency of winning to the general winning holes. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on

Further, when the player is playing a game but no prize is awarded to the general prize winning slot, the specific effect E is executed, but the player is not playing the game. If there is no winning in the general winning slot, pause the non-winning judgment timer (
Execution of the specific effect E is limited by preventing the effect control CPU 120 from executing processing based on timeout of the non-winning determination timer.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the player has not played the game and thus no prize has been awarded to the general prize winning slot. The specific performance E may be executed at a lower rate than when it is determined that no prize is awarded to the general prize-winning port even though the player is playing the game.

[Forty-fourth presentation mode]
The specific effect E is not limited to notifying that no prizes have been won in the general winning openings within a predetermined period (the number of winnings in the general winning openings was less than 1). It may be identifiable to notify that the number of winnings to the winning opening is less than a predetermined number. fourth
In the 4-effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the winning number of game balls into the general winning opening in a predetermined period. Production control CPU 120
, from the game control microcomputer 100 when the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is assumed to be 0), a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and When any one of the big winning opening winning commands is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started. At this time RAM
The value of the winning number counter field formed at 122 is set to zero. Then, during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes after the timer is set), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area each time a general winning opening designation command is received.

Then, the effect control CPU 120, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), in the specific effect E, within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number and/or the number of prizes won within a predetermined period is notified. For example, the message "Less than 3 public wins in 30 minutes" and/or "Only 1 public win in 30 minutes".
is displayed on the image display device 5.

When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is set again as the value of the prize number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time after the specific effect E is started. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the specific effect E is not executed, and the winning number determination timer is reset. Set the value to 30 minutes again and start the timer again.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it does not receive either, it judges that the game has ended, and suspends the update of the prize number judgment timer (prevents the value of the timer from being updated). When the update of the number-of-wins determination timer is suspended, the processing (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the timeout of the number-of-wins determination timer is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited) during the period in which the game is not played.
. In addition, when the update of the winning number determination timer is not suspended, the effect control CPU 1
In 20, it is possible to perform processing (specifically, execution of a specific effect E in response to detection of a timeout when the timer value becomes 0) due to timeout of the winning number determination timer. Then, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any one of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended, , restarts the update of the winning number determination timer.

That is, the winning number determination timer is updated during the period in which the player is playing the game (the end of the game is not determined), and 30 minutes have elapsed during the period in which the player is playing the game. (The timeout is detected by the effect control CPU 120). At the timeout, the specific performance E is executed only when the number of winnings to the general winning openings during the 30-minute game period is less than a predetermined number.

It should be noted that whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being shot toward the game area 10 in the above-described effect mode. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance of the game area 10, and whether or not the player is playing a game is determined according to whether the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the shooting motor provided in the hitting ball shooting device is operating). good.

In this way, although the player is playing the game, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings during the predetermined period (30 minutes of playing time) is less than the predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed. hand,
It notifies that the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number. By this notification, the player can understand that the frequency of winning in the general winning slot is low, and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for machine selection) when playing a game. In addition, in the game hall, the specific production E
is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), it is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance of the game nails so that the frequency of winning a prize in the general prize winning slot becomes higher. It becomes possible.

Further, when the number of winnings to the general winning openings in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not played by the player. If the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 120 executes processing based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

Note that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slots during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the player is not playing the game. , In this case, the specific effect is performed at a lower rate than when it is determined that the number of prizes won in the general winning openings during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game. E may be executed.

[Forty-fifth presentation mode]
In the forty-third effect mode and the forty-fourth effect mode, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Although the specific effect E is executed regardless of the condition, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be changed according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-fifth effect form, the timing (
When the game state at the timing when the non-winning judgment timer times out, the timing when the winning number judgment timer times out) is (1) normal state, specific effect E is executed, (2) probability variable state or time saving state In some cases, the specific effect E is not executed.

In addition, the game state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1 ) In the case of the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) In the case of the variable probability state or the time saving state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. can be In this way, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E at a different rate according to the game state when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number.

[Forty-sixth presentation form]
In the forty-third effect mode and the forty-fourth effect mode, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Although the specific effect E is executed in a common mode regardless of the determination, the effect mode of the specific effect E may be changed according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-sixth effect form, the game state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, timing when the winning number determination timer times out) However, (1) when it is in the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output), and (2) when it is in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the specific effect E is executed as the first It is designed to be executed in two modes (image display only).

Specifically, the first mode of the specific effect E is, on the image display device 5, an image display indicating that the number of prizes won in the general prize pool during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number, and notifies the fact. This is a mode in which notification is performed by voice output by outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only notification by image display is performed, and notification by voice output is not performed.

In addition, the game state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1 ) In the case of the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and (2)
In the case of the probability variable state or the time saving state, the specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20% (performed in the second mode at a rate of 80%), for example. In this manner, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the game state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modified Examples of 43rd Rendering Mode to 46th Rendering Mode]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is similar to the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole, the display setting table of FIG. You can switch between execution and non-execution according to Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is executable only when In this way, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect E.

For example, when the game hall side does not want to execute the specific effect E, by switching the display changeover switch 32 to the non-display setting (first position), the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player's setting. . With such a configuration, the intention of the game hall side is preferentially reflected as to whether or not to execute the specific effect E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning a prize in the general winning opening. can be made

In addition, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd performance mode, and the value of the winning number determination timer and the value of the winning number counter area in the 44th performance mode, which are stored in the RAM 122, are all electronic. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped because it is not backed up at the time of interruption, it is erased accordingly. Then, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd presentation mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th presentation mode are both disabled. Thus, the value of the timer is not referred to until a predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 120 . Also, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the forty-fourth presentation mode becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the number of prizes won in the general winning holes is deleted without being backed up, and when the power supply is restarted, the addition starts again from 0. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the control burden of having to provide a backup means for when power is cut off.

As in the forty-fifth effect mode and the forty-sixth effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the classification for changing the effect mode of the specific effect E is (1) the normal state of the game state, or (2)
) It is not limited whether the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state. For example, (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Also,(
1) whether it is a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, or (2) whether it is a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. Also, (1) a period during which variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed, or (2) a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is executed, It may be a division. Also, (1) whether it is a period during which the variable display is executed without the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2)
The classification may be whether or not it is a period in which variable display accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect is being executed.
Further, (1) before execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2)
The classification may be whether it is after execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the mode of the specific effect E may differ according to the difference in these categories.

Note that the specific effect E executed in the 43rd to 46th effect forms is executed when the number of winnings to the general winning openings during a predetermined game period is less than a predetermined number. Not limited to such a form, only a specific general winning opening among the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is targeted, and the number of winnings in the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is smaller. For example, the first general winning opening 50A
Only the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, which have a higher winning frequency of game balls than the fourth general winning opening 50D, count the number of winnings to the general winning opening during a predetermined game period, The specific effect E may be executed when the counted winning number is less than a predetermined number.

In addition, in the 43rd production mode to the 46th production mode, within a certain period of time (10 minutes or 30
If the number of prizes won into the general prize-winning slots is less than a predetermined number, the specific effect E will be executed, but the period for judging the number of prizes won into the general prize-winning slots is limited to this period. can't The period may be defined by the number of executions of the special game, for example, it may be a period during which the variable display relating to the special game is executed 100 times. Also, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the game machine to the present time, or a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period during which the game state is controlled to a predetermined state. It may be the period during which the state is controlled (the period during which the game is played with the right hand).

Furthermore, the following method may be used as a method of determining whether or not the number of winnings of game balls into the general winning openings during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number.

(a) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning openings with respect to the predetermined number of balls shot into the game area 10 is smaller than a predetermined number. Approximately 100 game balls are shot into the game area 10 in one minute while the shooting motor of the ball shooting device is being driven. Therefore, for example, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number with respect to the number of hit balls of 1000 (equivalent to a game period of 10 minutes), the specific effect E may be executed. . Also, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 10 is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. can be

In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 10 is
Different aspects of the specific effect may be executed depending on whether the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio or when the ratio is equal to or higher than the predetermined ratio. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning openings to the number of balls fired into the game area 10 is low, the frequency of winning the general winning openings due to the appearance of the character A is low. If the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 10 is a middle ratio higher than the low ratio, the character B is notified that it is level.
Appears to notify that the frequency of winning the general winning holes is at a medium level, and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning holes to the number of balls fired into the game area 10 is higher than the medium ratio. If the percentage is high, the character C may appear to notify that the frequency of winning prizes in the general prize openings is high.

(b) It may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to winnings to the general prize winning opening during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number. For example, if 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, the number of prize balls paid out according to winning in a general winning hole during a game period of 30 minutes is less than 30 (for 3 wins), the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, a predetermined number of hit balls (
For example, 1000 shots) may be determined whether the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number. The ratio of the number of prize balls put out according to the winning to the general prize opening to the number of hit balls is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific performance E is executed. can be In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general prize opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 10 is lower than a predetermined ratio, or more than a predetermined ratio. It is also possible to execute a specific effect in a different mode depending on the case of .

In this manner, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general prize opening is smaller than a predetermined number. In addition, even in a case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on the general winning hole into which the game ball has won, such a form can be applied.

(c) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winnings opening is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to the predetermined number of winnings to the starting winnings opening (for example, 100), It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winning prizes to the general winning openings to the number of winning prizes to the starting winning openings, and execute the specific effect E when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10000) of the winning balls paid out according to winning to the starting winning opening. It may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out according to winning to the general winning opening is smaller than the number of winning balls paid out according to winning to the starting winning opening. The ratio of the numbers may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general winning opening to the number of winning balls paid out according to winning to the starting winning opening is lower than a predetermined ratio. A different form of the specific effect may be executed depending on whether the ratio is equal to or higher than the predetermined ratio.

Also, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out during a predetermined period when the game state is normal Calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to the general prize opening to the total number of prize balls paid out), and if the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio , the specific effect E may be executed. Further, it is also possible to execute a specific effect of a different aspect according to the ratio.

(d) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times) for a predetermined amount of consumption (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning openings to the amount of money spent in the gaming machine may be calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect E may be executed. In such a form, according to the lending unit price (for example, 4 yen, or 1 yen, etc.) of the game media used in the game machine,
Different predetermined numbers (for example, 2 times for 4 yen, 8 times for 1 yen, etc.) or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times/1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times/1000 for 1 yen) Yen, etc.) is applied. In addition, specific effects are executed in different modes depending on whether the ratio of the number of prizes won to the general prize gates to the amount consumed by the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or higher than the predetermined ratio. You can make it work.

[Forty-seventh production mode]
In the forty-seventh effect mode shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, and during the period during which the character is displayed, the first start winning opening is displayed. Effective start winning of game balls (that is, winning of game balls to the first start winning opening in a state where the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit) and playing to the second starting winning opening Based on the occurrence of any of the effective start winning of the ball (that is, the game ball winning the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit) , in the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold change effect is executed to change the display part corresponding to the variable display game on hold, including the variable display game based on the valid start win, from the normal mode to the special mode. .

Note that the effect control CPU 120 reserves the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective starting prize to be displayed in the special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode, based on the occurrence of the effective start winning. You may make it perform change production. For example, when a new valid start-up win occurs, the displayed character performs an action such as raising a cane. may be displayed in a special mode instead of a normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the pending information, there may be a state in which the pending information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied lastly exists).

Here, in the 47th presentation mode, and the 48th presentation mode and the 49th presentation mode described later,
Random number circuit 1 each time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening
24 to extract a random number for character determination. Then, based on the extracted random number for character determination, whether or not to make a character appear and, if a character is to appear, which of characters A to C is to appear is determined in the character determination table of FIG. Determined by the percentage indicated.

It should be noted that the character determination random number extraction by the effect control CPU 120 may be performed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting the random number for determining the character under the condition that the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state, it is possible to limit the appearance of the character during the period when the game game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. . In addition, it is possible to prevent characters from appearing after the ready-to-reach state is established by not extracting the random number for character determination after the ready-to-reach state is established within the period in which the variable display game is executed.

In the example of FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 determines to make the character A appear at a rate of 10% when receiving the general prize winning port designation command designating the winning to the first general prize winning port 50A, It is decided to make the character B appear at a rate of 30%, and to make the character C appear at a rate of 60%. Also, when receiving a general prize winning port specification command designating a prize to the second general prize winning port 50B, it is determined that none of the characters will appear at a rate of 50%, and the character A will appear at a rate of 35%. decided to let 10
It is decided to make the character B appear at a rate of 5%, and to make the character C appear at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a general prize winning port designation command designating a prize to the third general prize winning port 50C, it determines that none of the characters will appear at a rate of 90%, and 10%. It is decided to make character C appear at a rate. Also, when receiving a general prize winning port specification command designating a prize to the fourth general prize winning port 50D, it is determined that none of the characters will appear at a rate of 75%, and the character C will appear at a rate of 25%. decide to let

That is, in this example, when the game ball wins either the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B provided in the left game area 10A, the third game provided in the right game area 10B Characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in either the general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D. The player shoots the game ball to the left game area 10A when the game state is the normal state, and shoots the game ball to the right game area 10B when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, so in the normal state, the probability variable A character will appear at a higher rate than a state or a time-saving state.

Then, in the forty-seventh to forty-ninth production modes, a specific production (specific production F (suspended change production) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (effective start winning, ready-to-win state) during the period in which the character is displayed. , Specific effect G (variation result notice effect by dialogue)) is executed, so in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state. A specific effect can be executed at a certain rate.

In this way, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous compared to the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the player's interest in the game, for example, the variable display of the special game, is low. By increasing the frequency of execution, interest is enhanced.
On the other hand, in the probability variable state and the time saving state, it is advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's interest in the game, for example, the variable display of the special game is high. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect If it remains high, it may actually spoil the interest. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

It should be noted that it is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28, and even when game balls enter the same general winning hole, the rate at which characters appear may differ according to the game state. When the game ball wins in the second general winning port 50B, the character appears at a rate of 50%, but in the variable probability state and the time saving state, 10% The characters may appear at a ratio of .

Also, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the variable probability state and the time saving state. In this way, ``making the execution ratio of the effect in one state different from the execution ratio of the effect in the other state'' means that the effect can be executed only in one state, and the effect is not executed in the other state. shall be included. Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 28, the character appearance ratio in the variable probability state and the normal state may be higher than the character appearance ratio in the normal state.

Also, in the example of FIG. 28, when a game ball wins in the first general winning port 50A, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the second general winning port 50B. there is Also, when the game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 50D, the third general winning opening 50
Characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in C. In this embodiment, when the game ball is launched to the left game area 10A, the first general winning opening 5
The frequency that the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B is higher than 0A, and when the game ball is shot to the right game area 10B, the game is played in the third general winning opening 50C rather than the fourth general winning opening 50D. The ball wins frequently. That is, when a game ball wins in a general prize-winning port where it is difficult for a game ball to win, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in a general prize-winning port where a game ball easily wins. Conversely, when a game ball enters a general winning port where a game ball is likely to enter, the character wins at a higher rate than when a game ball enters a general winning port where it is difficult for a game ball to enter. You can make it appear.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 28, characters that may be displayed when a game ball wins in the first general prize winning port 50A and the second general prize winning port 50B, which have a high frequency of winning game balls in the normal state, are: Possibility of being displayed when a game ball wins in the third general prize winning port 50C and the fourth general prize winning port 50D where the frequency of winning the game ball is high in the variable probability state and the time saving state, although the characters are A to C. A certain character is character C only. In the variable-probability state and the time-saving state, which are game states in which the game interest is higher than in the normal state, a situation occurs in which "a character appears, but a character display period elapses without a predetermined condition being satisfied" occurs. Only the character C, which has the longest display period, can be displayed because it is conceivable that the display time may be lowered.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28, even if the game ball wins in the same general winning hole, the characters that appear may differ according to the game state. When a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B, there is a possibility that characters A to C are displayed, but in the variable probability state and the time saving state, when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B, the character Only C may be displayed. Also, Figure 2
Contrary to the example shown in 8, the number of characters that may be displayed in the variable probability state and the normal state may be larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. .

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the display period of each character displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. All of the characters A to C are displayed on the image display device 5 immediately at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning slot. That is, the character is displayed immediately after the winning of the general winning slot occurs, so that the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning slot has occurred.

When the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) if the predetermined conditions are not met within one minute from the start of the display (effective start prize winning, ready-to-win state established), the display of the character A is started. Character A is erased from the screen when one minute elapses, and (2) if a predetermined condition is established within one minute from the start of display, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (suspended change effect ), the character A is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (including a condition related to an effect executed as the game progresses). Even if a valid starting prize is generated, if the number of pending variable display games including the variable display game corresponding to the valid starting prize is 1, the starting condition for the variable display game is met. Since the start condition is established (retaining information is erased) immediately after this, it becomes difficult to secure a period for executing the reserving change performance by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of pending variable display games after an effective start winning is less than a predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of pending variable display games after an effective start winning is a predetermined number. If the number is greater than (1 in this example), a pending change effect may be executed.

In addition, the characters may be erased when the game is shifted to the jackpot game state or when the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 120 described above. Also, the character that was displayed on the image display device 5 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 was stopped will not be displayed again after the power supply is restarted. In other words, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the characters displayed before the power failure on the image display device 5 again after the power supply is resumed is not performed.

Note that the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed when the character that has appeared performs a predetermined action (that is, when the appearance of the displayed object changes). Both the case where the mode of the corresponding display part changes and the case where it does not change shall be included. The timing at which the specific effect F (suspended change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, character A is used, but character B or character C may appear in a specific effect F (suspended change effect). This is the timing at which an action effect in which the corresponding display portion is covered is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

32(f) and (g), the fact that the specific effect G (fluctuation result forewarning effect) is executed means that the character 3100 that has appeared (character B in this example) When character A appears in (variation result notice effect) or character C
may appear) emits a predetermined line, and the timing at which the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) ends is when the character's line is displayed for a certain period of time (predetermined line display period has passed).

When the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (valid start winning, ready-to-win state established) within 2 minutes from the start of the display, the display of the character B is started. Character B is erased from the screen when two minutes have passed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of display, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (suspended change effect ), the character B is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

When the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) if the predetermined conditions (valid start winning, establishment of ready-to-win state) are not established within 3 minutes from the start of display, the display of the character C is started. Character C is erased from the screen when 3 minutes have passed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is established within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (suspended change effect) ), and the character C is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

In this way, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 5 based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, thereby informing the player of the state after the game ball has won in the general winning opening. can be recognized. Also, the period during which the character is displayed is a specific period in which a specific effect can be executed when a predetermined condition is established. Therefore, the player recognizes that "the specific effect will be executed if the predetermined condition is established while the character is being displayed", and starts the game to satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, interest in the game is heightened until the specific performance is executed.

In addition, since the display period differs depending on the character to be displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is being displayed. A player who has confirmed the type of the character can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period during which a predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. As a result, interest can be enhanced until the specific effect is executed.

In addition, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the setting ratio of the specific period in which the predetermined condition must be satisfied, differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can enter any of the general winning openings with a game ball. It will be interesting to see if it wins.

(Concrete example of specific effect F (suspended change effect))
In the forty-seventh effect mode shown in FIG. 30, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5, the displayed character is displayed as a specific effect F when an effective start winning occurs. is executed. As described above, the occurrence of an effective start winning prize means the winning of a game ball to the first start prize winning port in a state where the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first start winning prize is less than the upper limit value, and the second Winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening occurs in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

Effect control CPU 120 receives a starting winning opening designation command specifying "first starting winning opening" or "second starting winning opening" and a start winning judgment result designation command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, the occurrence of a valid start winning can be recognized. FIG. 31 shows a specific example of the pending change effect in the 47th effect form.

In FIG. 31(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. number(
Assume that the total number of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count) is two. At this time, in the starting winning memory display area 5H, the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied first among the variable display games in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied. is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied second is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 determines to make the character A appear at a rate of 35% based on the winning of the game ball in the second general winning hole 50B (FIG. 2).
8). In FIG. 31(b), the effect control CPU 120 displays a character 3000 (character A) holding a cane 3001 on the image display device 5 based on this determination.
It is assumed that the character A appears on the screen immediately after winning the general prize.

Then, within one minute from the appearance of the character A, an effective starting prize is generated in the first starting prize winning port, and a predetermined condition is established. In FIG. 31(c), accordingly, the number of pending memories is 3.
Thus, the display part (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied thirdly is displayed in the normal mode. The effect control CPU 120, which detects the establishment of a predetermined condition in the state where the character is being displayed, determines whether or not to change the display part corresponding to each of the three reserved memories from the normal mode to the special mode. Each determines whether

Here, the effect control CPU120, the start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the second
Check each starting winning judgment result designation command (which contains valid data that is not blank data) stored in the starting winning command storage area for special figures. and,
As shown in FIG. 31(d), with respect to the starting prize-winning determination result specifying command specifying "big hit", the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. , and at a rate of 20%, it is decided not to change the aspect of the display portion corresponding to the command to the normal aspect. On the other hand, with respect to the start winning judgment result specifying command that specifies "missing", it is decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate of 90%. , the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is determined not to be changed to the normal mode.

In this example, with respect to the start winning determination result specification command corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first and second, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command shall not be changed to the normal mode. (No pending change) is determined, and only with respect to the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied thirdly, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. It is assumed that it has been decided to allow (with pending change).

Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG.
(Character A) turns the tip of the wand 3001 toward the start winning prize memory display area 5H, and wand 3
An action presentation is executed in which a display portion corresponding to each reserved memory is surrounded by a flame 3002 emitted from the tip of 001.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31(f), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the left end and the second display part from the left to the normal mode based on the above-described determination in accordance with the execution of this action effect. As for the third display part from the left, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the determination described above. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, the character 3000 (character A) holding the staff 3001 and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the staff 3001 disappear from the screen.

As a result of the change in the appearance of the display part accompanying this action effect, for the player, the action of the character 3000 (character A) that appeared based on the winning in the general winning slot causes the third display part from the left to appear. has changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and expects the variable display game to be executed three games after the variable display game currently being executed.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 31(c) and 31(d), with respect to the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, the display part corresponding to the command is changed to the normal mode. If it is determined not to change the mode (no pending change), even after the action effect shown in FIG. 31(e) is performed, as shown in FIG. All three corresponding retention sites are unchanged in the normal fashion.

In this way, the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed with the trigger of ``the occurrence of the effective starting prize during the period in which the character is displayed'', so that the effective starting prize is generated during the character display period. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game ball wins a prize in the general winning hole, and to increase the interest until the specific performance is executed. In addition, the event of winning a prize in a general prize gate that is not related to the progress of the variable display game is used as a trigger to announce the display result of the variable display game for which the start conditions have not yet been met, so that the game ball is placed in the general prize gate. It is possible to further enhance interest from winning to execution of the specific performance.

Also, according to the action of the character 3000 (character A), the display mode of any one of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established changes from the normal mode to the special mode. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the display mode changes, and furthermore, if the display mode changes, which display part changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, by suggesting a variable display game that the player can expect, interest can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect (appearance of character A) that suggests winning the general prize slot and the effect (character A's action) that suggests the display result of the variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied are common objects ( By being composed of the character A), it is possible to further enhance interest from the time when the game ball wins in the general winning hole until the execution of the specific effect. Winning in a general prize-winning slot unrelated to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied are suggested by the common object, thereby making it possible to relate to the appearance and action of the character. The player's interest can be heightened.

In addition, the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is a variable display game ( The display result is announced by targeting each suspended variable display game including the last variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied. Target only the variable display game (the last variable display game where the starting condition was satisfied) corresponding to the effective start winning prize that triggered the start (the effective start winning prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied). The display result may be announced in advance. Conversely, a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning that triggered the execution of the pending change effect (the effective starting winning that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was established) (finally the starting condition The variable display game other than the variable display game in which is established may be targeted, and the display result thereof may be announced.

(Character deletion processing)
Incidentally, as with the specific effects A to D, there is provided a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (suspended change effect). When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and also deletes the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least the first general winning port 50A to the third 4 Winning history of one or more times to the general winning opening 50D and winning history of one or more times to either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) are deleted (winning history in FIG. 30 reset condition).

Further, if the displayed character is erased after the predetermined display period has elapsed without the specific effect F being executed, the winning history (at least 1 or more winning history to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

FIG. 33A is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative pattern variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. FIG. When the variable display 1 is executed, at the timing of (1), the general winning openings 50A to 50
One of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the winning of the game ball in one of D.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing of (2) when one minute has passed since the appearance without occurrence of an effective starting prize. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, but with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden and is continuously displayed. there is In addition, when the effective start prize is generated within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the end of the action presentation.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B disappears at the timing of (3) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without any valid start winning. During this time, variable display 1 ends and variable display 2 starts, and variable display 2 ends and variable display 3 starts. With the end of display 2 and the start of variable display 3, character B is not hidden and is continuously displayed. In addition, when the effective start prize is generated within two minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the end of the action presentation.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C disappears after 5 minutes have passed since its appearance without the occurrence of an effective starting prize. In this example, since the effective start winning has occurred at the timing (4) before 5 minutes have elapsed since the appearance of the character C, the action effect is executed without the character becoming hidden, and the action is performed. At the timing (5) when the effect ends, the display part corresponding to one or more reserved memories changes from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, variable display 1 ends and variable display 2 starts,
Variable display 2 ends and variable display 3 starts, and variable display 3 ends and variable display 4
is started, the character C is not hidden and is continuously displayed.

In this way, once the character is displayed, it is continuously displayed until "a predetermined condition is satisfied" or "a predetermined period elapses without a predetermined condition being satisfied". ing. Then, the character is hidden at the earlier timing of "a predetermined condition is satisfied" or "a predetermined period elapses without a predetermined condition being satisfied".

[48th presentation form]
In the forty-eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning hole, and the ready-to-win state is established during the period during which the character is displayed. Based on this, lines corresponding to the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a variation pattern involving a reach state) are displayed. That is, the character display control is the same as in the 47th presentation mode, but the predetermined condition to be established within the character display period and the type of specific presentation to be executed when the predetermined condition is met are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 30, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 and the ready-to-reach state is established, as a specific effect G, the displayed character A variable result forewarning effect accompanied by dialogue display is executed. Production control CPU 120
As described above, it is possible to grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the ready-to-reach state is being executed and the remaining time of the variable display game with the ready-to-reach state reaches a predetermined timing for establishment of the ready-to-reach state, it is determined that the ready-to-reach state has been established. It is possible to execute the specific effect G if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of the change result announcement effect in the 48th effect form.

In FIG. 32(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count) is 1. At this time, in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied.
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 determines to make the character B appear at a rate of 30% based on the winning of the game ball in the first general winning hole 50A (FIG. 2).
8). In FIG. 32(b), the effect control CPU 120 displays a character 3100 (character B) holding a cane 3101 on the image display device 5 based on this determination.
It is assumed that the character B appears on the screen immediately after winning the general prize.

Then, in FIG. 32(c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decoration pattern that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "2" on the left, "1" on the right, and "3" on the middle is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 32(d), the next variable display game is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is fulfilled but the start condition is not fulfilled. is no longer present, and the display portion on the left end is in a non-display mode.

Then, it is assumed that the ready-to-reach state is established and the predetermined condition is established within two minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 32(e), "reach!" is displayed at the top of the screen when the reach state is established.
character 3050 is displayed. The effect control CPU 120 that has detected the establishment of the ready-to-win state, that is, the establishment of a predetermined condition in the state in which the character is being displayed, determines the lines of the character B. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the display result of the decorative pattern variable display game being executed is determined to be a big winning combination or a losing combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern specification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern specification command for big win or a variation pattern specification command for loss. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(f), when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game will be a big hit combination, 25% of the characters displaying the words "Chance!" It is decided to display it horizontally, and at a rate of 75%, it is decided to display the line "Geki-netsu!!" next to the character being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is to be a losing combination, it is determined to display the line "chance!" It is decided to display the line "Geki-netsu!!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of 100%.

In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line "Gekietsu!!" next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, as shown in FIG.
Enthusiasm! ! '' 3102 is executed. When the line 3102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a character 3100 (character B) holding a cane 3101 is displayed.
), and the speech 3102 uttered by the character 3100 are erased from the screen.

As a result, for the player, the character 31 that appeared based on the winning in the general winning slot
From the words of 00 (character B), it can be understood that there is a high possibility that the final stop display of the decorative symbols that will be the big win combination will be performed as a result of the ready-to-win effect.

In this way, by executing the specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) with the trigger of ``that the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed'', whether the reach state is established during the character display period. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game ball wins in the general winning hole, and to increase the interest until the specific performance is executed. In addition, with the event of winning a prize in a general prize gate that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the display result of the variable display game for which the display result has not yet been derived and displayed is announced. Amusement can be further enhanced from when the ball wins to when the specific performance is executed. again,
It is possible to draw attention to the lines of the character 3000 (character A), and to improve the interest in the character display effect.

In addition, an effect suggesting winning in the general prize slot (appearance of character B) and an effect suggesting the display result of the variable display game for which the display result is not derived and displayed (character B's dialogue) are common objects. By being composed of (character B), it is possible to further heighten the interest from when the game ball wins in the general winning hole to when the specific effect is executed. Winning in general winning slots unrelated to the progress of the variable display game and display results of the variable display game that have not been determined are suggested by the common object, thereby allowing the player to understand the character's appearance and dialogue. can arouse interest.

In the forty-eighth production form, when the ready-to-win state is established, that is, when the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes a predetermined mode, the character executes a specific production G in which the character utters a predetermined line. However, the specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative design is executed regardless of the mode of variable display of the decorative design.
Further, for example, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, a predetermined notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed. , the specific effect G may be executed.

In addition, in the forty-eighth presentation mode, an example was described in which characters are displayed based on the winning of game balls into the general winning openings, regardless of the mode of variable display of decorative patterns. The character may be displayed under the condition that the variable display of the decoration pattern executed when the game ball wins the general winning slot becomes a predetermined mode, for example, the game ball wins the general winning slot. The character may be displayed under the condition that the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed when the game is executed is in the ready-to-win state (that the variable display game of the ready-to-win fluctuation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion processing)
As with the specific effects A to D and the specific effects F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (fluctuation result announcement effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen and
The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to (at least including the winning history of one or more times to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30) .

In addition, if the displayed character is erased after a predetermined display period elapses without the specific effect G being executed, the winning history (at least 1 or more winning history to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

FIG. 33(B) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (fluctuation result announcement effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative pattern variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4, and the ready-to-win effect is executed only in the variable display 4 among these, in the ready-to-win state. shall be established. When the variable display 1 is executed, at the timing of (11), the general winning opening 50A
One of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any one of 50D.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing of (12) when one minute has passed since the appearance without the ready-to-reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden and is continuously displayed. If the ready-to-reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the dialogue display effect ends.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is hidden at the timing of (13) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without the ready-to-reach state being established. During this time, when the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, and when the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, the character B continues to be displayed instead of being hidden. It should be noted that if the ready-to-reach state is established within two minutes from the appearance of character B, character B is hidden after the dialogue display effect ends.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C disappears after 5 minutes have passed since its appearance without the ready-to-reach state being established. In this example, since the ready-to-reach state is established at the timing (14) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C, the dialogue display effect is executed without hiding the character. During this time, the end of variable display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and
At the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden and is continuously displayed.

[Forty-ninth production form]
In the above-described 47th presentation mode and 48th presentation mode, the specific presentation is executed as long as the predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character among the characters A to C is displayed. However, only when a character of a specific type is displayed, a specific effect of a corresponding type may be executed.

For example, in the forty-ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 30, a specific effect F (suspended change effect) is executed based on the occurrence of an effective start winning during the period in which either character A or B is displayed. Thus, even if an effective start winning occurs during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is not executed. Further, a specific effect G (fluctuation result forewarning effect) is executed based on the fact that the ready-to-reach state is established during the period in which the character C is displayed. Even if the ready-to-win state is established within the period, the specific performance G (fluctuation result announcement performance) is not executed.

Thus, according to the type of character to be displayed, that is, the notification mode for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, a predetermined condition for making the specific effect executable, and the condition of the predetermined condition. Different types of specific effects may be executed based on establishment.

Although the predetermined conditions for enabling execution of the specific effect are common regardless of the type of character to be displayed, a specific effect to be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied depends on the type of character to be displayed. The types of presentation may be different. For example, when a valid start winning occurs during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, a specific effect F (suspended change effect)
is executed (specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) is not executed), but if an effective start winning occurs during the period in which character C is displayed, specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed. It may be executed (the specific effect F (suspended change effect) is not executed).

In addition, although the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect differs depending on the type of character to be displayed, it is executed when the predetermined condition corresponding to each is established regardless of the type of character to be displayed. The type of the specific effect to be displayed may be common. For example, if a valid start winning occurs during the period in which character A or B is displayed, a specific effect F (
hold change effect) is executed (even if the ready-to-reach state is established during that period, the specific effect F is not executed), but even if the ready-to-reach state is established during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect is executed. Effect F (suspended change effect) may be executed (specific effect F may not be executed even if effective start winning occurs during that period).

Also, during the period in which the character is displayed, (1) when the effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established, a specific effect F (suspended change effect) in which the character being displayed performs an action is performed. After the character is executed, the character is erased, and (2) if the ready-to-reach state is established before the effective start winning, the character is removed after executing a specific effect G (fluctuation result notice effect) in which the character being displayed emits a line. It may be deleted. In this way, it is possible that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition that is satisfied first among the plurality of predetermined conditions is selected. A specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

Also, during the period in which the character is displayed, (1) when the effective start winning occurs before the establishment of the ready-to-win state, a specific effect F (suspended change effect) in which the character being displayed performs an action is performed. After execution, the character is erased, and (2) even if the ready-to-win state is established before the effective start winning, the character is erased after executing a specific effect F (suspended change effect) in which the character being displayed performs an action. You can make it work. In this way, it is made possible that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and when any one of the predetermined conditions is satisfied, a specific effect is performed. You can make it run.

[Modified Examples of 47th Rendering Form to 49th Rendering Form]
In the example of FIG. 29, when a predetermined condition is established within a predetermined specific period after the character is displayed and a specific effect is executed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period. However, it is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may continue to be displayed until the specific period ends even after the specific effect is executed. good.

In such a form, the specific effect may be executed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period in which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on the winning in the general winning slot, the 5 minutes during which the character C is displayed
The character C may be continuously displayed without disappearing from the screen even if the effective starting prize is generated, and the specific performance F (suspension change performance) may be executed every time the effective start winning is generated for 5 minutes. .

In the example of FIG. 29, the character display period is a predetermined fixed period (1 minute, 2 minutes,
5 minutes) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character display period may be, for example, a period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times, and the character is displayed. It may be a period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed ends, or until the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state) when the character is displayed ends. period.

Further, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

Also, the character display period may be determined prior to determining the type of character to be displayed, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, the effect control CPU 120 determines which period of the character display period is 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. , if character B is selected at a rate of 70%, character A is selected at a rate of 15%, character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, the character C is 70
%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined according to which general winning hole the game ball has won, or according to the game state.

In addition, the predetermined conditions to be established in order to be able to execute the specific effect are not limited to the establishment of the above-mentioned effective start winning prize and reach state, the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the jackpot game state of a predetermined type (
For example, the occurrence of a variable probability jackpot or a jackpot with the largest number of rounds), the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaching a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot game states (continuous number =
After the end of the jackpot game state, the number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state + 1) reaches a predetermined number of times, the end of the jackpot game state, and the predetermined game state (for example, variable probability state). a predetermined number of consecutive variable display games in which the display result is a losing combination; a predetermined number of consecutive variable display games with a variation pattern of “no reach” (“no reach”); Any other condition such as reaching the number, that is, a condition that is satisfied during the game may be used. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period in which the variable display of the special symbols is executed, but the variable display of the special symbols (effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols) is executed during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled. It may be performed during a period when it is not performed.

In the forty-seventh presentation mode and the forty-ninth presentation mode, an example is shown in which the notice presentation for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met is the pending change presentation. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 9(b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot pending, an effect with only sound is executed, or an effect with sound and movable accessory 1000 is executed. It may be a look-ahead forewarning effect in which the ratio of whether or not to play is different, or may be a chance forewarning effect as shown in the 50th and 51st performance modes, which will be described later. Also, a countdown notice effect may be used in which the player is notified of the number of remaining variable displays until the target variable display of the prefetch notice.

In the forty-seventh presentation mode and the forty-ninth presentation mode, after the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, the displayed character is displayed in the state of the pending information by the occurrence of the effective start winning. Although an example of executing a pending change effect that changes is shown, it is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, a start winning judgment corresponding to each variable display game being held Check the result designation command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result designation command, and if there is a variable display game where the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate is higher than if it does not exist. A character may be made to appear. Also, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the appearance rate of a specific character may be higher than when there is no such variable display game. Also, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big win or a variable display game with a reach state. Then, when an effective start prize is generated after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is established), it is preferable to execute a suspension change performance in which the displayed character changes the mode of the suspension information.

In the forty-seventh to forty-ninth performance modes, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the displayed character is erased, and during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled, the game ball is inserted into the general winning opening. It is also possible to prevent the execution of the specific effect by preventing the appearance of a new character even if the player wins the prize. As a result, the player's attention is focused on various performances (for example, fanfare performance, round performance, ending performance, etc.) executed in conjunction with the control to the jackpot game state so as not to interfere with these various performances. be able to.

In the forty-seventh to forty-ninth presentation modes, a specific presentation is always executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period.
Even when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. For example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period of character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period of character B, the specific effect is performed at a rate of 50%. is executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, a specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%. The execution ratio may be made different.

Here, in the 47th performance mode to the 49th performance mode, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning port while a character is displayed, a new character based on the winning in the general winning port is not displayed. Instead, the characters that have already been displayed are to be displayed continuously.
That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of character display and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. and the character is displayed based on the determination.

In addition, not limited to such a form, if a character is displayed when a game ball wins a prize in a general prize opening, instead of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed (
Characters that have already been displayed may be erased), and characters based on subsequent general winnings may be displayed.

Also, comparing the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed and the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is longer. If it is longer, it will continue to be displayed, and the character based on the later general prize will not be displayed. If the display period of the character based on the later general prize is longer, the character based on the previous general prize will be The character that was displayed may be erased), and the character based on the general winning may be displayed later.

In this form, when the character based on the later general prize is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (the character that was already displayed is deleted), the display period of the character based on the later general prize In addition, the remaining display period of the character already displayed based on the previous general winning may be added (the period obtained by adding the two may be used as the display period of the character to be newly displayed).

In addition, in the 47th performance mode to the 49th performance mode, if a game ball wins a prize in a general prize-winning slot within the character display period, a new character is not displayed based on the winning in the general prize-winning slot. , the remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed may be extended. The extended period (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be the display period determined for the characters already displayed (for example, one minute if character A is displayed). Also, when a prize is won in the general prize pool during the character display period, one of the characters is determined according to the ratio shown in FIG. display duration (characters that are not displayed)
For example, 2 minutes for character B) may be added to the remaining display period of the character already displayed.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, if a character is displayed when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without erasing the character that has already been displayed) is displayed later. The characters based on the general winnings may also be displayed together.
For example, if a game ball wins a prize in the general prize-winning slot while character A is being displayed and it is determined that character B is to be newly displayed, a new character is added to character A that has already been displayed. B may also be displayed on the image display device 5 .

In such a form, during the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize,
A period obtained by adding the character display period based on the subsequent general winning may be used as a common display period for both characters. In this case, if a predetermined condition is established before the common display period elapses, a specific effect is executed and either one character or both characters are erased. Also, when the common display period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied, both characters are erased.

Also, in a state in which both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 5, the first predetermined condition (for example, valid When the start win) is established and a first specific effect (for example, a specific effect F (suspended change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is erased and only the second character is displayed. Then, a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is established, and a second specific effect (for example, specific effect G (variation result The second character may also be erased when the advance notice effect)) is executed. Here, the first character and the second character may be characters of the same type.

In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be a common condition (for example, the occurrence of an effective start winning prize). In that case, both the first character and the second character In the state displayed on the image display device 5, a first specific effect by the first character and a second specific effect by the second character based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, occurrence of valid start winning only once) Both effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

Also, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, specific effect F (suspended change effect)). 5, when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the first character (for example, effective start winning) is established, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (suspended change effect)) is executed, One character is erased and only the second character is displayed. Next, when a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, the same type of specific effect (specific effect F ( A pending change effect)) may be executed to erase the second character.

In addition, as in the forty-ninth production mode, if the first character (character A or B) is displayed, the first specific production (specific production F) can be executed, and a second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in accordance with the establishment of the second condition (establishment of reach state) during the period when the second character (character C) is displayed. form, only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed at the same time). Here, when the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is higher when the second specific effect is executed than when the first specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character. It shall be displayed with priority over characters. For example, when it is decided to display the second character based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning slot while the first character is displayed, the first character is erased and the second character is displayed. shall be newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, it is assumed that the control for displaying the first character instead is not performed.

On the other hand, when the configuration is such that the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the establishment of the first condition, and the second character is displayed.
It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of the condition. However, if both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects for the same variable display game and their execution periods overlap (for example, both are variable result announcement effects for the same variable display game and reach In the case where it is executed immediately after establishment of the state), the second specific performance is executed with priority over the first specific performance, and the first specific performance is not executed at this time.

[Fifty production form]
In the fiftieth effect mode shown in FIG. 34, every time a game ball wins in the general winning hole, a button icon 4000 is newly displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 35, etc.), and the displayed button icon 4000 The types of specific effects that can be executed differ according to the number of .
Here, all of the specific effects in this mode of effect prompt the player to perform some kind of operation, and are effects capable of giving advance notice of the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's motion. As the specific effects, there are provided three types of cut-in advance notice effects (specific effects H), pseudo continuous advance notice effects (specific effects I), and chance eye advance notice effects (specific effects J).

The display information conditions in FIG. 34 are the button icons 40 necessary for executing each specific effect
If the display number is 00 and at least the number of button icons 4000 indicated in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific effect is not executed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and the chance notice effect is not executed. It is not executed unless three or more button icons 4000 are displayed.

The button icon 4000 displayed on the image display device 5 is incremented by 1 each time a game ball wins in the general winning hole, and up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 5. Assume that there is Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 4000 required for execution of the specific effect is determined from the number of button icons 4000 displayed before the specific effect is executed.
The number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the display number of 00 is displayed on the image display device 5 after execution of the specific effect. For example, when five button icons 4000 are displayed, (1) cut-in notice effects (required number of button icons to be displayed=1) are executed. The display number of 4000 is 4, and (
2) When the pseudo consecutive notice effect (required number of button icons to be displayed = 2) is executed, the number of button icons 4000 displayed after the pseudo consecutive notice effect is executed becomes 3, and (3) Chance notice effect ( When the required number of button icons to be displayed=3) is executed, the number of displayed button icons 4000 after execution of the chance notice effect becomes two.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is a effect for notifying the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern by the content of characters displayed on the screen after establishment of the ready-to-win state. As shown in FIG. 34, the cut-in notice effect is performed when (1) one or more button icons 4000 are displayed and (2) a variable display game is executed in a variable pattern involving a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined repeated hitting operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined repeated hitting operation, thereby enabling execution.

Note that when the variable display game is executed with the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win state in a state in which none of the button icons 4000 are displayed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice is not given. No performance is performed. Further, in a variable display game with a variable pattern that does not involve a ready-to-win state, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

In addition, in the cut-in notice effect, the ready-to-win state is established during the period in which the variable display game is being executed, and after that the player operates the operation button 30 multiple times, so the ready-to-win effect is executed. It is conditioned on execution of a variable display game according to a variation pattern that is displayed. A specific aspect of the cut-in announcement effect will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 35(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count) is 1. At this time, in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied.
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the first button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 35B, the screen is updated from a state in which no button icons 4000 are displayed to a state in which one button icon 4000 is displayed. In addition, when a total of one or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, the characters 4000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied".
is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion condition is (1) a state in which one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a variable pattern involving a reach state is executed.

Then, in FIG. 35(c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decoration pattern that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "4" on the left, "2" on the right, and "8" on the middle is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach state based on establishment of the conditions for starting the next variable display game. Confirmation is made based on the variation pattern designation command received from 100 . Then, when the variable display game to be started has the reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 35(d), the next variable display game is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is fulfilled but the start condition is not fulfilled. is no longer present, and the display portion on the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG.
As shown in e), when the ready-to-win state is established, an effect of displaying characters 4080 of "ready-to-win!" is executed. Then, based on the establishment of the operation suggesting condition, as shown in FIG. 35(f), the characters "Continue hitting!" Repeated-hit suggestion information 4100 composed of an image and a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is effective is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 30 should be performed continuously.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 erases one button icon 4000 required for executing the cut-in advance notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 as the repeated hitting suggestion information 4100 is displayed. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and the characters 400 of "Cut-in" are displayed as there is no executable specific effect.
Clear 0a from the screen.

It is assumed that the player who has recognized the repeated hitting suggestion information 4100 continuously presses the operation button 30 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time after displaying the repeated hitting suggestion information 4100 . 5 when the time bar is displayed
It is assumed that there are five stages among the stages, and that the number decreases by one every time one second elapses from the display. The effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 35(g), operates the operation button 30 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 out of 5 steps (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operations are performed, a cut-in mode is determined, and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, when the continuous hit suggestion condition is satisfied,
), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed is the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination, the characters "chance!" heat!
! , and if the display result of the variable display game to be executed is the final stop symbol for the losing combination, the characters "Chance!"
It is decided to display the characters "Hot!!"

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in advance notice effect for displaying a screen including the determined characters on the image display device 5. - 特許庁In the example of FIG. 35(i), the characters 42 of "Enjou!!"
00 is displayed in large size on the entire screen.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 is within a predetermined period (
If the operation button 30 is not operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within 5 seconds), neither the characters "chance!"

(Pseudo consecutive notice production)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is a re-variation that scrolls the temporarily stopped decorative pattern again in the vertical direction in one variable display game, as if it were repeated multiple times. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of decorative patterns is continuously executed. In the case of re-fluctuation, in accordance with the player's operation to stop each symbol, a pseudo consecutive symbol (constituted by the characters "NEXT" in this example) is displayed as a decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. shall be temporarily suspended.

As shown in FIG. 34, the pseudo-repeated advance notice effect is executed by (1) displaying two or more button icons 4000 and (2) performing a variable display game with a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds or longer. In this case, it is notified to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can perform the predetermined symbol stop operation.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive notice effect, the player operates the operation button 30 three times (each symbol stop operation is performed three times) during the period in which one variable display game is executed. The condition is that a variable display game with a variation pattern requiring a certain operation time and a variation time of at least a certain period of time (eight seconds in this example) is executed. A specific aspect of the pseudo consecutive notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG.

In FIG. 36(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count) is 1. At this time, in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied.
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

In addition, one button icon 4000 is displayed at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general prize winning port 50A to the fourth general prize winning port 50D. Characters 400 of "Cut-in" indicating that the in-notice effect can be executed
0a is displayed.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the game ball winning in any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 36(b), the screen is updated from the state in which one button icon 4000 is displayed to the state in which two button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, when a total of two or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, the characters 400 of "pseudo-continuous" indicating that "the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied".
0b is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion conditions are (1) a state in which two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game being executed in a variation pattern with a variation time of eight seconds or longer. be.

Then, in FIG. 36(c), after the second button icon 4000 is displayed, it is assumed that the variable display of the decoration pattern that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "5" on the left, "1" on the right, and "7" on the middle is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the game control microcomputer 100 whether or not the variation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the conditions for starting the next variable display game. Check based on the variation pattern specification command. Then, when the variable display game to be started has a variation time of 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect has been established.

When the operation suggesting condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. decides to temporarily stop (execute re-fluctuation) the pseudo-continuous symbols with a probability of 15%, and decides not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols (do not execute the re-fluctuation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach state, it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols (re-variation) with a probability of 100%.

When it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbols in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in response to each symbol stop operation of the player, and , while determining the decorative design to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative design display area 5R,
It is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C.

As described above, when the production control CPU 120 receives the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, it selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command, and the variable display result A fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is determined according to the notification command. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in accordance with the player's respective symbol stop operation are confirmed. It may be different from or the same as the "left" and "right" decoration symbols constituting the decoration symbol (final stop symbol).

When it is determined not to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the effect control CPU 120
In response to each symbol stop operation of the player, the determined decorative symbol ( It is decided to stop swinging the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols constituting the final stop symbol). In other words, when the re-fluctuation is not performed, it is decided to stop swinging the fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

In this way, when the presence or absence of re-variation and the temporary stop pattern in the case of performing re-variation are determined, FIG.
As shown in 6(e), the next variable display game is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, and along with this, there is a variable display game in which the start condition is fulfilled but the start condition is not fulfilled. It disappears, and the display part on the left end is in a non-display mode. Along with the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the characters "Press!" Operation suggestion information 4 composed of simulated images
050 is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative design in the "left" decorative design display area 5L.

In addition, when the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the two button icons 4000 required for execution of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 . As a result, the number of button icons 4000 to be displayed becomes 0, and there is no specific effect that can be executed.
And the characters 4000b of "pseudo-run" are erased from the screen.

When the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the "left" decoration symbol display area 5L presses the operation button 30, the "left" decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern ("1" in this example) is stopped from swinging in the pattern display area 5L. The swinging stop is a state in which the ornamental pattern is not scrolled in the vertical direction, but is swinging without stopping completely (the final stop is not displayed). Here, if it is decided to stop the pseudo continuous symbols, the decoration symbol to be swing-stopped is the “left” decoration symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of temporarily stopped symbols. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbols, it is the "left" decoration symbol that constitutes the combination of the predetermined determined decoration symbols (final stop symbols).

When the "left" decorative pattern is stopped from swinging, then the effect control CPU 120 executes a process as shown in FIG. 36 (
As shown in g), the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative design in the "right" decorative design display area 5R.

When the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the "right" decoration symbol display area 5R presses the operation button 30, the "right" decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern ("2" in this example) is stopped from swinging in the pattern display area 5R. Here, the decoration symbol to be swing-stopped is the “right” decoration symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it has been decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbols, it is the "right" decoration design that constitutes the combination of the predetermined determined decoration designs (final stop design).

When the "right" decorative pattern is stopped from swinging, then the effect control CPU 120 executes a process as shown in FIG. 36 (
As shown in h), operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the "middle" decorative design display area 5C. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative design in the "middle" decorative design display area 5C.

It is assumed that the player who has recognized the operation suggesting information 4050 displayed in the “middle” decoration symbol display area 5C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30 .

At this time, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols based on the table of FIG. The pseudo-continuous pattern composed of the characters "NEXT" is stopped from swinging in the ornamental pattern display area 5C. As a result, the predetermined combination of "left", "middle", and "right" temporary stop symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 37(j), after a temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative patterns change (for example, The vertical scrolling display) is restarted and re-fluctuation is performed. After re-fluctuation, "
A combination of fixed decorative patterns (final stop patterns) is displayed in the final stop display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of left, middle, and right, and the display result of the variable display game of decorative patterns is confirmed. will do.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the table of FIG. The "middle" decoration design that constitutes the combination of the predetermined decoration design (final stop design) in the decoration design display area 5C is swung and stopped. As a result, the predetermined "left" and "right"
The combination of the "middle" fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is rock-stopped. and,
As shown in FIG. 37(l), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R determine the decoration design (final stop design). is displayed as the final stop, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols even when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 4050. In this case, the combination of temporarily stopped symbols decided in advance is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-fluctuation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols is automatically temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-fluctuation is executed even if no operation is performed. and

In this example, when two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or longer, the operation suggestion condition is satisfied. The operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern accompanies the ready-to-reach state (that is, regardless of the effect mode of the specified variation pattern), but the present invention is not limited to such a form, The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and that the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern involving a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggesting condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the ready-to-win state is a big hit, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is a loss. It's good to be

In addition, if the presence or absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is set in advance for each variation pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 100 side, that is, by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 In a case where it is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect control CPU 120 displays the button icon 40
Receives a variation pattern specification command in which two or more 00 are displayed and is specified to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols (executes a variable display game with a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous notice effect); may be used as an operation suggesting condition, and as in the above-described example, two or more button icons 4000 are displayed regardless of the specified variation pattern, and the variable display game is executed for a variation time equal to or longer than a predetermined time. It is good also as operation suggestion conditions that it is carried out.

(Chance eye notice production)
The chance notice effect provided as the specific effect J is a display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the look-ahead notice, and is different from the display result of the decoration pattern that is the big hit combination. The display result of the variable display game, which is the target of the advance notice, is announced to the player by displaying the chance number, which is the display result, in the final stop.

In this example, the same odd-numbered decorative symbols are finally displayed in the "left" and "middle" decorative design display areas 5L and 5C, and the "right" decorative design display area 5R displays the "left" By finally stopping and displaying an even-numbered decorative pattern that is one larger than the odd-numbered decorative pattern displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C, "left", "middle", and "right"
It is assumed that the combination of decorative patterns is completed.

That is, in this example, the combinations of "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbols that are chances are any of "112", "334", "556" and "778". In response to the player's all-symbols stop operation, it is possible to finally stop and display the combination of decoration symbols that will be the chance.

As shown in FIG. 34, the chance notice effect is (1) three or more button icons 4000
is displayed, (2) when a variable display game involving a reach state is suspended and none of the variable display games executed prior to the variable display game involve a reach state; , the player is notified to perform a predetermined all-symbols stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all-symbols stop operation.

In addition, in the chance notice effect, when the player operates the operation button 30 only once in one variable display game, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" decoration patterns oscillates. be stopped. That is, unlike the simulated consecutive notice effect in which each pattern stop operation is required three times to stop the swinging of the respective “left”, “right”, and “middle” decoration patterns in one variable display game, Only one operation (all symbols stop operation) is required in one variable display game. A specific aspect of the chance eye announcement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

In FIG. 38(a), variation of decorative patterns (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and reserved storage is performed. number(
Assume that the total number of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count) is 3. At this time, in the starting prize memory display area 5H, the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied 3
It is assumed that each display part (the left end, the second from the left, and the third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the starting winning prize change pattern determination result designation command stored in the starting winning prize command storage area for the first special figure, and the starting winning prize command storage area for the second special figure Confirm the command for specifying the determination result of the variation pattern judgment result at the time of start winning, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (leftmost display part) in which the start condition is satisfied first among the 3 variable display games that are on hold. is the non-reach variation pattern, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) in which the start condition is met second is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is met third. It is assumed that the player knows that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the third display part from the left) is the reach variation pattern.

In addition, the game ball is multiple times (at least 2
Two button icons 4000 are displayed on the left end of the screen based on the winning (at least once), and "Cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is established". characters 4000a and characters 4000b of "pseudo-continuous" indicating that "the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" are displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 causes the third button icon 4000 to be displayed on the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 38(b), from the state where two button icons 4000 are displayed,
The screen has been updated to display three button icons 4000 . In addition, as a total of three or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, characters 400 of "chance" indicating that "after a predetermined operation suggesting condition is established, the chance prediction effect can be executed".
0c is displayed. Here, the predetermined operation suggestion conditions are (1) a state in which three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is suspended, and the variable display game None of the variable display games that are run before .

Then, in FIG. 38(c), after the third button icon 4000 is displayed, it is assumed that the variable display of the decoration pattern that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of "5" on the left, "9" in the middle, and "6" in the middle is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern of the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied is a non-reach variation pattern that does not involve the ready-to-win state, based on the establishment of the start condition for the next variable display game. Of the two pending variable display games, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (leftmost display portion) in which the start condition is satisfied first is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) is the reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the second chance advance notice effect has been established.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display game (including the variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied) to be executed before the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern. variable display game), it is determined to request the player to perform an all-symbols stop operation after the variable display is started. In addition, whether the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a big hit combination or a losing combination is determined by a determination result designation command at the time of starting winning or a variation pattern at the time of starting winning corresponding to the variable display game. Check based on the judgment result specification command.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38(d), when the display result of the variable display game with the pending reach variation pattern is a big winning combination, all symbols of the player are displayed in the variable display game in which the start condition is met. In response to the stop operation, the chance eye is stopped at a rate of 75%, and 25%
is determined to stop non-chance numbers (losing combinations other than chance numbers), and when the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a losing combination, the start condition is established. In the variable display game, according to the player's operation to stop all symbols,
25% of the time, it decides to stop chance eyes, and 75% of the time, it decides to stop non-chance eyes.

When it is decided to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120, according to the player's all-symbol stop operation, constitutes the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5L. and 5C, and even-numbered decorative patterns to stop swinging in the "right" decorative design display area 5R.

When it is determined not to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the player's all-symbols stop operation, the "left" decorative design display area 5L and the "middle" decorative design display area 5C. , and, in the "right" decorative design display area 5R, the decorative patterns that constitute the final decorative design (final stop design) that is not a chance eye are swung according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Decide to stop. In other words, it is determined to stop swinging the fixed decoration symbol (final stop symbol) which is a non-chance eye according to the player's all-symbol stop operation.

When the presence or absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbols for the chance eye stop are determined in this way, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. 38(e). As a result, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is in the non-display mode. Along with the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, as shown in FIG. 38(f), characters 4200 reading "Stop all patterns!" arrow, and
Operation suggestion information 4050 composed of an image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decoration symbols in all the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. do. note that,
In the chance notice effect, unlike the above-described pseudo continuous notice effect, by operating the operation button 30 only once, all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5
The decoration pattern is stopped at R.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, along with the display of the characters 4200 and the operation suggestion information 4050 of "Stop all symbols!" Delete the icon 4000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and as there is no executable specific effect, the characters 4000a of "cut-in", the characters 4000b of "pseudo-continuation", and the character 4000b of "chance" 4000c is erased from the screen.

Next, the player who has recognized the characters 4200 of “Stop all symbols!” and the operation suggestion information 4050 presses the operation button 30 .

At this time, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to stop the non-chance eye based on the table of FIG. 38(d), as shown in FIG. "
A combination of fixed decorative patterns (final stop patterns) that do not constitute a chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is swung in the middle, right, and right decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 38(h), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative patterns (final stop symbol) is displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, a non-reach-losing combination of left "4", middle "9", and right "7" is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative symbols of the non-chance eye.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the character 4200 and the operation suggestion information 4050 of "Stop all symbols!" If it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to the all pattern stop operation, according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become the chance eye combination shall stop swinging.

Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the player is requested to stop all symbols for the next variable display game as well. Even when the game is established, it is determined whether or not to stop chance eyes in the same manner as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 39(i), when the display result of the variable display game with the pending reach variation pattern is a big winning combination, all symbols of the player are displayed in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. In response to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eyes at a rate of 75% and to stop the non-chance eyes at a rate of 25%, and the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a losing combination. In this case, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% and stop the chance eye at a rate of 75% in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols. decide to stop

Furthermore, as in the previous variable display game, the effect control CPU 120, when it is determined to stop the chance eye or when it is determined to stop the non-chance eye, the player's all symbol stop operation A combination of ornamental patterns to stop swinging is determined.

When the presence or absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for the chance eye stop are determined in this way, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition as shown in FIG. 39(j). , Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met, and the second display part from the left is in the non-display mode. Along with the start of the variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 39(k), characters 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" and operation suggestion information 4050 are displayed in the center of the screen. This allows the player to move between "left" and "middle".
, and recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decoration symbols in all the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the "right" side.

Next, the player who has recognized the characters 4200 of “Stop all symbols!” and the operation suggestion information 4050 presses the operation button 30 .

At this time, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to stop the chance eye based on the table of FIG. The combination of decoration patterns forming the determined chance eye is stopped from swinging in the middle, right, and right decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 39(m), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative patterns (final stop symbol) is displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, the left is "1" as a chance decorative pattern,
A combination of "1" in the middle and "2" in the right is derived and displayed as a non-reach-losing combination.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the character 4200 and the operation suggestion information 4050 of "Stop all symbols!" Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye in response to the all pattern stop operation, the final stop symbol (final stop The combination of symbols) shall stop swinging.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines to request the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern which is the target of the chance prediction effect. Therefore, when the condition for starting the next variable display game is established, whether or not to stop the second chance is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 39(n), the next variable display game is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is fulfilled but the start condition is not fulfilled. is no longer present, and the display portion on the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG.
As shown in o), when the ready-to-win state is established, an effect of displaying characters 4080 of "ready-to-win!" is executed.

In the fiftieth effect mode described above, the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo consecutive notice effect, and the chance notice effect are all in the state after the game ball has entered the general winning hole, that is, when the button icon 4000 is displayed. In the displayed state, it can be executed with the player's operation corresponding to each notice effect as a trigger. Thus, by providing the specific performance executed on the condition of the player's operation after the game ball enters the general winning hole, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning hole.

In addition, every time a game ball wins a prize in a general winning slot, a button icon 4000 displayed on the screen
increases, the player can recognize that the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening.

In addition, when the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in notice effect is established in a state where one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, a notification is given to prompt a continuous hitting operation as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 4000 are displayed. When the conditions for suggesting the operation of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect are established in the state where the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is performed, a notice is given to prompt the stop operation of each symbol as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect. When the conditions suggesting the operation of the advance notice effect are satisfied, the operation corresponding to the chance notice effect is notified to prompt the all-symbol stop operation, so that the specific effect can be executed by what kind of operation the player performs. It is possible to grasp whether

Further, according to the number of displayed button icons 4000, when the displayed number is 1 or more, the characters 4000a of "cut in" are displayed, and when the number of displayed buttons is 2 or more, the characters 4000 of "pseudo continuous" are displayed.
0b is displayed, and when the display number is 3 or more, the character 4000c of "chance eye" is displayed, so that the player can select the type of specific effect that can be executed according to the number of displayed button icons 4000. can grasp. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of winnings of game balls into the general winning opening.

It should be noted that, together with the type of specific effect that can be executed, an operation required for executing the specific effect may be notified. For example, according to the number of displayed button icons 4000, when the number of displayed buttons is 1 or more, the characters ``continuous hit'' are displayed next to the characters 4000a of ``cut in'', and when the number of displayed buttons 4000 is 2 or more, the characters ``pseudo consecutive'' are displayed. "Each design stop" beside character 4000b
is displayed, and when the displayed number is 3 or more, "
By displaying the characters "Stop all symbols", the player can grasp the operation required according to the type of the specific effect that can be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, there is a case where operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of a plurality of types of specific effects are satisfied at the same time. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the conditions for starting the variable display game are met, the variation pattern is a variation pattern that accompanies a reach state, and the variation pattern has a variation time of 8. In some cases, the time may be longer than a second, and in this case, a notification (display of repeated hit suggestion information 4100) prompting a continuous hit operation for executing a cut-in notice effect, and prompting each symbol stop operation for executing a pseudo continuous notice effect. The problem is which of the notifications (display of the operation suggestion information 4050 in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) should be performed. In this embodiment, the one with the larger number of button icons 4000 required for execution of the specific effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect (requires two or more button icons 4000) is the notification prompting the continuous hitting operation for executing the cut-in notice effect (requires one or more button icons 4000). shall take precedence over

Further, in a state where three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the condition for starting the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is established, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or longer, and , The variable display game that is on hold may be a reach variation pattern, and in this case, a notification (
Display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R) and notification prompting all pattern stop operation for execution of chance notice effect (character "Stop all patterns!" in each variable display game 4200 and display of operation suggestion information 4050) is to be performed. In this case, the notification prompting the all-symbols stop operation for executing the chance notice effect (requires three or more button icons 4000) is the notification prompting the symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo consecutive notice effect (button icon 4000 must be 2 or more).

Further, in this embodiment, the number of button icons 4000 displayed is the number of button icons 4000 required for execution of the specific effect (1 for cut-in advance notice effect, 2 for pseudo consecutive notice effect, chance If it is more than 3), the number of button icons 4000 required for execution of the specific effect is determined from the number of button icons 4000 initially displayed.
minus the number of button icons 4000 are to be displayed continuously even after execution of the specific effect.

For example, when four or more button icons 4000 are displayed, if the chance forewarning effect is executed, one button icon 4000 remains to be displayed even after the chances forewarning effect is executed. The characters 4000a of "cut in" remain displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in announcement effect is established, and the notification prompting the continuous hitting operation is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is satisfied (button icon 4000
and confirming the variation pattern of the variable display game), but not limited to this form, when the variable display game is being executed, the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect It may be determined whether or not is established. For example, CP for production control
At the timing when the reach state is established, the U120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 4000 are displayed.
100 may be displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether two or more button icons 4000 are displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivation display of the display result) reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). If it is determined whether or not, and if it is displayed, the operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the effective start winning a prize has occurred,
Variable display games with reach status (including variable display games corresponding to the effective start winning)
is suspended and none of the variable display games executed prior to the variable display game involve the reach state, determining whether or not three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, If displayed, the characters 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of displayed button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the conditions for starting the next variable display game to be satisfied), a predetermined number of buttons are displayed. A notification that an operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed has the ready-to-win variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening. In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the repeated hit suggestion information 4100 for performing repeated hits may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the number of button icons 4000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, determines the remaining time until the end of the variable display game being executed (derivation display of the display result). It is determined whether or not the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining), and if it is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivation display of the display result) is a predetermined time (for example, At the timing of remaining 10 seconds), operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the button icon 4000 to 3 based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening.
At the above timing, the variable display game with the ready-to-win state (including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) is suspended and the variable display game is executed before the variable display game. is not accompanied by a reach state,
When a variable display game involving a reach state is suspended and none of the variable display games executed before the variable display game involve a reach state, in the variable display game being executed , "Stop all symbols!"
4200 and operation suggestion information 4050 may be displayed. That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of displayed button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the conditions for starting the variable display game to be executed next to be satisfied),
A notification to the effect that a predetermined operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

In addition, in the fiftieth effect form, the operation suggestion conditions for notifying to perform predetermined operations (continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) are all conditions related to the variable display game (display mode, variable time), and a specific effect is executed during execution of the variable display game due to the execution of a predetermined operation. It may be a condition related to the game state (for example, whether it is controlled to the jackpot game state, whether the jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot, whether the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number, etc.). A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the game state. For example, when the number of displayed button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number within a period during which the jackpot game state is controlled, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. Sometimes, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the big win game state is a variable probability big win, or whether or not the number of rounds in the big win game state is greater than a predetermined number. In addition, during the period in which the game state is controlled to the variable probability state (however, the variable probability state is set to an effect mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize), the button icon 4
When the number of 000 displayed reaches a predetermined number, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the game state is a variable probability state. may be executed.

Further, in the fiftieth effect mode, even when the number of displayed button icons 4000 is 1, a notification prompting a repeated hit operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed in response to the repeated hit operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the button icon 40
If the number of 00 displayed is not a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), a notification prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, any operation of continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operation is not performed), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, none of the specific effects of the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo consecutive notice effect, and the chance notice effect are not executed).

(Example of one-shot notification)
In addition, in the fiftieth effect mode, in order to stop the temporary stop symbols in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the operation is performed three times for each area. ) in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the operation may be performed three times for each area. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, and the operation button 30 is displayed. The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is rocked and stopped according to the operation of , then the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, and the final stop is performed according to the operation of the operation button 30. The swinging of the right pattern constituting the pattern is stopped, and finally, operation suggestion information 405 is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C.
0 may be displayed, and the medium symbols forming the final stop symbol may be caused to swing and stop according to the operation of the operation button 30. - 特許庁In such a configuration, when the combination of the jackpot symbols becomes the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5R, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R, 5L, 5R and 5L By sequentially stopping the same decorative symbols at 5C, the player's expectation for the operation can be heightened.

In addition, in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” pattern display areas, a combination of special decoration patterns that is different from the combination of normal decoration patterns (for example, images of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”) By stopping, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and furthermore, depending on the player's predetermined operation, the display result of the variable display game will be a big win or a loss (or a variable probability big win). It is also possible to execute a specific effect that notifies whether the game will be a hit or a non-probable variable jackpot, etc.).
For example, in the “left” and “right” pattern display areas, the special decoration patterns, which are images imitating the operation buttons 30, are stopped (or normal decoration patterns are displayed in the “left” and “right” pattern display areas). The pattern is stopped), and the image of the character "Continuous hit!" is stopped in the "middle" pattern display area. Then, when the player recognizes the image of the characters "Continuous hits!" ”) may be displayed.

In addition, in the case of such a form, according to the image of the character stopped in the "medium" symbol display area (according to the notification mode suggesting to perform a predetermined operation), the variable display game The ratio of the display result to be a big hit (or the ratio of the probability variable big win) may be different. For example, in the "middle" symbol display area, the operation button 30 is extended longer than when the image of the characters "Continuous hits!" It is also possible to make the percentage of the display result of a big hit higher when the character image of "long press!" suggesting a single pressing operation is stopped as a special symbol. In this manner, an effect in which the display result of the variable display game is notified according to the player's operation may be executed as the specific effect without going through the ready-to-win state. During the period during which one variable display game is being executed, special decoration symbols are displayed in the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas by stopping the combination of the special decoration symbols a plurality of times. The player may perform a predetermined operation each time the combination of is stopped. In this case, for each predetermined operation (except for the last predetermined operation), a notice effect suggesting the display result may be executed, and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. .

In addition, in the fiftieth production form, each pattern stop operation becomes effective on the condition that two or more winnings to the general winning slot are performed, and further, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stopping operation, and the general winning slot is entered. An example has been shown in which the all-symbols stop operation becomes effective under the condition of winning three times or more, and furthermore, the chance eye notice effect is executed in response to the all-symbols stop operation.
The condition that a predetermined operation becomes valid) may be conditional on winning four or more prizes in a general prize winning slot.

[Fifty-first staging mode]
In the fifty-first performance mode shown in FIG. 34, unlike the fiftieth performance mode, the specific performance that can be executed according to the game state is different. In the fifty-first presentation form, the cut-in notice presentation requiring repeated hitting operations can be executed in any of the normal state, the variable probability state, and the short working time state. On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive notice effect that requires each pattern stop operation can be executed only when the game state is normal, and the chance eye notice effect that requires all pattern stop operation is the game state. It is executable only when

It should be noted that there is a case where the operation suggesting condition is satisfied simultaneously in the normal state for the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect, but in this case, the pseudo consecutive notice effect requiring a greater number of button icons 4000 is executed. Each symbol stop operation for is preferentially urged. On the other hand, since the game states that can be executed are different between the pseudo consecutive notice effect and the chance notice effect, the operation suggesting conditions are not satisfied at the same time.

Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the normal state is three or more, the characters 4000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo-continuation" are not executed in the normal state. character 4000b is displayed, but character 4000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the variable probability state or the time saving state is 3 or more, the pseudo consecutive notice effect is not executed in the variable probability state or the time saving state, so that the character "cut-in" is displayed. 4000a and the characters 4000c of "chance" are displayed, but the characters 4000b of "pseudo run" are not displayed.

In this way, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect to be executable differs depending on the game state when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. It is possible to have different interests.

In this production form, the announcement production requiring a larger number of button icons 4000 is preferentially executed. It may be executed with priority. For example, if the operation suggestion conditions for the cut-in notice effect and the operation suggestion conditions for the pseudo continuous notice effect are satisfied for the same variable display game, the notice effect with a higher percentage of winning (for example, the pseudo continuous notice effect ) should be executed with priority.

[Fifty-second production mode]
In the fifty-second effect mode shown in FIG. 40, unlike the fiftieth effect mode and the fifty-first effect mode, the button icon 4000 is not displayed in response to the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole. Whether or not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c for each winning, and
When displaying, the characters 4000a of "cut-in", the characters 4000b of "pseudo-continuation",
and "chance eye" character 4000c to be displayed. FIG. 41(A) shows whether or not any of the characters 4000a to 4000c should be displayed, and if so, which of the characters 4000a to 4000c should be displayed, depending on the winning in each general winning slot. 4 shows a display information determination table for determining .

The effect control CPU 120 is 25
It is decided to display the characters 4000a of "cut-in" on the screen at a rate of 75%, and to display the characters 4000b of "pseudo-continuation" on the screen at a rate of 75%. Also, when the game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B, characters 4000a to 4000c at a rate of 50%
decided not to display any of the above, and at a rate of 25%, the character 4000a of "cut in
is displayed on the screen, and the characters 4000b of "pseudo-continuous" are displayed on the screen at a rate of 25%.

Also, when the game ball wins in the third general winning hole 50C, the character 400 at a rate of 80%
Decided not to display any of 0a to 4000c, "cut in" at a rate of 10%
character 4000a is displayed on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 4000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the game ball wins in the fourth general winning hole 50D, it is decided not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c at a rate of 70%, and the character 4000a of "cut in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the characters 4000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 20%.

Then, similarly to the fiftieth and fifty-first rendering modes described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in a state where the characters 4000a of "cut-in" are displayed, a continuous hitting operation is performed. A variable display game with a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state where the characters 4000b of "pseudo-continue" are displayed. In this case, it is notified that each symbol stop operation is performed, and a pseudo consecutive notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the reach variation pattern is variable in the state where the characters 4000c of "chance eye" are displayed. When the display game is suspended and all the variable display games to be executed before it are non-reach variation patterns, an all-symbols stop operation is notified, and the all-symbols stop operation is performed. Executes the chance-eye forewarning effect.

In the example of FIG. 41(A), when the game ball wins the first general prize winning port 50A, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the game ball enters the second general prize winning port 50B. When a prize is won, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when the game ball wins in the third general winning hole 50C, the characters 4000a to 4 are displayed at a rate of 20%.
000c is displayed, and 30 when the game ball wins in the fourth general winning hole 50C
One of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of %.

In this way, according to the general winning opening into which the game ball has won, the ratio of notifying the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio of enabling the specific effect to be executed are different, so that any general winning opening It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the game ball enters into the game ball, thereby improving interest.

In addition, the game ball shot to the left game area 10A is more likely to enter the second general winning opening 50B than the first general winning opening 50A, and the game ball shot to the right gaming area 10B is the fourth general winning opening. 5
If it is configured to be easier to win the third general winning opening 50C than 0D, the general winning opening that is more difficult to win When a game ball wins in the fourth general winning hole 50D), the ratio of execution of the specific effect is high.

Also, when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B,
Either of the characters 4000a of "cut-in" and the characters 4000b of "pseudo-run" may be displayed, but the characters 4000c of "chance" are not displayed.
On the other hand, when the game ball wins the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D,
There is a possibility that either the characters 4000a of "cut-in" or the characters 4000c of "chance" will be displayed, but the characters 4000b of "pseudo-run" will not be displayed.

In this way, depending on the general prize winning opening in which the game ball has won, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different, so that the game ball enters any general winning hole. It can attract attention and improve interest.

Further, when the game state is the normal state, the game ball is shot to the left game area 10A, and when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the game ball is shot to the right game area 10B, so the first general winning opening In the normal state where the game ball wins in 50A or the second general winning hole 50B,
The ratio of displaying any of the characters 4000a to 4000c is higher than the variable state or time saving state in which the game ball wins the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, and the execution ratio of the specific effect it will be expensive.

When the game state is the normal state, interest tends to decrease, so the decrease in interest is prevented by increasing the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the player's interest is directed to the special game or the normal game, so the execution of the specific effect based on the display of the characters 4000a to 4000c and the establishment of the operation suggestion condition is rather the game. characters 4000a to 40
The rate at which 00c appears and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are made lower than in the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately vary the interest of the game ball winning in the general winning hole according to the game state.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41 (A), when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the ratio of appearance of the characters 4000a to 4000c and the specific effect are executed more than when the game state is the normal state The ratio may be increased, and contrary to the example shown in FIG.
When the game ball wins in the general winning port 50C or the fourth general winning port 50D, the character 40
00a to 4000c may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 41(A), the pseudo consecutive notice effect can be executed only when winning the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 50C Alternatively, a specific effect that can be executed only when a prize is won in the fourth general prize-winning port 50D may be provided.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41(A), as shown in FIG. 41(B), the game ball wins for each winning opening of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are higher than when the game state when the game ball wins is the probability variable state or the time saving state. can be made higher. In addition, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 41 (B), when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state, when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the normal state The characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate. In addition, in FIG. 41 (B), a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the normal state may be provided, and a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state. may be provided.

In addition, depending on whether the game state is a normal state, or a variable probability state or a time saving state, the ratio of displaying the characters 4000a to 4000c and the ratio of executing the specific effect are not limited to examples that differ, For example, whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot game states (continuous number = end of jackpot game state) Whether or not the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states that are later controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not the variable display game in which the display result is a losing combination has continued for a predetermined number of times, Characters 4000a to The ratio of displaying 4000c and the ratio of executing the specific effect may be varied.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 5]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be set as follows.
Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is (X+1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y+1) pixels. Let the coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen be (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen be (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 42(a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a+1, 0) are defined as a first area α. and the coordinates (X, Y) as the vertices is defined as the second
Define area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β.
Further, in this example, the second area β is a wider area than the first area α.

In the first area α, there are prizes related to the number of wins to each prize gate, such as the number of wins to the general prize gate, the number of wins to the first start prize gate, and the number of wins to the second start prize gate. Numerical information can be displayed. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the second area β contains an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and a starting prize memory display area 5H. is provided. Note that in the examples of FIGS. 42 and 43, the second
Although the background image is visible in the area β, the background image is invisible in the first area α.

In this example, the overall image of the background image stored in the ROM 121 as effect data is
As shown in FIGS. 44(b) and 44(c), which will be described later, the overall width is (X+1) pixels and the overall height is (Y+1) pixels. It is an image in which the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. Figure 42 (b) (c) and Figure 43 (e)
In the example of (f), the region corresponding to the second area β [coordinates ( a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y)] are visible to the player.
Of the entire area of the background image, the area corresponding to the first area α [coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a,
A rectangular area defined with Y) as a vertex] is invisible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 42(b)(c) and 43(e)(f), the player is defined with the background image coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area is visible, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is not visible.

In the examples of FIGS. 42(b), (c), 43(e), and (f), (1) "today's general winnings", which is the total number of winnings to the general winnings on the day, is displayed in the first area α. , (2) "Today's navel prize number" which is the total number of prizes won in the first start prize gate on the day, and (3) "Today's prize number" which is the total number of prizes won in the second start prize gate on the day Three items of "number of electric chew winning prizes" are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D when a winning to the general winning opening occurs. When a general winning opening designation command specifying whether or not is received, and when winning to the starting winning opening occurs, the starting winning opening to specify which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball won Receives a specified command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can individually tally the number of wins to the general winning opening, the number of winning to the first starting winning opening, and the number of winning to the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) "today's number of general prizes" is 70, (2) "today's number of navel prizes"
is 521, and (3) "today's electric chew winning number" is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of prizes won to the general prize holes and the number of prizes won to the starting prize holes so that they can be compared, it is possible to relatively grasp the state of prizes won to each prize hole.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 42(b) and 43(e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 5A. This is a state in which decorative patterns are variably displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, a round object is displayed at the left end in the start winning memory display area 5H as one hold information corresponding to the hold of one special game. The image of the fourth symbol being variably displayed, the image of the decorative symbol being variably displayed, and the image of the pending information are all displayed only in the second area β.

The display layer of the fourth pattern, the display layer of the decorative pattern, and the display layer of the reserved information are all higher than the display layer of the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when a certain image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of a certain image is higher than that of the other image. In other words, display control is performed with priority given to quality. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 42(b), (c), 43(e), and (f), the area where each image of the fourth pattern, the decorative pattern, and the pending information are displayed and the background image In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the fourth pattern, the decorative pattern, and the reserved information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image invisible (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth pattern, the decoration pattern, and the reserved information appear to be displayed in front (on the player's side) of the background image.

Also, in this embodiment, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative pattern display layer. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 43(f), the area where the decorative pattern is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap,
In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative pattern is made easy to see (including visible), while the decorative pattern is difficult to see (including invisible).
The display control is performed as follows. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front (on the player's side) of the decorative symbols.

As display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image is displayed as the background. The area corresponding to the first area α in the entire area of the background image is not set in the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, It is also possible to use image data of only a rectangular area defined by Y) as a vertex].

Further, as another display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, the entire area of the background image is set in the display layer of the background image (that is, The entire background image [using image data of a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is in a display layer higher than the display layer of the background image, the first By setting another background image (for example, a plain white image) for the winning number information in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer is made invisible. You can do it. In the case of such a configuration, another background image for the winning number information (for example, a white plain image) has a predetermined transmittance (e.g., the visibility of the image of the display layer below the display layer). , becomes invisible at 0%), the image of the lower display layer may be made visible, and by setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer An area corresponding to the first area α becomes visible, and the character E becomes visible.

Also, the display layer of the winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layers of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the display of other information in the first area α does not reduce the visibility of the winning number information. Further, the display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message that does not have a display area in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message. may be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer of the winning number information is the highest among all the display layers, and in the display area of other information (whether displayed in the first area α or the second area β) Instead, it may be arranged so that the visibility is not lowered.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the pending information are all performed within the second area β, so these images are Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings to the general winnings ("today's general winnings"), the first starting winnings as the winning number information displayed in the first area α The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth (“today's number of navel winnings”) and the number of winnings to the second starting winning port (“today's number of electric chew winnings”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the pending information.

Then, in the image display device 5, when the variable display of the fourth pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the display of the pending information are being performed, if a prize is won in the general prize opening, the process shown in FIG. 42 (
As shown in d), based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α ("today's general winning number"
) is updated. In this way, when the winning to the general winning slot occurs while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the reserved information are being performed, the general winning displayed in the first area α The number of wins to the mouth is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the reserved information do not interfere with the visibility when the win number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a prize has been won in the general prize-winning slot and, as a result, the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slot has been updated.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the display result is stopped, the display shown in FIG. 42 (
As shown in c), the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is terminated and the display result is stopped, and the variable display of the decoration symbol is also terminated and the display result is stopped. In this example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 5A remains illuminated (displayed) in a display color reminiscent of a failure (the display result is stopped), and the final decorative symbol is: Lost symbols of "5, 3, 1" are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

Here, as shown in FIG. 42(c), the fourth pattern that is stopped (in which the display result is derived and displayed) and the fourth pattern that is stopped (in which the display result is derived and displayed) ) are all displayed in the second area β, the number of prizes displayed in the first area As information, the number of prizes won in the general prize gate ("Today's general prize number"), the number of prizes won in the first start prize gate ("Today's navel prize number"), and the number of prizes won in the second start prize gate The visibility of the number ("Today's Electric Chew Winning Number") is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decoration symbol.

Then, in the image display device 5, when the fourth symbol is stopped and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, if a prize is won in the general winning slot, as shown in FIG. 42(d). ,
Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the general winning opening specification command, the winning number for the general winning opening displayed in the first area α ("today's general winning number") is updated. In this way, when a prize is won in the general winning slot while the fourth symbol is stopped and the decorative symbols are stopped, the number of winnings in the general winning slot displayed in the first area α increases. , is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol do not interfere with the visibility when the win number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a prize has been won in the general prize-winning slot and, as a result, the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slot has been updated.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 42(b), (c) and (d), the number of prizes won to the general prize gates is updated without impeding visibility. Even when a prize is generated, as in the case of the general winning opening, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the 4th design and the variable display and stop display of the decorative design, the winning to the first start winning opening The numbers are updated without impeding visibility. Also, even when a prize is won in the second starting prize opening, as in the case of the general prize opening, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening is updated without impeding visibility.

As shown in FIGS. 43(e) and 43(f), when the effect control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command designating that an abnormality has occurred, the image display device 5 displays an error message (in this example, "An error has occurred. ) is displayed. As described above, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative pattern display layer. Therefore, when the decorative design is variably displayed, or when the decorative design is stopped and displayed, if the effect control CPU 120 receives the abnormality detection designation command, the area where the decorative design is displayed and the error Regarding the overlap range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to see (including visible) and to make the decorative pattern difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 43(b), when viewed from the player, the error message is displayed in front (on the player's side) of the decoration symbol being variably displayed (or the decoration symbol being displayed in a stopped state). appear to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 43(f), the error message is displayed in the second area β. The number of winnings to the general winnings ("today's general winnings"), the number of winnings to the first start winnings ("today's navel winnings"), and the number of winnings displayed in the The visibility of the number of prizes won in the 2-start prize slot (“today's number of electronic chew prizes”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information without depending on the display of the error message.

Then, in the image display device 5, when the winning to the general winning opening occurs while the error message is being displayed, as shown in FIG.
Based on the fact that 20 has received the general winning slot specification command, the number of winnings to the general winning slots displayed in the first area α ("today's general winning number") is updated. In this way, if a prize is won in the general prize pool while the error message is being displayed, the number of prizes won in the general prize pool displayed in the first area α is displayed without impeding visibility. Updated. In other words, the display of the error message does not impede the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a prize has been won in the general prize-winning slot and, as a result, the number of prizes won in the general prize-winning slot has been updated.

In the examples of FIGS. 43(f) and 43(g), the number of prizes won to the general prize gates is updated without impeding visibility, but the number of prizes won to the first start prize gate is Even when it occurs
As in the case of the general winning openings, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, regardless of the display of the error message. In addition, even when a prize is won in the second starting prize opening, the visibility of the number of prizes won in the second start prize opening is hindered regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general prize opening. updated without

In addition, in the example of FIG. 43(f), the text "An error has occurred." is displayed to simply notify that an abnormality has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Alternatively, different error messages may be displayed according to the type of abnormality designated by the abnormality detection designation command. For example, when an abnormality detection designation command specifying that a magnetic abnormality has occurred is received, the characters "Magnetic error has occurred." Sometimes, the text "A vibration error has occurred." .

In this example, as shown in FIG. 42(a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as the first area α, and coordinates (a+1) are defined as the first area α. , 0) and coordinates (X,
Y) is defined as the second area β, but the first area that can display the winning number information, the decorative pattern, the fourth pattern, the pending information, and the error message can be displayed. The second area is not limited to a rectangular area, and may be any area that does not overlap each other on the screen.

(Display/non-display setting of winning number information)
As described with reference to FIG. 4, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 (which can be operated by the game arcade clerk but cannot be operated by the player) to open the glass door frame 3a forward is set to the display position (second position), and when the player setting screen (see FIG. 5) is set to display the number of prizes won in the general prize gate by the operation of the player, the general prize gate is set to Winning number information related to the number of winnings in the game is to be displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 are display modes of the screen in a state in which the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed in this way. In the first area α, not only the number of winnings to the general winnings, but also the number of winnings to the first starting winnings (so-called "navel") and the number of winnings to the second starting winnings (so-called "electric chew") The number shall also be displayed. That is, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening according to the operation of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30 .

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 4, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to non-display (
1st position), the operation button 30 is used to press the winning number information (the number of winnings to the general winnings opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening, etc.). ) is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of whether or not the setting to display is made. Also, even if the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to display (second position), if the operation button 30 is not set to display the winning number information (non-display setting) ), the winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

The examples shown in FIGS. 44(b) and 44(c) are display modes of the screen when the setting is made so that the winning number information is not displayed. In the case, the number of winnings to the general winnings opening is not displayed in the first area α, and the first starting winnings opening (
The number of wins to the so-called "navel") and the number of wins to the second start-up prize hole (so-called "electric chew") are also not displayed.

In this way, by making it possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation on the player side, ,Also,
Winning number information can be displayed according to the determination of the player side.

As shown in FIGS. 44A, 44B, and 44C, when the winning number information is set not to be displayed, the error message display area 5E,
Each area of the fourth symbol display areas 5A, 5B, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the start winning memory display area 5H is common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth pattern, the decorative pattern, and the pending information displayed in the second area β are set to display the winning number information and the winning number It does not change with the setting that does not display information.
This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change for setting whether or not to display the number-of-wins information.

On the other hand, when the winning number information is set not to be displayed, as shown in FIGS. , the background image is visible in the first area α and the second area β. FIG. 44(a) (
b) In the example of (c), the area corresponding to the first area α [ A rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] and an area corresponding to the second area β [
A rectangular area defined with coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 44(a), 44(b) and 44(c), the player moves the coordinates of the background image (a+1
, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) are defined as vertices. The character E included in the rectangular area defined as is also visible.

In this way, regarding the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth pattern, decoration pattern, and reserved information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. While reducing the control burden by not changing (common) with the setting that does not change, regarding other images (background images), it is possible to see the setting to display the winning number information and the setting to not display the winning number information. By making the ranges different, it is possible to improve interest in the case where the winning number information is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(b), in the image display device 5, the variable display of the fourth pattern,
Even if a prize is won in the general prize-winning slot while the variable display of the decoration pattern and the display of the reserved information are being performed, as shown in FIG. The number of prizes won to the general prize gate is not displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 44(c),
In the image display device 5, when the fourth symbol is stopped and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, even if a winning to the general winning slot occurs, as shown in FIG. Since the number information is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning openings is not displayed.

In the examples of FIGS. 44(b), (c), and (d), even when a prize is won in the general prize gate, the number of prizes won in the general prize gate is not displayed. If it is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the first start winning mouth will not be displayed even if winning to the first starting winning mouth occurs, and if winning to the second starting winning mouth occurs Also, the number of winnings to the second start winning opening is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in each winning hole according to the player's operation.

(Each item of winning number information)
FIG. 45 shows an example of winning number information items that can be displayed in the first area α. In addition, Fig. 4
5 are items related to the number of prizes won to the general prize gate, but similarly to this, there are items related to the number of prizes won to the first start prize gate and the number of prizes won to the second start prize gate. can be displayed in the first area α.

It is possible to display "today's general winnings (assumed to be A1)", which is the total number of winnings to the general winnings since the gaming machine was turned on. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120
By setting the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 and adding 1 to the value of the general winning number counter each time a general winning opening designation command is received, A1 can be tallied. there is

In addition, it is possible to display the "today's general winning ratio (assumed to be A2)", which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the gaming machine was turned on. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and resets the value of the out number counter each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. By adding 1, the total number of outs can be calculated, and by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs, A2 can be calculated.

In addition, it is possible to display "today's general number of prize balls (assumed to be A3)", which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the respective general prize holes since the power of the gaming machine was turned on. In addition, it is possible to display the "today's general prize ball ratio (assumed to be A4)", which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine was turned on.

The ROM 121 stores the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth
The number of winning balls determined for each winning opening of the general winning opening 50D and the big winning opening is stored. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0, and every time a general winning hole designation command is received, the general winning hole designation command is designated. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole to the value of the counter for the number of general prize balls, A3 can be totaled. Moreover, CPU120 for production control
sets the value of the number of winning balls counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and designates the starting winning hole designation command, the general winning hole designation command, and the winning of the big winning hole. The total number of prize balls can be tallied by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize gate specified by each command to the value of the prize ball counter each time a special prize opening prize command is received.
By calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls, A4 can be tallied.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies whether the current game state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the game state by the game state designation command, and wins a prize in the low base state. The number information (B1-B4) and the winning number information (C1-C4) in the high base state can be sorted and tabulated.

Specifically, it is possible to display the "low base state general winning number (assumed to be B1)", which is the total number of winnings to each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state. It is possible to display the "high base state general winning number (assumed to be C1)", which is the total number of winning prizes.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium general winning prize counter and the value of the high base medium general winning prize counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0.
shall be set as Then, during the period in which the gaming state specified by the received gaming state specifying command is the normal state, the value of the low-base middle general winning number counter is incremented by 1 each time the general winning opening specifying command is received, thereby reducing B1. During the period when the game state specified by the received game state designation command is either a variable probability state or a short time state, the value of the high base middle general winning number counter is changed each time the general winning mouth designation command is received. By adding one by one, C1 can be totaled.

In addition, it is possible to display the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, ie, the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state. can be displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 sets both the value of the out number counter during the low base and the value of the out number counter during the high base stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. In the normal state, the number of outs during low base is counted by adding 1 to the value of the counter for the number of outs during low base each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. B2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of outs during low base. On the other hand, in the probability variable state or the time saving state, by adding 1 to the value of the high base out count counter for each reception of the detection signal output from the out ball detector, the high base out count can be aggregated. C2 can be tallied by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of outs during the high base.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the low base state (assumed to be B3)", which is the total number of prize balls given based on the winning in each general prize opening in the low base state, and the high base state. It is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the high base state (assumed to be C3)", which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning in each general prize opening in the state.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0.
shall be set as Then, during the period in which the gaming state specified by the received gaming state specifying command is the normal state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole specified by the received general winning hole specifying command is counted by the low base middle general prize ball number counter. By adding to the value of B3 ("general number of prize balls in low base state") can be aggregated, and the game state specified by the received game state designation command is either a probability variable state or a time saving state During the period, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize mouth specified by the received general prize mouth designation command is added to the value of the high base middle general prize ball number counter, and C3 ("the number of general prize balls in the high base state ) can be aggregated.

In addition, the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, ``general prize ball ratio in the low base state (assumed to be B4)'' can be displayed, and the ratio to the number of prize balls in the high base state can be displayed. C.
It is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio of high base state (assumed to be C4)" which is the ratio of 3.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets both the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0. . In the normal state, each time a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a large winning opening designation command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening designated by each command is set to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the number of balls counter, the number of prize balls in the low base state can be aggregated, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, B4 ("low base state General prize ball ratio”) can be aggregated. On the other hand, in the probability variable state or the time saving state, each time the start winning mouth designation command, general winning mouth designation command, and large winning mouth winning command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is increased. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be aggregated, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls C4 ("high It is possible to aggregate the general prize ball ratio in the base state.

In this way, since information related to the number of wins to the general winning slots can be aggregated for each game state, the player can grasp information corresponding to the current game state. For example, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), attention is paid to items B1 to B4, and when the game state is a high base state (probability variable state or time saving state), attention is paid to items C1 to C4. Become.

When the game state is the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α, but does not display the items C1 to C4, and when the game state is the high base state. , C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while the items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Also, regardless of the game state, items B1 to B4, and C1
Although the items of ~ C4 are displayed in the first area α, in the low base state, the items of B1 ~ B4 are displayed in a manner that is easier to see (for example, larger) than the items of C1 ~ C4, and in the high base state , the items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4 so that they are easier to see.

(Aggregation of winning number information during the set period)
In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can aggregate the winning number information in the period set by the player. D1)” can be displayed in the first area α.

When a tallying period is set according to the operation of the player shown in FIG. The value of the timer is set for a set period (counting period according to the player's operation), and the counting timer is started. Then, each time a general winning slot designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the set period, and when the counting timer times out (when the set counting period has passed), the general winning during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

In addition, while the counting timer is updated during a period when the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period after the last detection signal is received from the out ball detector), while the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the detection signal was last received from the out-ball detector, the counting timer may be stopped without being updated. In this way, the period in which the game ball is not shot to the game area 10 may be excluded from the tally period.

Also, when the tally timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the tally timer is reset again for the set period (player's operation), and the counting timer starts again. Then, the value of the general winning number counter during the set period is incremented each time a general winning opening designation command is received, and when the tally timer times out again (when the set tally period has passed again), the general winning number counter during the set period is displayed in the first area α as D1. In this manner, D1 corresponding to each totaling period set by the player is displayed.

In addition, it is possible to display the “general winning rate of the set period (assumed to be D2)” which is the ratio of D1 to the number of outs of the gaming machine during the set period. The effect control CPU 120 has a RAM 12
2 is set to 0 during the set period of the general win number counter stored in the RAM 122, the value of the out number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 is also set to 0; By adding 1 to the value of the number of outs counter during the set period each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, the number of outs during the set period can be counted. D2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of D1 to all.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in a set period (assumed to be D3)", which is the total number of prize balls given based on winnings in the respective general prize openings in the set period. In addition, it is possible to display the "general winning ball ratio of the set period (assumed to be D4)" which is the ratio of D3 to the number of winning balls during the set period.

When a tallying period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning ball number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 to 0, A counting timer value is set for a set period (a counting period according to the player's operation), and the counting timer is started. Then, each time a general winning hole designation command is received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole designated by the general winning hole designation command is added to the value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period, and the tally timer is activated. The value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period when the time-out occurs (when the set tally period has passed) is displayed as D3 in the first area α.

Also, when the tally timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning balls counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the tally timer is reset again for the set period (player , and the counting timer starts again. Then, the value of the general prize ball counter is added during the set period each time the general prize mouth designation command is received, and when the total timer times out again (when the set total period has passed again), the general prize ball during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. In this manner, D3 corresponding to each totaling period set by the player is displayed.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 to 0, the effect control CPU 120 also sets the value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 to 0. is set to 0, and each time a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a large winning opening winning command specifying winning to a large winning opening are received, the winning opening specified by each command is received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls to the value of the counter for the number of prize balls during the set period, the number of prize balls in the set period can be totaled, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period D4 can be aggregated by calculating .

In addition, since the general winning hole specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 specifies which general winning hole the game ball has won, 4 Individually tally the number of prizes won for each general prize gate 50D, and total the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 for each general prize gate,
It is possible to display the total value in the first area α.

Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winnings opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winnings opening Which of the items to display in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the game state or the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winnings opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first start winning opening described later, and
Operation of the game hall side (for example, operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30) which of the items related to the number of winnings to the second start winning hole is to be displayed in the first area α Alternatively, the selection may be made by the player's operation (for example, operation using the operation button 30).

In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winnings opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winnings opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Regarding each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the reference value is stored in the ROM 121 in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the total value of the items displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value has not reached the reference value, , as shown in FIG. 46(4), which will be described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of the item. . Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the total value of the items displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value compared to the reference value of the item, and selects a gaming machine. for (whether or not to continue playing on the gaming machine)
It can be used as a judgment material.

Next, a method for setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. 46 . For example, the tabulation period setting screen of FIG. 46 further sets the tabulation period when the selection screen of FIG. A selection screen for selecting whether or not is displayed, and the screen is displayed when a selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) and

On the setting screen of FIG. 46(1), a message "Please set the aggregation period" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed below. On the setting screen,
An icon including the characters "10 minutes", an icon including the characters "30 minutes", and an icon including the characters "60 minutes" are displayed, along with a message "Enter button after selecting with the jog dial". Further, an arrow is displayed to prompt the user to press the operation button 30 (jog dial) after rotating it.

When setting the counting period to 10 minutes, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is rotated to the left to select an icon including the characters "10 minutes", and then the operation button 30 is pressed to display the "setting The period is 10 minutes." is displayed, and the aggregation period is 10 minutes.
minutes. That is, the set period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Further, when setting the aggregation period to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 46(1), when the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon including the characters "30 minutes" selected, the , "The set period is 3
It's 0 minutes. is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, D1
The set period of ~D4 is 30 minutes. Further, in the case of setting the counting period to 60 minutes, by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the right to select an icon including the characters "60 minutes", pressing the operation button 30 A message "The set period is 60 minutes." is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the set period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

In this way, it is possible to set a desired tallying period according to the player's operation. In the example of FIG. 46, 30 minutes is set as the aggregation period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(3), the number of winnings to the general winnings per 30 minutes is displayed as "the number of winnings in general in the set period (D1)" in the first area α. In the example of FIG. 46(3), 30 is stored as the reference value for the number of prizes won to the general prize gates per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of prizes won to the general prize gates per 30 minutes is 37, the aggregate value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, there is no notification that the aggregated value does not reach the reference value.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 46(4), the reference value for the number of winnings to the general winnings per 30 minutes is 3.
While 0 is stored, the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning openings per 30 minutes is 29, so the total value does not reach the reference value. Therefore, it is notified that the aggregated value has not reached the reference value (display of a message "Below the reference value (30 times/30 minutes).").

(Items related to the number of prizes entered into the starting prize pool)
In addition, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning opening designation command that specifies which one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won when winning to the starting winning opening occurs. By the same method as the counting process when receiving a general winning mouth designation command specifying which one of the 1st to 4th general winning mouths has won Equivalent)”, “Today’s 1st starting prize winning ratio (equivalent to A2)”, “Number of prize balls awarded based on today’s 1st starting prize winning (equivalent to A3)”, and "The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning in the first start prize mouth today to the total number of prize balls of the day (
A4)”, “Today’s second starting prize winning number (equivalent to A1)”, “Today’s second starting prize winning ratio (equivalent to A2)”, “Today’s second starting prize winning ratio (equivalent to A2)” 2 The number of prize balls given based on the winning of the starting prize mouth (equivalent to A3)”, and “Today’s second prize for today’s total number of prize balls
Aggregate the percentage of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the starting prize opening (equivalent to A4),
It can be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first start winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B2)", "the first start winning opening in the low base state The number of prize balls given based on winning the 1 start prize mouth (equivalent to B3)", and "the number of prize balls given in the low base state to the first start prize mouth in the low base state Percentage of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (equivalent to B4)”, “Number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B1)”, “Second start in the low base state Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to B2)", "Number of prize balls given based on winning to the second starting winning opening in low base state (equivalent to B3)", and "Granted in low base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on winning to the second start prize opening in the low base state for the number of prize balls (equivalent to B4)", can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first start winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C2)", "the number of winning prizes to the first start winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C2)" The number of prize balls given based on the winning to the 1 start prize opening (equivalent to C3)”, and “the number of prize balls given in the high base state to the first start prize opening in the high base state Percentage of the number of prize balls given based on the winning (equivalent to C4)”, “Number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C1)”, “Second start in the high base state Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to C2)", "Number of prize balls given based on winning to second start winning opening in high base state (equivalent to C3)", and "Granted in high base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on winning to the second start prize hole in the high base state to the number of prize balls (equivalent to C4)", can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first start winning opening in the set period (equivalent to D1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the set period (equivalent to D2)", "the first start winning opening in the set period Number of prize balls given based on winning a prize in the mouth (equivalent to D3)” and “Number of prize balls given in a set period based on winning in the first start prize mouth in a set period Percentage of the number of awarded balls (equivalent to D4)”, “Number of winnings to the second start winning opening during the set period (equivalent to D1)”, “Ratio of winning to the second starting winning opening during the set period ( equivalent to D2)”,
"The number of prize balls given based on the winning in the second start prize opening during the set period (equivalent to D3)
", and "Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning to the second start prize mouth during the set period to the number of prize balls awarded during the set period (equivalent to D4)" , can be displayed in the first area α.

(Yakuren (Ren ratio), display of role ratio)
In addition, in the game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 also controls each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter , also referred to as "entering area"). Further, in the gaming machine 1, predetermined information such as a winning combination (running ratio) and a winning ratio can be displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 and shown in FIGS.

As described above, the game machine maker usually designs the game board so that game media enter the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (so that the game passes the test).
Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether game media enter the general winning area at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in a gaming machine according to an embodiment to be described later, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in a gaming machine having a general winning area. the following,
The display of the character ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the display of the total number of game balls and the ratio of the role items on the main board 11 will be described.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 49 is a board for controlling games. The main board 11 is shown in FIG.
As shown in 1(A), it is enclosed in a substrate case 201, and a display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back side of the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 is arranged in front when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the glass door frame 3a is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the glass door frame 3a opened. This is the actual front, which is different from the front of the gaming machine 1 . However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the game machine 1 may be common.

On the main board 11, there is information about game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls in the first starting opening (navel), the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the big winning opening ( attacker)
The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are input and totaled, and the display monitor 29 displays the ratio of the number of winning balls due to winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. ratio) (%
), the role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second start prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls from the big prize mouth (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. It is designed to The number of winning balls (continuous ratio) is the ratio of the number of winning balls (number of consecutive winning balls below) due to winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The role ratio is the number of prize balls won in the second start prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls won in the big prize mouth (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (number of winning balls below) is the ratio occupied by The total number of prize balls (total number of winning balls below) is
The number of prize balls from winning the big prize gate (attacker), the number of prize balls from winning the second start prize gate (electric chew), and other than the big prize gate (attacker) and the second start prize gate (electric chew) , and the number of prize balls entered into the winning openings (first start winning opening, general winning opening). In addition, the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball changes due to the change in the passable width of the game ball. be. Also, the big prize gate (
Attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew), other winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) are fixed accessories, the passable width of the game ball is fixed, and the number of game balls The estimated winning ratio is a fixed role.

As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, the first
The number of prize balls (general prize balls) won in the starter opening (navel) and the general prize opening (sode), and the number of prize balls in the second starter prize opening (electric chew). number (number of prize balls), number of special prize balls (attacker prize number)
Aggregate Assuming that the total is 1 set, 10 sets, that is, 60000 roles (
Calculate the consecutive ratio (%) and role ratio (%). In addition, the number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls),
The number of special electric prize balls (attacker's prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer, which has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set.
In addition, a considerable amount (for example, a few bytes) is stored for 11 sets of 66,000, and the cumulative role ratio (%) and role ratio (%) within the range of these values are calculated. can be calculated.

The display monitor 29 displays 60,000 consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) (%), role ratio (%), and the cumulative total of consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) (%) and role ratio (%) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, one display means switches between four displays for display. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display everything, but as the game progresses, the number of prize balls won by winning the first start opening (navel) and winning the second start winning opening (electric chew) are tallied. The number of prize balls due to the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls due to winning the big prize mouth (attacker) will change. and
For example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying 60000 roster ratios (%) is reflected in the 60000 roster ratios (%) displayed after that, 60000 Actors (
There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the consecutive ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60000 pieces.
Therefore, the number of prize balls for winning the first starter (navel), the number of prizes for the second starter prize (electric chew), the number of prizes for the big prize (attacker), and the total number of prize balls The number is input, and the aggregation is performed at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, 60,000 roles (relationship ratio) (%)
display timing, etc.), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning in the second start prize opening (denchu) and the number of prize balls due to winning in the big prize opening (attacker) are as follows. A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of obtained balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total accumulated number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. Also, the number of winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of game media by the attacker and the electric chew. Also, the number of consecutive winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out by winning game media to the attacker. Therefore, Yakuren (Ren ratio) can be calculated by the following formula (1). Also, the role ratio is
It can be obtained by the following formula (2).
Consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) = [number of balls acquired in a row / total number acquired] x 100 (1)
Role ratio = [(number of balls acquired in a row + number of balls acquired in a row) / total number acquired] x 100 (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the role ratio is obtained by dividing 42,000 by 60,000 to obtain 0.70 (rounded down to three decimal places).
However, since the microcomputer used in the game machine cannot perform arithmetic operations below the decimal point, the following arithmetic operations are required.

First, the first calculation method will be explained. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is set to 1
Multiply by 00 to get 4200000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60000.
This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain the operation result up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point 1
000 times.

Next, the second calculation method will be explained. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is 10
Divide by 0 to get 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%.
That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, division by 1000 is sufficient to obtain a calculation result up to three digits below the decimal point.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the role product ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in a 3-byte storage area. Similarly, the number of acquired balls is 3
00A410h is stored in the byte storage area.

Here, the microcomputer used in the game machine can only perform calculations between values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower 1 byte may be truncated for ease of calculation.

A third calculation method, which is a simplified version of the second calculation method, will now be described. In the third calculation method, the total number of prize balls is reduced to 00EAh by truncating the lower 1 byte of 60h from the total number of prize balls, 00EA60h, so as to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the game machine.
, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is truncated from 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100).
and calculate 2. 156 is then divided by 2 to obtain 78 as the quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the role product ratio is obtained as 78%.

In the third calculation method, while the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can easily perform calculations, an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are 10 times. In other words, as the period for calculating the role-product ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

Further, the substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized. The substrate case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 11 is inserted, and a heat radiation hole for releasing heat from the electrical components of the main substrate 11 . The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not obstructed by the heat dissipation holes. It should be noted that the term “right in front” here means a straight front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who is trying to visually recognize the main board 11 .

Further, the substrate case 201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main substrate 11 . These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, the first part (
For example, when the display monitor 29 is arranged on the central portion of the main board 11), other electric components are arranged on the second portion (for example, the peripheral portion of the main board 11) different from the first portion of the main board 11. , a hole portion, a heat radiation hole, and a seal may be arranged at a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11 . In particular, it is preferable to provide the heat radiation hole near the display monitor 29 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 29 . Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiation hole is arranged at a position that is not directly in front of the display monitor 29 . According to this, since the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not obstructed, it is easy to check the information regarding the winning.

Moreover, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11 . Specifically, the part of the board case 201 corresponding to the second part of the main board 11 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. to According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered by the wiring.

In addition, the main board 11 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying errors in the game machine. are preferably placed on both sides. The other electronic component referred to here is desirably, for example, a large control component such as a CPU.

In addition, a storage area for storing information on game wins (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total of information on game wins stored in 10 ring buffers with maximum 2-byte counters), prize balls The total number buffer) may continue to be stored without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further explained later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected.
When an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning ball balls is greater than the number of winning ball balls, the storage area for storing the information about the winning of the game is stored. An initialization process may be performed. Also, the abnormality count error display and warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while performing the abnormality count error display and warning display, or after performing the initialization process. The abnormality count error display and warning display will be further described later.

Calculation of the role ratio (%), for example, the total number of winning balls is 34321, and the number of winning balls is 19876.
19876 is divided by 34321 as a divisor to calculate the ratio.
19876/34321=0.57912 . When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations with decimal points must be avoided, so the following formulas are substituted. 198
In the division of 76/34321, 34321 in the denominator is divided by 100 and the decimal point is discarded, resulting in 19876/343=57.9475. Since the decimal point is rounded down, a role ratio (%) of 57% is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 for values other than the most significant bit), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3% + 0.3%
error. For example, if the calculation is performed by truncating the decimal point, the correct value is 69.9%
, 69% when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1% →
It is conceivable that an error of 1% will be displayed on the display at 70%, but even with a 1% error on the display, the error is very small and the ratio (%) (or the ratio (%)) can be displayed.

Also, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so if the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Furthermore, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1% and may become even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, the total number of acquired balls above a certain number (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits)
) are counted by the counter, the display monitor 29 displays the role ratio (%), the role ratio (continuation ratio) (%
) is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, the possibility of a large error is notified by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting an alarm sound, or blinking the displayed value. may

Also, the display monitor 29 displays the role ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). indicate.
In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or an attacker.
If the value is displayed as the value of the consecutive ratio (%), there is a risk that the value of the ratio (%) and the consecutive ratio (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the role ratio (continuation ratio) (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are displayed sequentially.

Also, if the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, if two 7 segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100%. 10 in this case
99 may be displayed instead of 0. In the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 50 and 51(A), numeric values can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numeric values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

In addition, in the above calculation method, an example was shown in which the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired ball objects, and the number of consecutive acquired ball objects were counted by a counter. A sensor provided detects that a game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, the number of prize balls is individually tallied, and then a counter for the number of winning balls and a counter for the number of consecutive winning balls. You may calculate the value to be aggregated into. In addition, using a sensor provided individually for the attacker and a sensor provided after the ejection path for ejecting the winning game media of the attacker and the winning game media of the electric chew merge, based on the detection result It is also possible to calculate a value to be added to a counter for the number of winning ball balls and a counter for the number of continuous winning ball balls. Hereinafter, the display of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, a sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electronic chew detects that a game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, the number of prize balls is tallied individually.

A display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 of the gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. The main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1) provided in the game machine frame 3 in the game machine 1, as shown in FIG. On the back side of the game board 2, the main board 11
Besides, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the power supply board, the payout control board, and the launch control board are also provided. Main board 11
It is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral substrate other than the . In addition, the main board|substrate 11 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main substrate 11 may overlap each peripheral substrate so as to be on the upper side.

The RAM 102 on the main board 11 stores a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

The first gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 21A. The second gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 21B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is
It is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second starting port switch 22B.

The first general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 24A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 24B. The third general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 24C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. The big winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 .

A clear switch is connected to the main board 11 . The clear switch is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when there is no choice but to redo the calculation of the role (repeated ratio) or role ratio, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the role (repeated ratio) or role ratio. is. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when data is being collected for performing normal yakuren (run ratio) and yakuratio calculations. Further, when the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is sent to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

Also, the main board 11 is provided with an RTC 106 . The main board 11 includes an RTC 106
can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, and in this embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the operating hours of the game arcade.

The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201 as shown in FIG. 51(A). A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201 . By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, thereby preventing tampering with the main board 11. FIG. The board case 201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped board case”).

Also, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 . A seal 11S is attached to the board case 201 to prove that the main board 11 is enclosed. The sealing seal 11S is pasted over, for example, the detachable portion of the substrate case 201. As shown in FIG. The sealing seal 11S is arranged at a position away from the main substrate 11, and the display monitor 29
The display monitor 29 is arranged at a position different from a position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29 . Thus, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing seal 11S.

The display monitor 29 includes a four-digit display section including a first display section 29A, a second display section 29B, a third display section 29C, and a fourth display section 29D. The first display portion 29A to the fourth display portion 29D are
All of them are composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display units 2
9A to 4th display section 29D are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. In addition, it is possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

On the display monitor 29, each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 51(B) is displayed. The total period is displayed on the first display portion 29A and the second display portion 29B of the upper two digits, and the third display portion of the lower two digits is displayed.
Numerical values are displayed in percentage on the display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D. In display No. 1,
A short-term role ratio (continuation ratio) is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. Display No.3
In display No. 2, the total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) is displayed, and in display No. 2, the cumulative cumulative winning combination is displayed.

The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 60,000. The total cumulative period means the total period from the start of the calculation of the role ratio (repeated ratio) and role ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the role ratio (retained ratio) and role ratio. do.

In the above example, the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated regardless of the game state, but may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the winning combination (continuation ratio) may be the ratio of the number of winning balls due to winning to the big winning opening during the jackpot game state to the total number of winning balls. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls, out of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls due to winning in the second start prize opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls going to the big prize opening during the jackpot game state It may be the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by winning a prize.

When the display No. 1 short-term role combination (continuation ratio) is displayed, "y6." is displayed on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B. In addition, when the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) is displayed in percentage (% display) on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B, When the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed,
The short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B.

When the total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B. In addition, when the total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed, in the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D,
When the total cumulative winning combination (consecutive ratio) is displayed as a percentage (percentage display) and the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed in the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D. is displayed as a percentage (% display).

The main board 11, in calculating the role combination (continuation ratio) and the role ratio, the game ball that entered the fourth general winning opening from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening We are counting the number of intrusions. In the main process, the CPU 103 switches the first gate switch 21A
and second gate switch 21B, first start switch 22A and second start switch 22
B, the count switch 23, and the state confirmation process of confirming the state (presence or absence of detection signal) of each switch of the first general winning opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning opening switch 24D.

In this state confirmation processing of each switch, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered. When detection signals are output from the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, second
When the detection signal is output from the starting port switch 22B, the values of the first start winning prize number counter and the second start winning prize number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the big prize is won. When the value of the number counter is added and detection signals are output from the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, By adding the values of the first general winning number counter, second general winning number counter, third general winning number counter, and fourth general winning number counter, the number of game balls entering each entry area (to each winning opening (Number of game ball wins) are counted. Note that the value of each counter is R
stored in the AM 102.

In this way, the step for tallying the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch state confirmation process). ), without executing a separate aggregation program, that is,
The number of game balls entering each entry area can be totaled without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls into each winning hole based on the tallied number of winning balls into each winning hole, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning hole. Let The number of winning game balls is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one winning to a winning opening by the number of winning times to the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning game balls is
It is determined in advance for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 52, the number of prize balls classified here for each prize hole is the general prize ball (first
Prize ball for winning general prize mouth to 4th general prize mouth (sode)), 1st start prize mouth prize ball (1st
It is the number of prize balls for winning the starting prize hole (navel)), normal electric prize balls (balls for winning electric chews), and special electric prize balls (balls for winning attackers). . Moreover, RAM10
2 also stores the total number of prize balls. Although the CPU 103 individually counts the number of game balls winning the general winning opening and the number of game balls winning the first start opening, the number of the game balls winning the general winning opening and the number of the first starting opening The number of game balls winning prizes may be aggregated. In addition, although the number of general prize balls and the number of first start prize balls are calculated separately, the number of general prize balls and the number of first start prize balls are calculated separately. , and the number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer has 10 first to tenth storage areas each consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). In addition, the active buffer has a 0th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning hole, which increases as the game progresses, is added. 0th
The 11 storage areas from the storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and can store up to 6000 data with a margin.

Also, the RAM 102 is provided with storage areas for the sum of the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first to tenth storage areas and the total cumulative total for each winning hole. The 10 sets of total sum and total accumulation storage area consist of a maximum 3-byte counter.
56×256×256=16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin.

In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a combination (continuation ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the combination of roles and the combination of roles (continuation ratio) for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the role ratio and the role ratio (continuous ratio) of the 10 sets and the total cumulative number of winning balls based on the winning number of the game balls to each winning opening for the 10 sets and the total cumulative total. , 10 sets and the total cumulative role ratios and consecutive roles (continuous ratios) are stored in a consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio storage area. A combination (continuation ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the combination of roles and combination (continuation ratio) of 10 sets and the total cumulative total consists of a maximum 1-byte counter. The role ratios and the role ratios of the 10 sets and the total sum can be stored with a margin of a maximum of 1 byte if they are stored as integers, for example.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 will be explained. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 includes the above built-in registers,
It has a memory space for accessing the ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 53, the address/data signal lines of the ROM 101 are:
16 from 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same shall apply hereinafter) in the memory space
It is assigned to the built-in ROM area of K bytes area. The CPU 103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

The address/data signal lines of the built-in registers are FE00H to F in the memory space.
Allocated to the built-in register area of the EBFH. The CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register via this built-in register area.

The address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are F000H to F in the memory space.
It is assigned to the RWM area (built-in RAM area) of 3FFH. The CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or write data to the RAM 102 . Note that other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFF in this embodiment)
FH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, a used area program area, a used area data area, a non-used area program area, and a non-used area data area are allocated to the built-in ROM area. A free area is allocated between the used area program area and the used area data area. Similarly, empty areas are allocated between the used area data area and the unused area program area, and between the unused area program area and the unused area data area. The CPU 103 designates this built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101 .

Among these, the use area program area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data of a game-related program relating to the progress of is stored. The game-related programs stored in the use area program area include a game control program, which is a program for controlling games, and a special symbol display output program, which is a program for displaying special symbols and general symbols. there is
These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the use area program area. The game control program is a program relating to the progress of the game,
It is a program that controls the progress of the game, such as a big-hit lottery program for lottery for transition to the big-hit game state.

The non-use area program area is composed of command data (opcode) for the CPU 103 to calculate the winning combination (running ratio) and winning ratio, and supplementary data (operand) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. data of a program for calculating and displaying a combination of roles (repeated ratio) and a role ratio (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a program related to a combination of roles (repeated ratio) and a role ratio). In the Yakure (Ren ratio) role ratio related program, the Yakure (Ren ratio) role ratio calculation program for calculating the Yakure (Ren ratio) and the role ratio and the Yakure (Ren ratio) and the role ratio display monitor 29 includes a role ratio display output program. In the non-use area program area, a combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program and a combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program are stored. The consecutive role (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

Here, the used area program area and the non-used area program area will be further described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 55, in the use area program area, as game-related programs, "switch input process", "digit output process 1", "jump process to non-use area (digit output process 2)", and "error detection process". "Random number update process""Special figure process""Normal figure process""Information output process""Ballprocess""Test terminal process""Solenoidprocess""Memory display process""Error notification process""Unused area (role Each program of "jump processing to ratio calculation processing" is stored. Also, in the unused program area, Yakuren (
Continuous ratio) "digit output process 2", "jump process to use area (error detection process)", and "role ratio calculation process" are stored. In the CPU 103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt process. Also, in the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the first special symbol display device 4A is displayed by dynamic lighting.
, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, and LED in display monitor 29
display. However, instead of dynamic lighting, static lighting may be used.

Among these processes, the program that performs "digit output processing 1" corresponds to the special symbol display output program, and the program that performs "digit output processing 2" corresponds to the combination (continuation ratio) combination ratio display output program. . In addition, from "error detection processing" to "error notification processing" (hereinafter referred to as
It is also called “game progress control processing”. ) corresponds to the game control program, and the program to perform the "role ratio calculation process" corresponds to the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program. In the combination of roles (continuation ratio) role ratio calculation program, the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the role ratio are calculated, and the display pattern when displaying the calculated combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the calculated role ratio on the display monitor 29, in other words, When,
The light emission patterns of the plurality of LEDs (first segment SG1 to seventh segment SG7 and dot SG8 shown in FIG. 67) on the display monitor 29 are determined.

The use area data area stores reference data (for example, various lottery data described above) referenced by the control program stored in the use program area. In addition, in the non-use area data area, data used for displaying the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the ratio of roles are temporarily stored. For example, the non-use area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning hole and a combination (continuous ratio) role ratio storage area for the total total. In addition, in the unused area data area, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a 1st storage area to a 1st
A ring buffer having a 0 storage area, a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) for each winning hole, and a combination (continuous ratio) role ratio storage area for 10 sets are provided.

In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the RAM area. , management data) is data of the number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), RA corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area
Each byte is divided and stored in the memory area of M102.

In addition, a use area program area in which a special symbol display output program and a game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 103, and a combination (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program and a combination (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program are stored. A different upper address (head address) is set for each stored non-use area program area.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, the upper address of the subroutine in the use area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored is "00".
is. The high-order address of the subroutine in the non-use area program area in which the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program and the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program are stored is "01".
It is said that Thus, the upper address of the program stored in the unused program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the used program area.

As call instructions for each of these programs, "CALLF" and "CALLmn" are used for the programs stored in the used area program area. Also, only "CALLmn" is used for the program stored in the non-use area program area, and "CALLF" is never used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area program area are "CALLF" or "
CALLmn", but here it is called with "CALLF". In addition, in the role ratio (consecutive ratio) role ratio display output program stored in the unused area program area and the role ratio (
Continuous ratio) The role ratio calculation program is called by "CALLmn" and is not called by "CALLF". Comparing these call instructions, ``CALLF'' is equivalent to ``CALL
mn", it is a call instruction with a shorter tone and lighter capacity.

The CPU 103 also has a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program omitting the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to an upper address is set in the Q register. For example, a fixed value "00" is set when calling a program stored in the used area program area, and a fixed value "01" is set when calling a program stored in the non-used area program area. be. In this way, the Q register can set a fixed value to the high-order address of the used area program area and then set a fixed value to the high-order address of the unused area program area to execute the program in the unused area program area. It is possible.

Next, the execution order of programs in interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 will be described. In principle, the CPU 103 executes programs in order of addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 55, when executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes "switch input processing" in the use area program area, and then executes "digit output processing 1" according to the special symbol display output program. Run. When starting interrupt processing, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. In "digit output processing 1", the CPU 103
A process of outputting a digit signal for special symbols, normal symbols, etc. obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, etc. is executed.

After executing "digit output processing 1", the CPU 103 jumps from the use area program area to the non-use area program area, and executes "digit output processing 2" according to the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program. . When jumping from the used area program area to the unused area program area, a fixed value "01" is set in the Q register. The same applies hereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 executes a process of outputting to the display monitor 29 a digit signal regarding the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio determined in the previous routine. Therefore, "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" are continuously executed.

After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 jumps from the non-use area program area to the use area program area, and performs processing according to the game control program. When jumping from the unused program area to the used program area, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. The same applies hereafter. The CPU 103 performs "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special figure processing", "ordinary figure processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", and "solenoid processing" in the processing according to the game control program. ”, “memory display processing” and “error notification processing” are sequentially executed. The CPU 103 generates a digit signal for a special figure, a normal figure, etc. by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 103 executes the "error notification process", and when the process according to the third program ends, jumps from the used area program to the unused area program, and performs the "role ratio calculation process". The CPU 103 performs "role ratio calculation processing"
, the yakuren (continued ratio) and the yakuritsu are calculated, and the digit signal for the yakuren (continued ratio), the yakurizu, etc. is generated. Thus, the interrupt processing in the CPU 103 ends.

In this way, the CPU 103 executes "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" in one interrupt process, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B,
The display of special symbols and normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 20 and the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the ratio of roles on the display monitor 29 are executed.

Next, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing another configuration of the used area program area and the unused area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, Figure 5
As shown in 7, in the usage area program area, "switch input processing", "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special figure processing", "general figure processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test Terminal processing, solenoid processing, memory display processing, error notification processing, digit output processing 1
” are stored. In the non-use program area, programs of "digit output processing 2" and "role ratio calculation processing" are stored.

Next, the execution order of programs in interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 57, in executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes "switch input processing" in the use area program area, and then
Processing according to the third program is performed. The CPU 103 performs "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special figure processing", "general figure processing", and "information output processing" in the processing according to the game control program.
"Ball Processing""Test Terminal Processing""SolenoidProcessing""Memory Display Processing""Error Notification Processing"
are executed sequentially. The CPU 103 generates a digit signal for a special figure, a normal figure, etc. by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 130 then performs "digit output processing 1" according to the special symbol display output program.
to run. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 103 outputs the digit signals of the special symbols and general symbols obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. Execute the process to output to such as. However, you may output the digit signal about the special figure and the normal figure etc. which were calculated|required by this routine.

After that, the CPU 103 shifts to the non-use area program area as it is, and executes "digit output processing 2" according to the combination of consecutive (continuous ratio) combination ratio display output program. CPU 103
In the digit output process 2, a process of outputting to the display monitor 29 a digit signal regarding the combination (continuation ratio) and combination ratio obtained in the previous routine is executed. Therefore, "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" are executed in succession.

Thereafter, after performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 executes the "role ratio calculation process" according to the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program. The CPU 103 calculates a combination of roles (repeated ratio) and a role ratio by a "role ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal about the combination of roles (repeated ratio) and the role ratio. Thus, the interrupt processing in the CPU 103 ends.

In this way, the CPU 103 executes "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" in one interrupt process, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B,
The display of the special figure and the normal figure on the normal symbol display device 20 and the display of the role combination (continuation ratio) and the role ratio on the display monitor 29 are executed.

For example, regarding the configuration of the used area program area and the unused area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 55 is area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. Also, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area is an area configuration pattern obtained by removing the jump processing between the used area program area and the unused area program area from the configuration shown in FIG. C.

In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 58(A), in one cycle of the interrupt processing in the CPU 103, a special symbol display output program → a combination (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program → a game control program → The process is executed in the order of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program. Also, in the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. Consecutive ratio) The processing is executed in the order of the role ratio calculation program.
In addition, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 58(C), a special symbol display output program → a game control program → a combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program → a combination of roles (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program are executed in order. Hereinafter, the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 58(A) is called first interrupt processing, the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 58(B) is called second interrupt processing, and the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. The processing is called third interrupt processing.

Next, a description will be given of the control of the display monitor 29 by the main board 11 to display the combination (continuation ratio) and the combination ratio. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items relating to the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the role ratio. FIG. 59A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 59(A), when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, the display No. 1 short-term winning combination (continuation ratio) is displayed first. The display No. 1 short-term winning streak (strong ratio) is displayed in green letters. In the display of display No. 1 short-term consecutive consecutive (consecutive ratio), FIG.
B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the second display portion 29B is displayed.
character "6." In addition, short-term winning streaks (straight ratio) are displayed on the third display portion 29C and the fourth display portion 29D. For example, when the short-term consecutive (continuous ratio) is 41%, the third display unit 2
The character "4." is displayed on 9C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. Display N
The display of o2's short-term interest rate (total ratio) is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 59B-2, the character "y" is displayed in the first display section 29A, and the character "7." is displayed in the second display section 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29
In D, a short-term role ratio is displayed. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display section 29C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display section 29D.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total winning combination (relation ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of display No. 3 total cumulative wins (combination ratio) is displayed in red. In the display of display No. 3, the total cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio), as shown in FIG. .” is displayed. Also, the third display section 2
9C and the fourth display portion 29D display the total cumulative wins (run ratio). For example, when the total cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) is 58%, the character "5."
The character "8." is displayed on 9D.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the display No. 4 total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4,
As shown in FIG. 59B-4, the character "A" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Also, the third display portion 29C and the fourth display portion 29D
, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. For example, when the total cumulative role ratio is 68%, the third display section 29C
, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display section 29D.

When the display of display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 59(B-5), display No. 1
short-term interest rate (continuation ratio) is displayed. Thereafter, display No. 1 short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) to display No. 4 total accumulated winning combination ratio are sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term winning combination ratio of display No. 2 to the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 are red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and the total cumulative winning combination ratio every 30 seconds.

Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the content described above and can be determined as appropriate. For example, in the above example, characters such as "y" and "A" are displayed on the first display section 29A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display section 29B to the fourth display section 29D.
Characters are displayed on the display section 29B, and the first display section 29A, the third display section 29C, and the fourth display section 2
A numerical value may be displayed on 9D.

Numerical values may be displayed on all of the first display portion 29A to the fourth display portion 29D, and predetermined ratios and divisions may be indicated only by the numerical values. Alternatively, two of the first display section 29A to the fourth display section 29D
A letter may be displayed at one location and numerical values may be displayed at the other two locations. Alternatively, a numerical range of characters may be set so that only characters are displayed on the first display section 29A to the fourth display section 29D. For example, "0" to "30" may be displayed as "P", "31" to "60" as "Q", and "61" to "100" as "R". Also, characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, and may be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Alternatively, meaningless symbols may be displayed instead of characters.

Further, when displaying numerical values on the display monitor 29, the displayed numerical values may be displayed in different colors or display modes. For example, in displaying the role ratio,
If the displayed role ratio is less than the predetermined value, it will be displayed in "blue", and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it will be displayed in "red".
may be displayed with . Further, if the displayed role ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be lit and displayed, and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be displayed blinking. For blinking display, the first
Any one of the display section 29A to the fourth display section 29D may blink. For example, all of the first display portion 29A to the fourth display portion 29D may be blinked, or two of the first display portion 29A and the second display portion 29B, or the third display portion 29C and the fourth display portion 29D may be blinked. may be made to blink. A non-blinking display unit may be lit or extinguished.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th memory area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the memory in the 0th memory area to the 10th memory area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage area for the total sum and total cumulative total for 10 sets, and the combination (continuous ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the role ratio and continuous (continuous ratio) for 10 sets and total cumulative are updated respectively. .

For updates in the active buffer and ring buffer, the 0th
The numerical value stored in the storage area is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Also, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, the numbers of the general winning prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas are 27, 81, 120, and 36, respectively.
Suppose they are "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time
When the total number of prize balls in the 0th memory area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls in the 1st memory area to the 10th memory area is changed to "27", "81", and "1", respectively.
20", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th memory area is set to "0" and the number of prize balls in the 10th memory area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the number of prize balls stored may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 shown in FIG. 49 includes a door opening sensor for detecting opening of the glass door frame 3a. The opening of the glass door frame 3a does not correspond to an abnormality when it is performed by an employee, but it often corresponds to an abnormality when it is performed by a person other than the employee. For this reason, in this embodiment, the door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a is the abnormality detection sensor group 2.
included in 6. The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main substrate 11 when detecting opening of the glass door frame 3a.

Door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 3a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a by a person other than the employee. Here, door opening is detected on the assumption that the glass door frame 3a is abnormally opened. Also, even if the glass door frame 3a is opened normally by an employee, the opening of the door is detected, but the employee or the like may be aware of the opening of the glass door frame 3a. Since there are many, it is possible to prevent a particular problem from occurring.

Next, control related to the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the ratio of roles executed on the main board 11 will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting interruption prohibition. In this initialization, for example, the RAM control area and RAM data area in RAM 102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used to display the role ratio and the role ratio stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 102 are maintained without being cleared. be. RAM10
The data used to display the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio stored in the non-use area 2 and other areas are cleared by operating the clear switch. Also, register setting of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. After initial setting, CPU 10
3 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. The consecutive (continuous ratio)/role ratio related processing is executed in this timer interrupt processing. Further, in the display switching control process (step S209 in FIG. 64) of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio)/role ratio related processing, the consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program is executed, and in the other processing Consecutive ratio) A role ratio calculation program is executed. The role ratio calculation processing in the role ratio (continued ratio) role ratio calculation program includes other processing of calculating the role ratio (continued ratio) and the role ratio. However, in the role ratio calculation process, it is possible to perform the processing of calculating the role ratio (continuity ratio) and the role ratio, and prepare a separate program corresponding to the other processing in the role ratio (continuity ratio) role ratio calculation program. good.

FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio)/role ratio related process. Main board 1
In 1, as shown in FIG. 61, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the consecutive (continuous ratio)/role ratio related process (step S101). Whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal has been transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, when a clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S101; YES), warning display preparation is performed (step S102), and step S
Go to 103. If no clear switch operation signal is transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (step S101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S103).
The winning information is that a game ball is detected by one of the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. Obtained by

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (step S104). The RTC 106 measures and determines whether the current time is within business hours. As a result, if the current time is within business hours (step S104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105). Whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed is determined by whether or not an open signal is transmitted from the door open sensor.

As a result, when the open signal is not output from the door open sensor and the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105; YES), the attacker wins a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time. (Step S106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which it is impossible to win in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of shots of game balls is 100 per minute, the upper limit can be determined as appropriate, for example, 100 per minute. More specifically, when the unit time is 1 second, the predetermined number of balls is 5.
Alternatively, the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is R
Measured by TC 106 . Also, the winning number of game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 .

As a result, if the attacker does not win a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time (
In step S106; NO), a prize ball number addition process is performed to add the number of prize balls according to the winning information acquired in step S103 (step S107). Note that the processing for adding the number of prize balls is performed when preparation for warning display is not performed. Here, if the preparation for warning display is being carried out, the process for the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio related processing is terminated. In the prize number addition process, the 0th shown in FIG.
General winning mouth (sode), general winning mouth (navel), normal electric prize ball (electric chew) in the memory area
, Add the number of each prize ball of the special electric prize ball (attacker).

In addition, in the number of winning ball addition processing, the general winning opening (Sode), the general winning opening (navel), the normal electric prize ball (electric chew), the special electric prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer Calculate the total prize balls for each number of prize balls. Here, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches the predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is transferred to the first storage area of the ring buffer. move. again,
The numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. Also, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed out (calculation timer=0) (step S108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed out (step S108
If ;NO), the process for the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio is terminated. If the calculation timer has expired (step S108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer=2000 ms) (step S109).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls obtained by adding in step S107 (total number of prize balls) is the calculated execution number (step S110). The number of calculation executions can be an appropriate number. A total of 600 prize balls
It can be slightly less than 0, for example 5900. Also, it is preferable that the calculated number of executions is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payout balls from 6000.

As a result, if the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) is not the calculated execution number (step S11
0; NO), and ends the yakuren (continuous ratio)/role ratio related process. Further, when the number of winning balls is the number of calculation execution (step S110; YES), the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated (step S111). Here, the short-term consecutive ratio (consecutive ratio), the short-term consecutive ratio, the cumulative consecutive ratio (
Total cumulative winning ratio (continuous ratio)) and cumulative cumulative winning ratio (total cumulative winning ratio) are calculated respectively. Therefore, the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term winning combination ratio, the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and the cumulative cumulative winning combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, preparation for display of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio is performed (step S112), and the series of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio related processing is terminated.

Moreover, when it is determined that it is not within business hours in step S104 (step S104; NO
), if it is determined in step S105 that the door frame is not closed (step S105; NO
), and when it is determined in step S106 that the attacker has won a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time (step S106; YES), an abnormality count error display preparation is made (step S113).

Next, the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio display control processing will be described. Figure 62
10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a role ratio display control process; As shown in FIG. 62, in the combination of roles (continuous ratio)/role ratio display control processing, it is determined whether or not preparations for display of the combination of roles (continuous ratio)/role ratio are completed (step S201). If it is determined that the combination of roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio display preparation processing has not been completed (step S201; NO), it is determined whether or not the preparation for display of abnormal count errors has been completed (step S202).

As a result, if it is determined that preparation for display of anomaly count errors has been completed (step S20
2; YES), an abnormality count error display is performed (step S203). Abnormality count error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 are "E" and "R".
” can be displayed, and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. Also, when performing an abnormal count error display, other display devices, such as the image display device 5 and the first special symbol display device 4A,
A predetermined abnormal count error display may be performed on the second special symbol display device 4B or the like, or the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, speaker 8L,
A predetermined alarm sound may be generated from 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be made on a 7-segment display provided on the main board 11 for displaying an error in the gaming machine. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

When the abnormal count error display is performed, the control processing for the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio display control processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S202 that it is not determined whether or not the display of the abnormality count error has been completed (step S202; NO), it is determined whether or not the warning display has been prepared (step S204).

As a result, when it is determined that preparation for warning display is completed (step S204; YES), warning display is performed (step S205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed on the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and "0" and "6" can be displayed on the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may blink to indicate that the warning is to be issued, or the display monitor 29 may display while changing the display color. Alternatively, the display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display on the display monitor 29 . Thus, it is preferable to make the warning display more conspicuous than other displays. It should be noted that after displaying the abnormality count error, it may be determined whether or not warning preparation is completed (step S204). Here, if it is determined that warning preparations have been completed (step S204; YES)), an abnormality count error display and a warning display are performed. In order to perform the abnormality count error display and the warning display on the display monitor 29, for example, the abnormality count error display and the warning display may be repeatedly performed at intervals of several seconds, for example, five seconds. Moreover, you may display by another display method.

Further, when the warning display is performed, other display devices, for example, the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. may be subjected to a predetermined warning display. The effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, speakers 8L, 8
A predetermined warning sound may be generated from R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be made on a 7-segment display provided on the main board 11 for displaying an error in the gaming machine. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

After displaying the warning, the yakuren (continued ratio)/role ratio control process is terminated. Moreover, step S20
If it is determined in step 4 that preparation for warning display has not been completed (step S204; NO), the consecutive (continuous ratio)/role ratio control process is terminated.

In addition, when it is determined that preparations for display of role ratios (relationship ratios) and role ratios have been completed (step S201;
If YES), display restriction confirmation processing is performed (step S206). In the display restriction confirmation process,
A process of determining whether or not to restrict the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the ratio of roles is executed. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not a door opening required error is detected (step S301). The door opening required error is an error that requires the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened forward from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. Except for the abnormal count error, there are various errors shown in FIG. A brief description of each of these errors is provided.

Error 1: Magnet Error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error due to the detection of a magnetic anomaly. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The magnet error is released by turning off the power switch. again,
Security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize Ball Abnormal Error The prize ball abnormal error is an error caused by detecting a predetermined number of abnormal prize balls, for example, 2000 or more. Abnormal prize balls are, for example, prize balls that are paid out when game balls have won more than the count number of the big winning opening. The prize ball abnormality error is released by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error A prize ball error is an error that occurs when a prize ball is not paid out even though it is detected that a game ball has entered the winning hole. A prize ball error is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the payout switch is detected or when an abnormality in the payout case is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by canceling the error that has occurred, such as canceling the error.
Error 4: Out-of-Ball Error A out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when a game ball to be paid out is not on the back side of the game board 2 when a game ball is detected to be out of a winning slot and a winning prize is detected. The out-of-ball error is an error that is canceled when the supply of game balls is started.
Error 5: Radio Wave Abnormality Error A radio wave abnormality error is an error due to the detection of radio wave abnormality. The radio wave error is
This error can be cleared by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error Main board communication failure error is an error caused by communication failure between the main board 11 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when the communication between the main board 11 and the payout control board is restored.
Error 7: Card Unit Error A card unit error is an error caused by poor communication between the main board 11 and the card unit. A card unit error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 11 and the card unit is restored.
Error 8: Full tank error A full tank error is an error that occurs when the tray (upper tray or lower tray) from which game balls are dispensed becomes full and game balls cannot be dispensed. The full tank error is canceled when the game balls are removed from the tray to which the game balls are dispensed and the tray is no longer full.
Error 9: Accessory first activation error Accessory first activation error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when the accessory is activated for the first time. The role product first activation error is canceled by pressing the operation button 30 .
Error 10: Illegal Winning Error An illegal winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball enters a large winning opening other than during operation. In the gaming machine 1, since the special variable winning ball device 7 is the only big winning hole, the fraudulent winning error is not detected, and this error occurs in a gaming machine having two or more big winning holes.
When an illegal winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The fraudulent prize winning error is canceled after a predetermined period of time, for example, 3 minutes, has elapsed since the security information was output.
Error 11: RTC-SRAM abnormal error The RTC-SRAM abnormal error is an error that occurs when the power switch is turned on, when an RTC abnormality is detected, and when backup failure is detected. The RTC-SRAM abnormal error is canceled after a predetermined time, eg, 60 seconds, has passed since it occurred.
Error 12: RAM clear error A RAM clear error is an error that causes a cold start when the power is turned on.
When a RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The time for which the security information is output is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is cleared after a predetermined time, such as 31 seconds, has passed since it occurred.
Error 13: Vibration detector abnormality error Vibration detector abnormality error is an error that is detected when the game machine vibrates.
The vibration detection device abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined period of time, for example, 60 seconds, has passed since it occurred.
Error 14: Door Open Error A door open error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 3a is released from the gaming machine frame 3 or when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame. The door open error is canceled when the opened glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 is closed.

Among these errors, errors 1 to 7 are door opening required errors that require opening the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. On the other hand, errors 8 to 13 are errors that do not require opening of the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error, and are not door opening required errors. Since the error 14 is a door open error, the game machine frame 3
is an unnecessary error.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 63, it is determined whether or not a door open required error has been detected, in other words, whether or not any of the door open required errors of error 1 to error 7 has been detected (step S3).
01). If the door open required error is detected (step S301; YES), it is determined whether or not the door open required error flag is set (step S302).

Here, if the door open required error flag is not set (step S302; N
O), the door opening required error flag is set (step S303). If the door open required error flag is set (step S302; YES), the process proceeds to step S30.
Proceed to 4.

Next, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time to continue the limitation of the display of consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) after the door opening required error is cancelled. The measurement timer is a timer that measures time when it is set, and does not measure time when it is reset.

The time to continue the restriction of the display of the combination of roles (continuous ratio) after the door opening required error is canceled can be, for example, the time required for canceling the door opening required error or a somewhat longer time than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Moreover, it is good also as long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required for canceling the door open required error may be uniformly fixed, or may be set according to the type of the door open required error. For example, errors 1, 2, 5, etc., which are canceled by turning off the power switch, shorten the time required to cancel the door opening required error, and error 3, such as the prize ball error, which needs to be canceled. may lengthen the time required to cancel the door opening required error.

If it is determined in step S304 that the measurement timer has been set (step S304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S305). If it is determined that the measurement timer has not been set (step S304; NO), the process proceeds directly to step S306. The state in which the measurement timer is set when the door open required error is detected is a state in which the door open required error occurs again after the door open required error is canceled once. Therefore, by resetting the measurement timer in step S305, if the door opening required error is detected again while the measurement timer is measuring the time, the door opening required error detected later is cancelled. Time can be measured with a measurement timer.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door open required error flag is set (step S30).
6). As a result, if the door open required error flag is set (step S306; Y
ES), the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display restriction is executed (step S307), and the display restriction confirmation process is terminated. If the door open required error flag is not set (step S30
If 6; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is terminated. For example, display of consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio display restriction is stopped.

If it is determined in step S301 that the door open required error is not detected (step S301; NO), it is determined whether or not the door open required error flag is set (step S308). As a result, when it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S308; NO), the process proceeds to step S306.

In step S308, if it is determined that the door open required error flag is set (step S308; YES), the door open required error is once detected and then the door open required error is canceled. (step S309). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S310).

If the measurement timer has not been set (step S310; NO), it is immediately after the door opening required error is canceled. In other words, this flow is executed only after the door opening required error is cancelled. At this time, a measurement time t (measurement timer=t) is set in the measurement timer (step S311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time during which the restriction on the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) after the door opening required error is cancelled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has timed out (t=0) (step S
312). Moreover, when the measurement timer is set in step S310 (step S3
10; YES), it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has timed out (t=0) (step S312).

When step S311 is passed, the measurement timer is not set to 0 (the time is not up) (step S312; NO), so the process proceeds to step S306. Also, after the measurement timer has been set, it is determined in step S310 that the measurement timer has been set (step S310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases as the flow loops, and when the time t has elapsed since the measurement timer was set, it is determined that the measurement timer has timed out.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has timed out (t=0) (step S
312). Here, if the measurement timer has expired (step S312; YES
), the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag are cleared (step S313). If the measurement timer has not timed out (step S312; NO), the process proceeds directly to step S306 without clearing the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag.

If step S313 is not passed, the door open required error flag is not cleared, so in step S306 it is determined that the door open required error flag is set (
Step S306: YES). Therefore, the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display restriction is executed. Further, when the process goes through step S313, the door open required error flag is cleared, so in step S306 it is determined that the door open required error flag is not set (step S306; NO). Therefore, the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio display restriction is not executed. In this way, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the combination (continuous ratio) role ratio display restriction. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, the detection of the door opening required error and the time after the door opening required error is canceled until the measurement time (= time to continue the role ratio display restriction) has passed During this time, display of consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratios is restricted, and display of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratios is not limited during other times.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether or not display restriction is to be executed based on the determination made in the display restriction confirmation process shown in step S206 (step S207). as a result,
If display restriction is to be executed (step S207; YES), display restriction is executed (step S
208), restricting the display of the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio. Then, the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and role ratio display control processing is terminated.

If the display restriction is not to be executed (step S207; NO), the display switching control process is executed (step S209), and the combination (continuous ratio)/role ratio display control process is terminated. The display switching control process is executed according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display switching control processing. As shown in FIG. 64, in the display switching control process, first, the display monitor 2
9, it is determined whether or not a short-term winning combination (running ratio) is displayed (step S401). If the short-term consecutive (continuous ratio) display is being performed (step S401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) display. (Step S4
02). The predetermined time here can be set to any time, for example 30 seconds (30000 ms).
can be Also, the predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds, such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or a time longer than 30 seconds, such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not passed (step S402; NO),
End the display switching control process. With the end of the display switching control, the display of the short-term ratio (continued ratio) continues. Moreover, when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S402; YES
), short-term role ratio display control is performed (step S403), and the display switching control process ends.
In the short-term role ratio display control, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the short-term role ratio display is set.

Further, when it is determined in step S401 that the short-term role series (continuous ratio) display is not performed (step S401; NO), it is determined whether or not the short-term role ratio display is performed (step S404). . If the short-term role ratio display is being performed (step S404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the short-term role ratio display was started (step S405).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not passed (step S405; NO),
End the display switching control process. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display continues. Further, when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S404; YES),
Cumulative winning consecutive (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S406), and the display switching control processing ends.
In the cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) display control, the cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) display is started is set. .

Further, when it is determined in step S404 that the short-term winning combination ratio is not displayed (step S404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) is being displayed (step S407). . When the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display is being performed (step S407; YES
In S), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the cumulative wins (running ratio) (step S408).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not passed (step S408; NO),
End the display switching control process. With the end of the display switching control, the display of the cumulative total (continued ratio) continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S408; YES
), cumulative role ratio display control is performed (step S409), and the display switching control process ends.
In the cumulative role ratio display control, the cumulative role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the cumulative role ratio display is started is set.

Further, when it is determined in step S407 that the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display is not performed (step S407; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative winning combination display is being performed (step S410). . When the cumulative role ratio display is being performed (step S410; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the cumulative role ratio display was started (step S411).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not passed (step S411; NO),
End the display switching control process. With the end of the display switching control, the display of the cumulative total (continued ratio) continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S411; YES
), short-term consecutive (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S412), and the display switching control process ends. In the short-term consecutive (continuous ratio) display control, the short-term consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the short-term consecutive consecutive (continuous ratio) display is set. . Thus, the display switching control process ends.

In the short-term role ratio display control in step S403, the digit output process 2 is executed by the second program. Similarly, cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display control in step S406, cumulative winning combination display control in step S409, short-term winning combination (
Also in continuous ratio display control, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed.

In the gaming machine 1 described above, the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 are made common,
Digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are executed in one cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 103 . One cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 103 is approximately 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control processing (game control program) is, for example, approximately 2 ms.

FIG. 66(A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow and the display state of the monitor when the third interrupt process is executed, and (B) is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. 4 is a time chart showing the relationship between , and the display state of a monitor or the like. Here, in the first period, the symbol (character) corresponding to "0" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1) and "y" is displayed on the display monitor 29 (SEG2), and in the second period, the first special symbol is displayed. Assume an example in which a symbol (character) corresponding to "1" is to be displayed on the symbol display device 4A and a symbol (character) corresponding to "6."

In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 58(C), the game progress process ( Game control program) is executed. Therefore, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (role combination (run ratio) role ratio display output program), as shown in FIG. 66(A). As shown, there is a delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1) clearly shows "0
is displayed, but there is a problem with the display on the display monitor 29 (SEG2). The problem with the example of trying to display the character corresponding to "y" on the display monitor 29 is that
Specifically, it is as follows. First display section 29A to fourth display section 2 in display monitor 29
9D has 8 LEDs arranged in 7 segments and lower right dot as shown in FIG.
It has Assuming that these LEDs are the first segment SG1, the second segment SG2, the third segment SG3, the fourth segment SG4, the fifth segment SG5, the sixth segment SG6, the seventh segment SG7, and the dot SG8, the second segment SG2, the 3rd segment SG3, 4th segment SG4, 6th segment SG6, 7th segment SG
7 is lightly displayed. This problem occurs, for example, because the control that does not turn on the display monitor 29 in the period before the first period has passed through to the first period. Also, regarding the character corresponding to "6." SG1, 5th segment S
G5 and dot SG8 are displayed lightly. This problem also occurs, for example, because the control that causes the display monitor 29 to turn on the character LED corresponding to "y" in the first period has been passed through to the second period.

On the other hand, in the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 66(B), the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) is followed by the digit output process 2 (combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display output program). . Therefore, there is almost no difference between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (role combination (run ratio) role ratio display output program). , there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, the symbol corresponding to "0" was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1) in the first cycle. In addition, all characters corresponding to "y" were clearly displayed on the display monitor 29 (SEG2). Thus, in the first interrupt process, the display monitor 29
It is possible to prevent display defects on the LEDs.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 displays the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term winning combination ratio, the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and the cumulative winning combination ratio. . Also, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 that controls the game so as not to hinder visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and windmills provided on the game board.

Moreover, the display monitor 29 is arranged in front when the main board 11 is viewed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered. Further, the main substrate 11 is
The heat radiation holes provided in the substrate case 201 are arranged at positions that are not directly in front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 from becoming difficult to see due to the heat radiation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 .

Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position not overlapping with each peripheral board other than the main board 11 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 .

Also, on the display monitor 29, the combination (relation ratio) and role ratio relating to the relationship between the prize balls paid out by passing the electronic chew or the attacker and the prize balls paid out by passing through the general winning opening are displayed. can do. In addition, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term winning streak (continuous ratio) and a cumulative winning streak (continuous ratio) every predetermined period. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, it is possible to contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

In addition, the display monitor 29 displays the combination of winning balls (continuous ratio) (short-term continuous ratio (continuous ratio)) and the role ratio (short-term winning ball ratio) for every 6000 winning balls. It is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit, such as 6000 numbers. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than when the number of prize balls is 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10000. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of winning balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

In addition, the display monitor 29 displays the combination (relation ratio) (short-term combination (
Consecutive ratio)) and role ratio (short-term role ratio), as well as cumulative consecutive ratio (continuous ratio) and cumulative role ratio are displayed by switching. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) or the short-term winning combination ratio with the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) or the cumulative cumulative winning combination ratio for each predetermined unit. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 housed in the crimped board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of fraud such as falsification of the display on the display monitor 29 .

Moreover, the gaming machine 1 is provided with detection means for detecting fraudulent means that appropriate predetermined information cannot be displayed. Here, fraud includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game arcade, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of winning prizes, and the like. game machine 1
is operated during the business hours of the game arcade, and there is a high probability that the counting of prize balls outside the business hours is a fraudulent act. In addition, the gaming machine 1 is to be played with the door frame closed, and counting the prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be a fraudulent act.

In addition, while the game machine 1 is playing, the game ball cannot be shot at a speed exceeding a certain speed.
For example, the maximum number of shots of game balls is 100 per minute. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls in one minute is approximately 100 pieces. Thus, for example, 100 per minute, or 12
If more than 20 winning game balls are detected per second, the probability of cheating is extremely high.

In the game machine 1, in order to detect fraud, when it is not during business hours, when the glass door frame 3a is not closed, and when more than a predetermined number of game balls have been awarded to the attacker per unit time, prize balls are determined. Eliminates addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress falsification of the information on the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) and the ratio of roles due to these frauds. Instead of the number of winning balls when the attacker wins a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time, fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time.

Further, in the gaming machine 1, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer provided in the RAM 102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

The ring buffer is provided with first to tenth storage areas, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area erased. Therefore, since the data to be erased is in units of predetermined units, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. In addition, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area of the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a partial storage area of the ring buffer, is erased. As a result, the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity and to calculate the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio using a large amount of data.

When erasing the data in the ring buffer, it is also possible to erase all of the data in the first to tenth storage areas, instead of only erasing part of the data in the tenth storage area. good. In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be more preferably prevented. Also, part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased at the beginning of business hours, and then a part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

Also, in the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer is explained.
Data other than the ring buffer, for example, a storage area for storing total cumulative totals, may also be partially or entirely erased.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1, each data of short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), short-term winning combination ratio, cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio), and cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. Note that the period for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. In addition, the displayed data is short-term consecutive ratio (continuous ratio), short-term consecutive ratio, cumulative consecutive ratio (continuous ratio),
Data other than the cumulative role ratio data may be used, or only part of these data may be used.

In addition, when displaying each data of short-term consecutive roles (continuous ratio), short-term consecutive ratio, cumulative consecutive ratio (continuous ratio), and cumulative consecutive ratio every 30 seconds, short-term consecutive consecutive ratios (continuous ratio) are The display is different from the data of Specifically, the short-term interest rate (total ratio) is shown in red, and the other data is shown in green. Therefore, it is possible to make the user recognize that new data will be displayed from the short-term consecutive ratio (continuous ratio).

Further, in the game machine 1, when an abnormal operation is performed, a warning is displayed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as abnormal operation. The clear switch is, so to speak, an emergency switch that is operated when an obstacle occurs in the calculation of the combination (relation ratio) or the ratio of roles. When this switch is operated, the data on the combination of roles (relationship ratio) and the ratio of roles can be falsified, so the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. Since the game machine 1 can warn of this abnormal operation by displaying a warning, it is possible to suppress fraud such as falsification of data.

Further, in the gaming machine 1, the first starter switch 22A, the second starter switch 22B,
Count switch 23, first general winning opening switch 24A, second general winning opening switch 24B
Based on the number of prize balls obtained based on the detection signals from the third general winning opening switch 24C and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, the combination (consecutive ratio) and the combination ratio are calculated. For example, using a sensor (count switch 23) individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passages for discharging the winning game media of the attacker and the winning game media of the electric chew merge, Based on the detection results, if the counter for the number of winning balls and the counter for the number of consecutive winning balls are calculated to calculate the winning combination (consecutive ratio) and the winning ratio, it is possible to identify which winning slot the payout is from. It is difficult to do, and there is a risk that the calculation of the Yaku ratio and Yakuren (Ren ratio) will become complicated. In this regard, the first
Starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, count switch 23, first general winning port switch 24A, second general winning port switch 24B, third general winning port switch 24C,
Detecting that the game medium has won a prize by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, and calculating the winning combination (continuing ratio) and the winning ratio based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, to each winning opening The number of prize balls can be determined based on the winning prize. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the winning combination (continuation ratio) and the winning ratio, and to perform the calculation with high accuracy.

Further, when the door opening required error occurs, it becomes necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. When the game machine frame 3 is opened, the main substrate 11 provided in the game machine frame 3 becomes visible from the outside of the game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is
For example, a player positioned outside the game machine 1 can also visually recognize it.

Here, in the gaming machine 1 described above, display of the consecutive (continuous ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is restricted when the door opening required error occurs. Therefore, even if the door opening required error occurs and the display monitor 29 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the combination (continuation ratio) combination ratio.

Further, the restriction on the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) on the display monitor 29 is executed when an error requiring opening the door occurs. Therefore, even when the player can visually recognize the display monitor 29 from the outside of the gaming machine 1 due to the need to open the gaming machine frame 3 due to the occurrence of the door opening required error, It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio (relationship ratio) from being seen.

In the gaming machine 1 described above, when the door opening required error occurs, the restriction on the display of the consecutive roles (continuous ratio) role ratio on the display monitor 29 is executed. It is also possible to limit the display of the consecutive (consecutive) ratios on the display monitor 29 when the machine slot 3 is opened. After the door opening required error occurs, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the restriction on the display of the role ratio (continuation ratio) on the display monitor 29 is executed, the player is notified of the role ratio (continuation ratio). Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio from being seen.

Further, the restriction on the display of the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio on the display monitor 29 is a predetermined time after the door opening required error is cancelled, specifically, measured by a measurement timer after the door opening necessary error is canceled. run until the specified duration has elapsed. Therefore, immediately after the door open required error is released, the game machine frame 3 is in a state of being opened even though the door open required error has been released. At this time, a player or the like can visually recognize the display monitor 29 from the outside of the gaming machine 1 . In this regard, by continuing the restriction on the display of consecutive roles (continuous ratio) until the continuation time measured by the measurement timer has passed after the door opening required error is cancelled, It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio (relationship ratio) from being seen.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the duration time is measured after the door opening required error is canceled, but after the door opening required error is canceled, the duration time after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is may be measured. In this case, the duration time may be uniform regardless of the type of the door-opening error, or may be set according to the type of the door-opening error. Alternatively, the time may be shorter than the duration measured after the door opening required error is cancelled.

The above-mentioned door opening required error is an example, and other aspects may be adopted. For example, if the methods of canceling errors are different, and error 1 to error 7 can be canceled without opening the gaming machine frame 3, these errors may be treated as errors other than the door open required error. Conversely, if the errors 8 to 13 are errors that cannot be cleared unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, these may be regarded as door opening required errors. Errors other than the errors shown in FIG. 65, such as an error in which a game ball cannot be fired from a batted ball launcher, an error in which balls cannot be rented, an error in which the game board moves, etc., can be corrected by a procedure for canceling the door opening. It may be regarded as an error required. Further, even if it is necessary to open the game machine frame 3 in order to cancel the error, the detection of the error is often detected outside the business hours of the game arcade. In the case of errors that usually require repair outside of business hours, such as an error, a ROM check screen error, an electric chew or a big prize opening that does not open, you may treat it as an error other than the door opening required error.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the aspect of the display restriction is to stop the display, but the display restriction may be in another aspect. For example, the display of the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio may be made lighter or smaller, or a display different from the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 29 . As a display different from the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio, an error display may be performed, or, for example, a display such as lighting all the segments may be used.

In the above game machine 1, since the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 are provided on the back side of the game machine frame 3, when the game machine frame 3 is opened Consecutive ratio) Although the display of the role ratio is limited, other modes may be adopted. For example, the main board 11 may be provided on the surface of the game board 2 at a position where it cannot be seen from the outside of the gaming machine 1 by the glass door frame 3a when the glass door frame 3a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 29 is also the surface of the game board 2, and when the glass door frame 3a is closed, the glass door frame 3a
may be provided at a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the game machine 1. In the gaming machine of this aspect, instead of limiting the display of the combination of roles (relationship ratio) when the frame 3 for the gaming machine is opened, the combination of roles (relationship) is displayed when the glass door frame 3a is opened. Consecutive ratio) Display of the role ratio may be restricted. In addition, regarding the continuation of restrictions on the display of role ratios (relationship ratios), the 3
Instead of setting the opening/closing of the glass door frame 3a as a condition, the opening/closing of the glass door frame 3a may be set as a condition.

Further, in the gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the use area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the combination (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program is stored in the non-use area program area. and a role ratio display program. In this way, by storing the special symbol display output program and the game control program, and the combined role (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program and the combined role (continuous ratio) role ratio display program in different areas, It is possible to make it easier to test programs related to games. Further, in the CPU 103, the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt processing. Therefore, the digit output processing can be simplified.

Further, in making the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 common, the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 are continuously executed. Specifically, FIG.
As shown in (A), in the first interrupt process, special symbol display output program → Yakuren (Ren ratio)
The programs are executed in the order of role ratio display output program -> game control program -> consecutive role (consecutive ratio) role ratio calculation program. Further, in the second interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 58(A), the game control program→special symbol display output program→continuous role (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program→continuous role (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program I am running the program in order. For this reason, in both the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, between the special symbol display output program (first interrupt process) and the role combination (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program (second interrupt process) The game control program (game progress control process) and the role combination (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program (the role combination (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation process) are not interposed. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a delay from occurring in the digit output process 2, etc., the malfunction of the LED display in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the display monitor 29 can be eliminated. It is possible to prevent this, and to clearly display patterns, characters, and the like.

When digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common, FIG.
or the execution procedure of the second interrupt process shown in FIG. 58(B). For example, any program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt process or the second interrupt process.

In addition, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, after executing the game control program, the combination (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program is executed. For this reason, before calculating the winning combination (continuous ratio) winning ratio, processing related to the main part of the game such as lottery for transition to the jackpot game state is executed. Therefore, game delay can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the combination of roles (continuation ratio) role ratio display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. In addition, after executing the special symbol display output program, before the consecutive role (continuous ratio) role ratio display output program is executed, specific programs such as the game control program and the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation program is not running. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display defect of the LED on the display monitor 29 .

Also, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area are called using "CALLF" with a short tone. On the other hand, a call using "CALLmn" is made to the yaku (continued ratio) role ratio display output program and the yaku (continued ratio) role ratio calculation program stored in the non-use area, and the tone is changed. Calls with short "CALLF" are never made. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly progress the game.

Further, the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 is determined by the consecutive (continuous ratio) role ratio calculation process in the non-use area. Role ratio calculation program and role ratio
The role ratio display output program is a program that has nothing to do with the progress of the game. Since "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, is used for a program that is not related to the progress of the game, it is possible to reduce waste in program processing.

In addition, in the non-use area, a call is made by "CALLmn" with a relatively long tone, so in the used area, a call by "CALLF" with a short tone can be made. Therefore, it is possible to use a command with a short tone and high versatility such as "CALLF" for a program related to game control executed in the use area.

Further, since the CPU 103 has a Q register and calls a program by the Q register, the program can be called without designating an upper address. However, since the upper address is set as a fixed value, even if it can be used in the used area program area, it may not be used in the unused area program area.
There was a possibility that versatility would decrease.

In this regard, the upper address of the used area program area in the CPU 103 is "00", the upper address of the unused area program area is "01", and the upper address of the unused area program area is the upper address of the used area program area. different from the address. Also, when calling a program stored in the used area program area, the Q register is set to a fixed value "00". Therefore, since the Q register can be used when calling the program stored in the use area program area, the program stored in the use area program area can be called simply by designating the lower address. In addition, since the upper address of the unused program area is different from the upper address of the used program area, the Q register is prevented from calling the program stored in the unused program area. When calling a program stored in the unused program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "01". Therefore, since the Q register can be used even in the unused program area, it is possible to use the Q register even in the unused program area while securing the versatility of the Q register.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the display monitor 29 is provided at the center of the back side of the main board 11,
Although it is arranged in front when the main substrate 11 is visually recognized, a display monitor may be arranged so that it can be easily visually recognized from an oblique direction. A plurality of examples will be specifically described below with respect to a mode in which the display monitor is arranged so as to be easily visible from an oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as a "display monitor arrangement mode").

The first display monitor arrangement mode is called the first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is called the second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is called the nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main substrate 11 similar to the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 51(A) is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and all the main substrates 11 have the same structure. Further, the main board 11 is housed in a board case 202, as in the example shown in FIG. 51(A). In addition, in the description of the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, left and right are based on the direction when the main substrate 11 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame is the left side.

[Arrangement of the first display monitor]
FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode.
As shown in FIG. 68, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 1 is placed on the back side of the main board 11 .
29A is provided, and a display monitor 130A is provided on the base member 129A.
The display monitor 130A is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 129A and the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

The base member 129A has a triangular prism shape with a right-angled triangular bottom surface, and is arranged such that its height direction extends along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side forming the right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular prism formed by the base member 129A is superimposed on the back surface of the main substrate 11, and the other side forming the right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle. A side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in a direction perpendicular to the back surface of the main substrate 11 . A side surface of the triangular prism including the side facing the right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle (hereinafter referred to as “inclined surface”) is arranged in an inclined direction with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11 .

The display monitor 130A is provided on the inclined surface of the base member 129A. The direction of the display monitor 130A is inclined with respect to the back surface of the main board 11 . Figure 69 shows
FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is released from the outer frame; Figure 69
2, when the gaming machine frame 3 to which the main board 11 is attached is released from the outer frame 3A, the display monitor 130A is positioned between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is arranged so that it faces the front when viewed from the side.

The display monitor 130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. are placed in For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Second Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 70A is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70A, in the second display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129B is provided on the back side of the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130B is provided on the base member 129B. The display monitor 130B is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 129B and the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 50, the main board 11 includes the game board 2 (see FIG. 2) provided in the game machine frame 3.
attached to the back of the The base member 129</b>B has a plate shape and stands on the back surface of the main substrate 11 . Also, the main substrate 11 and the base member 129B are substantially perpendicular to each other. The display monitor 130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 129B. For this reason, the display monitor 130B is arranged so that the surface of the upright portion of the main substrate 11 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 on the open portion side of the door frame faces the open portion of the door frame. are placed. Moreover, the display monitor 130B is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 11 .

The display monitor 130</b>B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged in a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 11 at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 11 .
Further, the main board 11 is attached to the back surface of the game board 2 provided in the game machine frame 3 .
For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

In the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 129A and 129B are housed in the board case 202, but the base members 129A and 129B may be formed in a mode projecting to the outside of the board case 202. good.

[Third Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 70B is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70(B), in the third display monitor arrangement mode, a buried inclined surface 11K is formed on the rear surface of the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG. The buried inclined surface 11K is formed to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

The embedded inclined surface 11K is formed as part of the printed base material of the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.
A display monitor 130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 11K of the main substrate 11 . Since the display monitor 130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 11K, when the game machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 130C can be viewed from the opening portion between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame. placed to face. Also, the main board 11 and the display monitor 130C are accommodated in the case 202 .

The display monitor 130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. are placed in For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Fourth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 71(A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71(A), in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129D from a first base member 129D1 to a fourth base member 129D4 are provided on the rear surface of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. A first display monitor 130D1 to a fourth display monitor 130D4 are provided on each of the first base member 129D1 to fourth base member 129D4. A display monitor 130D is formed by the first display monitor 130D1 to the fourth display monitor 130D4. The display monitor 130</b>D is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main board 11 .

The first to fourth base members 129D1 to 129D4 all have a common shape. This shape will be described using the first base member 129D1. The first base member 129D1 has a triangular prism shape with a right triangle bottom surface. This first base member 12
9D1 has the same shape as the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode has a size equivalent to the size of the four 7-segments and the lower right dot (see FIG. 51(A)). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1 has a size equivalent to one 7-segment and the size of the lower right dot. A first display monitor 130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1 can display one 7-segment and the lower right dot.

The first base member 129D1 is arranged on the back surface of the main substrate 11 at a position slightly to the left of the substantially central position in the height direction. The second base member 129D2 is arranged on the right side of the first base member 129D1, and the third base member 129D3 is on the right side opposite to the left side of the second base member 129D2 where the first base member 129D1 is arranged. are placed in The fourth base member 129D4 is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side of the third base member 129D3 where the second base member 129D2 is arranged. Thus, the first base member 1
29D1 to fourth base member 129D4 are arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction.

A second display monitor 130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 130D3 and a fourth display monitor 130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 129D3 and the fourth base member 129D4. Contents corresponding to the first display portion 29A of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed on the first display monitor 130D1 provided on the first base member 129D1.

FIG. 51A is displayed on the second display monitor 130D2 provided on the second base member 129D2.
is displayed on the second display portion 29B of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. Contents corresponding to the third display portion 29C of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed on the third display monitor 130D3 provided on the third base member 129D3. Contents corresponding to the fourth display section 29D of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed on the fourth display monitor 130D4 provided on the fourth base member 129D4.

The display monitor 130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. are placed in For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Fifth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 71B is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71B, in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129E, ie, first base member 129E1 to fourth base member 129E4, are provided on the rear surface of the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG. A first display monitor 130E1 to a fourth display monitor 130E4 are provided on each of the first base member 129E1 to fourth base member 129E4. A display monitor 130E is formed by the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4. The display monitor 130E is accommodated in the board case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

The first base member 129E1 to fourth base member 129E4 all have the same shape as the first base member 129D1 to first fourth base member 129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. Further, the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 are arranged on the first display monitor 130D provided on the first base member 129D1 to the first fourth base member 129D4.
Like the first to fourth display monitors 130D4, they are provided on the first to fourth base members 129E1 to 129E4, respectively.

The first base member 129E1 is arranged above the substantially central position in the width direction of the back surface of the main board 11 . The second base member 129E2 is arranged below the first base member 129E1, and the third base member 129E3 is arranged below the second base member 129E2. The fourth base member 129E4 is arranged below the third base member 129E3. thus,
The first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged side by side along the substantially vertical direction. Thus, the first to fourth base members 129E1 to 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

A first display monitor 130E1 is provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129E1. Similarly, a second display monitor 130E2 and a third display monitor 130E3 are mounted on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 129E2, the third base member 129E3, and the fourth base member 129E4.
, and a fourth display monitor 130E4, respectively. First base member 129E1
~ first display monitor 130E1 provided on fourth base member 129E4 ~ fourth display monitor 1
30E4 displays the first display section 29A to the fourth display section 29 of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG.
The contents corresponding to D are displayed respectively. Further, since the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged vertically.
The display monitor 130E4 is also arranged vertically. Therefore, the first display monitor 130E1
The 4-digit display on the fourth display monitor 130E4 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 may be arranged horizontally.

The display monitor 130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. are placed in For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens it. A confirmation of the ratio can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Sixth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 72A is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72A, in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129F is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 that houses the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F. there is The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130F is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130F may be arranged horizontally.

The base member 129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In addition, the display monitor 130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F has four 7-segments and a lower right dot (FIG. 51).
(A) reference). The board case 202 includes a board case main body 202A and a lid body 202A.
B. The base member 129F is mounted on the substrate case main body 202A of the substrate case 202.
and the lid 202B.

The display monitor 130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 and arranged along the horizontal direction. Therefore, when the game machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the whole can be visually recognized from the outside of the game machine 1 only by slightly opening the game machine frame 3 . Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens it. confirmation work can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Seventh Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72B, in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129G is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 129G. there is The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130G is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130G may be arranged horizontally. The base member 129G straddles the substrate case main body 202A and the lid member 202B of the substrate case 202, similarly to the base member 129F of the sixth display monitor arrangement mode.
02.

The base member 129</b>G is in the shape of a triangular prism whose bottom surface is a right-angled triangle, and its height direction is arranged along the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 . The right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle forming the bottom of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side on which the gaming machine frame 3 opens. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 129G is an inclined surface that descends from the side (right side) opposite to the side (left side) on which the gaming machine frame 3 opens toward the side on which the gaming machine frame 3 opens. A display monitor 130G is provided on this inclined surface.

The display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the board case 202 and arranged along the horizontal direction. Therefore, when the game machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the whole can be visually recognized from the outside of the game machine 1 only by slightly opening the game machine frame 3 . Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens it. confirmation work can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

In addition, the upper surface of the base member 129G provided with the display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is directed from the side opposite to the side where the game machine frame 3 opens toward the side where the game machine frame 3 opens. It is an inclined surface that descends Therefore, when the display monitor 130G is viewed from the side where the game machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130G can be easily seen. Therefore, it is possible to more easily perform the work of confirming the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[8th Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73A, in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129H is provided on the left side of the board case 202 that houses the main board 11, and a display monitor 130H is provided on the left side of the base member 129H. It is The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130H is
arranged vertically. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130H may be arranged horizontally.

The base member 129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In addition, the display monitor 130H provided on the left side of the base member 129H has four 7-segments and a lower right dot (FIG. 5).
1 (A)). The board case 202 includes a board case main body 202A and a lid body 202A.
2B. The base member 129H is mounted on the substrate case main body 202 of the substrate case 202.
It is provided in the substrate case 202 across A and the lid 202B.

The display monitor 130H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the board case 202 and arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3 .
The entirety of H is made visible. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio. confirmation work can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

[Ninth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73B, in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129I is provided on the right side of the board case 202 that houses the main board 11, and a display monitor 130I is provided on the right side of the base member 129I. is provided. The base member 129I, like the base member 129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, is arranged between the substrate case main body 202A and the lid member 2 of the substrate case 202.
02B and is provided in the substrate case 202 .

The base member 129</b>I has a triangular prism shape with a right-angled triangle bottom surface, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 . The right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle forming the base of the triangular prism is located on the right side. For this reason, the left side surface of the base member 129I is an inclined surface that leans to the right as it goes downward from above. A display monitor 130I is provided on this inclined surface. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130I is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130I may be arranged horizontally.

The display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 and arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3 .
The entire I is made visible. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the game machine frame 3 greatly, but only slightly opens the role combination (continuation ratio) role ratio. confirmation work can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

Further, the left side surface of the base member 129I on which the display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided is an inclined surface that leans toward the right side as it descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 130I is viewed from the side where the game machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130I can be easily seen. Therefore, it is possible to more easily perform the work of confirming the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

Further, the display monitors 13 arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode
Any of 0A to 130I may be provided in adjusting means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. The adjustment means includes, for example, a fixed portion fixed to the base members 129A to 129I or the embedded inclined surface 11K, and a mounting portion movable with respect to the fixed portion. Either one should be installed. The adjusting means may be a manual type that can be operated by a store clerk or the like by opening the game machine frame 3, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. It's okay. Also, in the case of an electric type, it may be operated from an office or the like via a communication device or the like.

The range in which the mounting portion can move may be, for example, a range of movement associated with movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, or a range of movement associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Also, the movement range may be a combination of the movement ranges associated with these movements. A display monitor 130 is provided as adjusting means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame.
By providing A to 130I, it is possible to make adjustments according to the wishes of the game hall where the game machine 1 is installed.

Although the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode described above each show the arrangement of the display monitors, these arrangement modes may be combined. For example, by combining the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the display monitors may be arranged across the upper surface and the left side surface of the board case 202 .

[A game machine equipped with a vane-shaped variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special game) that performs variable display is executed, and when the display result of the variable display in the variable display game (special game) is a big hit, a so-called jackpot gaming state is controlled. The digipachi type gaming machine has been explained. On the other hand, it is also possible to use a so-called wing type game machine in which a game ball passes through a specific area (V area) provided inside an openable and closable vane-shaped variable winning ball device to control the jackpot game state. good.
An example in which the present invention is applied to a wing type game machine will be described below. In the following, regarding the Hanemono type, differences from the game machine 1 described above will be mainly described, and common descriptions may be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a front view of a game machine provided with a wing-type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 75 is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided on a game board. As shown in FIG. 74, a pachinko game machine 501 has a glass door frame 502 shaped like a picture frame. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 503 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 502 . A batted ball supply tray 503 is provided below the batted ball supply tray 3.
A surplus ball receiver 504 that stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the game ball, and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) that adjusts the speed at which the hitting ball shooting device shoots game balls (that is, the strength of the spring that repels the game ball).
505 are provided.

The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device by rotating the operation knob 505 . Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 505 to the right, the speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device gradually increases. passes through the ball hitting rail and enters the left area of the game area 507 from above. As the operation knob 505 is further rotated to the right, the shot game ball enters the right area of the game area 507 from above. Therefore, by changing the amount of rotation while rotating the operation knob 505 to the right, it is possible to adjust the force of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device, and to adjust the area in which the game ball is hit. .

A game board is detachably attached to the rear surface of the glass door frame 502 . A game board is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes it and various parts attached to the plate-like body. A game area 507 defined by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board.

Approximately in the center of the game area 507, a vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520 is arranged. Below the vane-type variable winning ball device 520, a variable winning ball device 515 forming a first starting winning hole 511, a second starting winning hole 512, and a third starting winning hole 513 is provided. A winning ball entering the first start winning opening 511 is detected by a first starting opening switch 511a, and a winning ball entering the second starting winning opening 512 is detected by a second starting opening switch 512a. led to. Winning balls entering the third starting prize opening 513, which is enabled to win by opening the variable prize winning ball device 515, are detected by the third start opening switch 513a and guided to the back of the game board. The variable winning ball device 515 is opened by a solenoid 515a. Below, the first start winning opening 511, the second starting winning opening 512, and the third
The starting winning opening 513 is generically referred to as a "starting winning opening", or the starting winning openings 511, 512, 51
It can be expressed as 3. Also, the first starter switch 511a and the second starter switch 512
a and the third starter switch 513a may be collectively referred to as "starter switches" or represented as starter switches 511a, 512a, and 513a. A predetermined number of game balls, for example, 5 game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning the game balls in the start winning hole. The number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the starting prize winning opening may be common or may be different for each starting prize winning opening. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when game balls enter the first start prize-winning port 511 and the second start prize-winning port 512 is five, and the number of prize balls when the game ball wins the third start prize-winning port 513 The number of payouts may be two.

When the game ball enters the starting winning opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, the vane type variable winning ball device 520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By opening and closing control, the left opening door 576A on the left side moves leftward from the initial position, and the right opening door 576B on the right side moves rightward from the initial position. , left open door 57
6A and the right opening door 576B return to the initial position, the vane type variable winning ball device 520 is closed. In this way, the blade type variable winning ball device 5
The state in which 20 performs the opening operation is called the starting operation state. Hereinafter, the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520 may be referred to as an accessory. Various accessories are provided on the game board, and hereinafter, the term "accessories" refers to the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520. As shown in FIG.

On the rear side inside the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520, a performance display device 509 such as an LCD for performing performance display is provided. The effect display device 509 variably displays (variably displays) the effect pattern as identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 509 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of "left", "middle", and "right".

A special symbol display 508 for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520 . The special symbol display 508 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.

Above the special symbol display 508, there is provided a special symbol starting memory display 518 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered into the starting winning opening, that is, the number of starting memories. A special symbol starting memory display 518 displays up to four starting memory numbers in the winning order. The special symbol start memory display 518 increases the number of LEDs in the lighting state by 1 every time there is a valid start prize in the start prize openings 511, 512, 513. Then, each time a variable display is started on the special symbol display 508, the number of LEDs in the lighting state is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off).
In this example, the special symbol start memory display 518 shifts the lighting state each time the special symbol display 508 starts variable display. As will be described later, the effect display device 509 also displays the start memory number, so the special symbol start memory display 518 may not be provided.

To the left of the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520, there is a normal symbol display 51 that variably displays normal symbols.
0 is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 532 provided on the right side of the game area 507 and is detected by the gate switch 532a, the normal symbol (
In this example, a variable display of numerals on a 7-segment LED is started. In this embodiment, in the case of a hit, "7" is stopped at the end of the variable display, and in the case of a loss, "
7” are stopped and displayed. In the case of winning, the variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time. Incidentally, the winning probability of the normal symbol is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 510, a normal symbol start memory display 541 having four LED displays for displaying the number of passing balls that have passed through the gate 532 is provided. Each time the gate 532 is passed, the normal symbol start memory display 541 increases the lit LED by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 510 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

On the right side of the variable winning ball device 515, there is provided a big winning opening in which the opening/closing plate 516 is opened by the solenoid 521 in the specific game state (big hit game state). Opening/closing plate 51
6 is a means for opening and closing the big winning opening. Winning balls that enter the big prize opening are count switches 52
3 is detected. A predetermined number of game balls, for example, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning the game balls in the big winning opening.

Decoration lamps that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 507, and an out port 526 for collecting game balls that did not win a prize is provided at the bottom.

Two speakers 527 for emitting sound effects are provided on the upper left and right sides of the game area 507 . On the outer periphery of the game area 507, a top frame lamp 528a, a left frame lamp 528b
and a right frame lamp 528c. Furthermore, each structure in the game area 507 (
Decorative LEDs are installed around the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520, etc.). Top frame lamp 5
28a, the left frame lamp 528b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of decorative light emitters provided in the gaming machine.

A game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 507 through the hitting rail, and then drops in the game area 507 . When the batted ball enters the starting winning opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, if the variable display of the pattern can be started, the special design starts to be variably displayed on the special design display device 508, and the performance design on the performance display device 509. starts variable display. If it is not possible to start the variable display of patterns, and if the number of starting prize winning memories, which is the reserved memory of the variable display of special patterns in a special pattern display device 508, is not the upper limit number, the number of starting winning prizes is increased by 1.例文帳に追加That is, the lighting LED in the special symbol start memory display 518 is increased by one.

The variable display of the special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 508 stops when a predetermined time has passed. The special pattern at the time of stop is a big hit pattern (specific display result: specifically,
For example, when it is "3", "7"), it shifts to the first jackpot game state (jackpot game state started without going through the starting operation state) of the jackpot game states. Also, in the case of a small winning pattern (specifically, "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", "9"), it shifts to the starting operation state. do. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins in the special area provided inside the vane-type variable winning ball device 520, it shifts to the second jackpot game state (the jackpot game state started after passing through the start operation state). . It should be noted that the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state is the normal state. In addition, after the jackpot game state is completed, the variable winning ball device 5
15 is easily opened). The time saving state is the variable winning ball device 515
is opened a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times.
When the conditions for transition to the jackpot game state are satisfied before the game is opened 0 times, the game state is
The time saving state is shifted to the jackpot game state. In addition, when the variable winning ball device 515 is opened 100 times without satisfying the transition condition to the jackpot game state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the gate 532 is provided to the right of the game area 507 in this embodiment. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is controlled to the time saving state,
In order to pass the game ball through the gate 532, the game ball is shot (
It is advantageous to hit the so-called right hand. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment,
The big winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 507 . Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to make the game ball enter the big winning opening during the jackpot game, the game ball is shot (
so-called right-handed). On the other hand, in this embodiment, if it is neither a time saving state nor a big hit game (if it is a normal state), the game ball is shot aiming at the left side of the game area 507 (so-called left hitting).

A left gate 517 is provided to the left of the game area 507, and a game ball passing through the left gate 517 is detected by a left gate switch 517a. Also, the game area 507
A right gate 519 is provided on the right side of , and game balls passing through the right gate 519 are detected by a right gate switch 519a.

In this embodiment, when a transition of a predetermined game state is performed, control is performed to shift the game state based on the game ball passing through the left gate 517 or the right gate 519 .
Specifically, in this embodiment, when a big-hit pattern is derived and displayed, or when a game ball wins a specific prize-winning hole 566 in the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520, the big-hit game is immediately started. Instead, a big hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the gate.
In addition, in this embodiment, since the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 507 (the game ball is hit to the right during the big hit game), the game ball passes through the right gate 519 and the big hit is made. A game is started. It should be noted that the big hit game is not started based on the game ball passing through the left gate 517 or the right gate 519, but when the big hit pattern is derived and displayed, or when the specific winning ball in the vane type variable winning ball device 520 A big win game may be started immediately when a game ball enters the mouth 566, or a big win game may be started after a predetermined time has passed.

Also, in this embodiment, when the big hit game is finished, the game ball passes through the left gate 517 or the right gate 519, and the state is shifted to a state in which a new variable display can be started. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the left gate 517 when it is controlled to the normal state after the jackpot game ends because it is hit to the left in the normal state and to the right in the time saving state. If the game ball passes through the right gate 519, the state is shifted to a state where a new variation display can be started, and when the game ball is passed through the right gate 519, the state is shifted to a state in which a new variation can be started. Transition to a state in which display can be started. In addition, left gate 5
17 or the right gate 519 based on the passage of the game ball, but when the big win game is finished or a predetermined time after the big win game is finished. The state may be shifted to a state in which a new variable display can be started when the time elapses or the like.

Next, the vane type variable winning ball device 520 will be described. Wing-shaped variable winning ball device (accessory)
In 520, when the left opening door 576A and the right opening door 576B are opened by driving the open/close motor 575, a game ball can enter. The game ball that has entered the accessory 520 passes through the passage opening 57 and the like, and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 520 . In addition, in FIG. 75, a state in which the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 520 (difficult to enter) is indicated by a solid line. A state in which 576B is opened and the game ball can enter (easy to enter) the accessory 520 is indicated by a phantom line.

A left movable member 577 and a right movable member 578 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory 520, respectively. A moving portion of the left movable member 577 is a left movable portion 577A.
The moving part at 78 is the right moving part 578A. The left movable portion 577A is driven by the left movable portion drive solenoid 577B, and the right movable portion 578A is driven by the right movable portion drive solenoid 578B.
driven by The left movable portion 577A and the right movable portion 78A each move vertically.

A specific prize winning opening 566 forming a specific area is provided at the bottom of the accessory 520 . In addition, in the back of the position where the specific winning opening 566 is provided in the accessory 520, an exit is provided, and inside the accessory 520, there is a passage for distributing game balls to the specific winning opening 566 or the opening. is provided. A specific area switch 566A is provided in the specific winning opening 566, and a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 566 is detected by the specific area switch 566A, and a game ball that has entered an outlier is detected by an outlier area switch. be done. Special prize mouth 5
A predetermined number of game balls, for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter 66 and the exit. It should be noted that the number of prize balls paid out by winning game balls in the specific winning hole 566 and the outboard may be the same or may be different. for example,
The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the specific winning hole 566 may be 10, and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins a prize in an exit hole may be 3. Further, when a game ball enters the exit, no prize ball is paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

A game ball that has entered the accessory 520 enters a specific winning port 566, and a specific area switch 566
On the condition that it is detected in A, it becomes possible to shift to the second jackpot game state. In addition, role 5
When the game ball that has entered inside 20 wins in the out-of-bounds, it is not possible to shift to the second jackpot game state.

An example of how a game progresses in this gaming machine 501 will be described. In the gaming machine 501, when a game ball enters any one of the first start winning port 511, the second starting winning port 512, and the third starting winning port 513 in the normal state, a big win, a small win, or a loss occurs. A lottery (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "big hit lottery") that determines the is executed. As a result of the jackpot lottery, it is determined to be a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbols and the performance symbols is started, and the special symbol display 508 is stopped and displayed according to the result of the big win lottery.

When the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the special pattern display 508 displays a pattern (
After the symbol corresponding to the big win) is stopped and displayed, the game state is shifted from the normal state to the big win game state (first big win game state). In the jackpot game state, the opening/closing of the big winning opening by the opening/closing plate 16 is controlled 16 times (16 rounds, the permissible opening time for one round is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds, 7 rounds or 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot,
The accessory 520 is not controlled to be open. Further, when the result of the big win lottery is determined to be a big win, the accessory 520 may be controlled to be open.

When the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a small hit, the special symbol display 508 displays the symbol (
After stopping and displaying the pattern corresponding to the small hit, the accessory 520 is controlled to the open state and the starting operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 520 is in the open state for 0.9 seconds. The number of times to be in the open state (number of times of opening) is one time, two times or three times. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins the accessory 520 and furthermore, the game ball enters the specific winning port 566 and is detected by the specific area switch 566A, V winning occurs. When V winning occurs, the game state is shifted to a big win game state (second big win game state). A game ball enters the hole and V
When no prize is won, the second jackpot game state is not entered. That is, it becomes disengaged and maintains its normal state.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a loss, the special symbol display 508 displays the symbol (
After the symbol corresponding to the loss) is stopped and displayed, the accessory 520 is not controlled to the open state. In this case, the game state does not shift to the jackpot game state, and the normal state is maintained.

Incidentally, the jackpot includes a non-time-saving jackpot and a time-saving jackpot. In either case, when the variation of the special symbols is completed, the state of the 16-round big win game (first big win game state) is directly entered without going through the starting operation state, but in the case of the time-saving big win, the big win game ends. Later, the game state shifts to the time saving state (on the other hand, in the case of the non-time saving jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is the normal state).

There are three types of small hits, ie, first to third small hits. The first small win is a small win that the accessory 520 opens once in the starting operation state, the second small win is a small win that the accessory 520 opens twice, and the third small win is a small win that opens the accessory 520 twice. 520 is a small hit that opens three times. Also, in the case of losing, the accessory 520 does not perform the opening action.

In addition, when the accessory 520 performs the opening action in the first small win or the second small win, the second big win in the case of winning the V prize becomes a non-time-saving big win, and after the second big win game state ends, the normal transition to state. In addition, when the accessory 520 performs the opening action in the third small winning and wins the V prize, the second big winning becomes a time saving big winning, and after the second big winning game state is finished, the state shifts to a time saving state.

The gaming machine 501 also includes the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided in the gaming machine 1 described above.
The same main board and display monitor are provided, and this main board calculates the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the role ratio, and displays the calculated role ratio on the display monitor. The display monitor is arranged in front of the main board when viewing the main board so as not to hinder visibility. This point is the same as the gaming machine 1 described above. In addition, the procedure for calculating the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio, the display procedure, etc.
is similar to

The winning combination (continuation ratio) and the winning ratio in the gaming machine 501 can be obtained by the above formulas (1) and (2). The number of winning prize balls in the gaming machine 501 is determined by the winning of game balls in the variable winning ball device 515, the specific winning port 566 and the out-of-door in the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520, and the large winning port having the opening/closing plate 516. Refers to the total number of game balls to be paid out.

In addition, when the first jackpot game state is being executed, the number of consecutive winning prize balls in the gaming machine 501 is the number of game balls paid out by winning the game balls to the big winning opening provided with the open/close plate 516. refers to the total number. Also, when the second jackpot game state is executed, the opening and closing plate 516
It may be the total number of game balls paid out due to the winning of game balls for the big winning opening (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "big winning opening winning"), or the game balls paid out due to the big winning opening winning , Winning of a game ball to a specific winning opening 566 and a losing opening in the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520 at the time of V winning that triggered the transition to the second jackpot game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "opportunistic winning") It may be the total number of game balls paid out by .

``At the time of the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big winning game state'' in the opportunity winning may be the time of opening the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520 at which the V winning has occurred, or the V winning has occurred. It may include a series of opening due to winning the start winning opening that triggered the opening of the vane type variable winning ball device. For example, the third starting winning port 5 in which the number of times the blade type variable winning ball device 520 is opened is three times
The vane type variable winning ball device 520 is opened by the winning of the game ball to 13, and the opportunity winning when there is a V winning at the time of opening is specified by the vane type variable winning ball device 520 at the time of opening three times. It is possible to win a game ball for the winning hole 566 and the losing hole.

In addition, when the number of continuous prize winning balls is the total number of game balls paid out by the big winning opening prize and the opportunity winning prize, the winning to the specific winning opening 566 of the vane type variable winning ball device 520 and the off-going opening becomes the opportunity winning. Whether or not depends on whether or not the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big win gaming state occurs. For this reason, the total number of game balls paid out by winning the specific winning hole 566 of the vane-type variable winning ball device 520 and the winning hole (hereinafter referred to as "temporary storage opportunity winning prize ball number") is temporarily stored, and the second jackpot game is played. When the V winning that triggered the transition to the state occurs, the number of temporarily stored opportunity winning prize balls may be added to the number of continuous accessory winning prize balls as the total number of game balls paid out due to the opportunity winning. good. The timing of adding the temporary memory opportunity winning prize balls to the number of consecutive prize winning balls may be an appropriate timing. For example, it may be the timing of shifting to the second jackpot game state and counting the number of game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening, or counting the number of winning balls paid out by winning the big winning opening. When starting, the timing may be just before displaying the combination (run ratio) on the display monitor 29 during or after counting the number of game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening.

After storing the temporarily stored opportunity winning prize balls, the temporarily stored opportunity winning prize balls may be erased when the V prize that triggered the shift to the second big winning game state does not occur. When the game ball wins in the specific winning hole 566, the V that triggered the transition to the second big hit game state
Since a prize has been won, substantially, the total number of game balls paid out due to the win to the exit of the vane-type variable prize ball device 520 may be temporarily stored. The judgment that the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big winning game state does not occur is, for example, that the V winning has not occurred after a predetermined time has passed since the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520 was opened. can do.

In addition, as the role series (continuous ratio) and the role ratio displayed on the display monitor, the short-term role series (continuous ratio), the short-term role ratio, the cumulative role series (continuous ratio), the cumulative role ratio and so on. Also, the display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as the gaming machine 1 described above. Further, as the layout of the display monitor, various layouts described in connection with the gaming machine 1 may be used.

The gaming machine 501 described above is a gaming machine provided with a vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520 . In a gaming machine equipped with such a vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520, the main board displays the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio. Also, the display monitor is provided on the main board that controls the game so as not to hinder visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and windmills provided on the game board.

In addition, in the gaming machine 501 equipped with the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520, the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated in a manner different from that of the gaming machine 1. FIG. Even in the gaming machine 501 equipped with such a vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520, it is possible to calculate the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio and display them on the display monitor attached to the main board.

In addition, in the gaming machine 501, among the starting winning openings for opening and closing the vane-shaped variable winning ball device 520,
A variable winning ball device 515 is used as the third starting winning hole 513, but the starting winning holes are only those without a variable winning ball device such as the first starting winning hole 511 and the second starting winning hole 512. may be Also, the starting winning hole may be only a variable winning ball device such as the third starting winning hole 513 .

In addition, the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the third starting prize winning port 513 is added to the number of winning prize balls used for calculating the role ratio, but the first start winning port 511 and the second The number of prize balls paid out by the winning of the game balls into the starting prize winning port 512 is not added to the number of winning prize balls and the number of consecutive prize winning balls.

In addition, in the game machine 501, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole, a big winning lottery is executed.
It is also possible to adopt a mode in which a 0 opening operation is performed. Also, instead of the big winning lottery, a lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 520 is opened may be performed, or the big winning lottery and the variable winning ball device 520 may be carried out.
A lottery for the number of openings may be performed. Also, in the lottery for the number of openings, once,
In addition to drawing the number of times such as 2 times, 3 times, etc., 0 times may be included in the target of the number of opening times.

In addition, the game machine 501 is set with a jackpot game state (a first jackpot game state and a second jackpot game state), and the game machine 501 includes a vane-type variable winning ball device 520 and an opening/closing plate 516 .
A large winning opening is provided. On the other hand, a mode may be adopted in which a big win game state is set and only the vane-type variable winning ball device is provided without providing the big winning hole. In this case, in the jackpot game state, the vane type variable winning ball device performs opening and closing operations,
An opening operation for a certain period of time may be performed.

Further, in a mode in which only the vane-type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as a continuation condition of the jackpot game state. For example, when shifting to the jackpot game state, the maximum continuation round may be set so that the continuation of the next round may be determined when there is a V win during one round.

(Modified example regarding display control and display items of winning number information)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, items related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 41A and 41B, the main board 11 receives a passing gate designation command for designating which gate the game ball passed through.
(Game control microcomputer 100) to production control board 12 (production control CPU 1
20), the effect control CPU 120 can totalize the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B and display it in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the counting process when receiving a general winning mouth designation command that specifies which one of the 1st to 4th general winning mouths has been won, the number of gate passages for today (equivalent to A1), today's Gate passage ratio (equivalent to A2), number of gate passages in low base state (equivalent to B1), gate passage ratio in low base state (equivalent to B2), number of gate passages in high base state (
C1), the gate passage ratio in the high base state (equivalent to C2), the number of gate passages in the set period (equivalent to D1), and the gate passage ratio in the set period (equivalent to D2) are aggregated to obtain the first It can be displayed in area α. Also, these items can be aggregated for each gate (for each of the gates 41A and 41B) and displayed in the first area α.

(2) In addition, since the effect control CPU 120 receives a large winning slot winning command from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to tally the number of winnings to the large winning slot,
The number of prize balls provided based on the winning in the big prize opening can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the tally processing when receiving a general winning mouth designation command specifying which one of the first to fourth general winning mouths has been won, "the number of winnings in today's big winning mouth (A
1)”, “Ratio of prizes to today’s big prizes (equivalent to A2)”, “Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings to today’s big prizes (equivalent to A3)”, “Today The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the number of prize balls won in the big prize gate today to the total number of prize balls (equivalent to A4)”, “The number of prizes won in the big prize gate during the set period (equivalent to D1 )”, “Ratio of prizes to the big prizes during the set period (
Equivalent to D2)”, “Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the big winning opening during the set period (D
3)” and “ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the number of prize balls won during the set period to the number of prize balls awarded during the set period (equivalent to D4)”. then the first
It can be displayed in area α.

Here, ``the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the big prize hole today to the total number of prize balls of the day (equivalent to A4)'', ``the number of prize balls given during the set period When the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the big prize hole in the set period for the number (equivalent to D4) is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), that effect is notified. You can make it work. For example, in the first area α, it is possible to display a message saying "The percentage of prize balls for big prizes exceeds the reference value (60%)."

In addition, the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting prize opening controlled by the normal variable prize ball device 6B and the opening and closing control by the special variable prize ball device 7 are compared with the total number of prize balls. The total ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the big prize opening is a predetermined ratio (for example, 7
0%), it may be notified to that effect. For example, the first area α
, a message such as "Ratio of bonus balls exceeds the reference value (70%)" may be displayed.

(3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 100 on the main substrate 11 side, the effect control CPU 120 responds to each command received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the game ball enters each entry area. Although an example of tallying the number of game balls entering each entry area based on the above, the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side
In the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, the number of game balls entering each entry area is totaled, or the effect control CPU 120 is a game control microcomputer when the game ball enters each entry area Based on each command received from 100, it is also possible to tally the number of game balls entering each entry area.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side or the effect control CPU 1
The number of game balls entering each entry area (counter value corresponding to each switch) counted in 20 can be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 and displayed on the image display device 5 . For example, by outputting a command specifying the number of entries to each entry area counted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12, in the effect control CPU 120, to each entry area based on the command It is possible to specify the number of entries and display it in the first area α.

In addition, the number of entries into each entry area counted on the game control microcomputer 100 side is displayed on the display device provided on the main substrate 11, such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. You may make it display in . Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, By performing a specific display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol, it may be notified to that effect. It should be noted that the display device provided on the main board 11 for displaying the aggregated results is not limited to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc., and is used to display the aggregated results. A display device provided exclusively for the display may be used. Also, the display device may be in any form such as a lamp, LED, 7-segment, liquid crystal display, EL panel, or light guide plate.

The value of each counter (the number of entries into each entry area) stored in the RAM 102 is, for example,
A reset operation for resetting the game state flag stored in the RAM 102 (flag corresponding to the game state for enabling the game control microcomputer 100 to specify the variable probability state, time saving state, etc.) etc. For example, when performed by a clerk), it is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, or is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12, and the image is displayed. It may be displayed on the device 5 for a certain period of time. A reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 11 . The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 2, and uses the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 3 to rotate the game board 2 forward with respect to the game machine frame 3. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back side of the game board 2 can be operated.

(4) In the above embodiment, the winning number information (D1 to D
4) can be displayed in the first area α. or set by an operation on the game hall side), and the winning number information (corresponding to D1 to D4) in the set aggregation period may be displayed in the first area α. . For example, the number of winnings to the general winning openings per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (eg, 60 times/60 minutes). In this case, the fact may be notified.

(5) In addition, when no prize is won in a specific prize winning slot for a predetermined period of time, the first area α may be notified of the fact. For example, if the number of winnings to the general winning slots has not occurred for 10 minutes, the message "No general winnings for 10 minutes" may be displayed in the first area α. This predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game arcade side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30), or an operation by the player (for example, an operation using the operation button 30). may be settable by

(6) It should be noted that the above-described embodiment can be applied to a game machine equipped with a sorting device in which the winning ratio between the starting winning opening and the general winning opening becomes a specific ratio (for example, 1:1). , information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings to each winning slot can be displayed in the first area α. For example, JP 2014-
The gaming machine disclosed in 117434 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the first start winning port and the second start winning port. It is also possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the start winning opening and the general winning opening. The above-described embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine in which the distribution device alternately distributes game balls to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening, and the winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening is sent to the first winning opening. It can be displayed in area α. However, since the number of wins to the general prize gate is naturally determined according to the number of wins to the start prize gate, the ratio of the number of wins to the general prize gate to the number of wins to the start prize gate is displayed as shown above. you don't have to.

(7) In FIG. 46, the counting period can be set according to the player's operation, but the winning number information is reset according to the player's operation, and counting of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You can do it. For example, when the player performs an operation to start tallying, the first area α
The number of winnings to the general winnings opening displayed in is reset to 0, and then the effect control CPU 1
The number of wins to the general winning openings displayed in the first area α may be increased by one each time the controller 20 receives the general winning opening designation command.

In addition, it is also possible to change the tabulation period once set according to the player's operation before the set period elapses. For example, although the tallying period is initially set to 30 minutes, the player may reset the tallying period to 10 minutes before the set period elapses in order to know the tallying results quickly. In addition, although the aggregation period is initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation results for a longer period, the player performs a reset operation before the set period elapses to extend the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Also good. In addition, it may be possible to extend the set total period according to the player's operation after the set period has elapsed. For example, after the set totaling period of 10 minutes has passed and the totaling results for the 10 minutes have been displayed, the player performs an extension operation in order to grasp the totaling results for a longer totaling period. Extend the aggregation period by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (As a result, both the aggregation result of 10 minutes and the aggregation result of 60 minutes including that 10 minutes are obtained)
You can do it.

(8) In addition, in the demo screen displayed on the image display device 5, or in the first area α in the state where the game is being played (the state where the game end is not determined and the demo screen is not displayed) , an image explaining which of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening each winning opening provided on the game board surface is displayed. Also, the number of prize balls in each winning hole may be notified.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the game hall settings are prioritized over the player settings, but conversely, the player settings may be prioritized over the game hall settings. That is, the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (2
) on the selection screen, when the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon including the word "display" selected, the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control of FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). If the operation button 30 is pressed while an icon containing the word "not displayed" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. be done).

It is also possible to determine whether or not to display the winning number information according to the order of received setting operations, with the same priority given to the game hall setting and the player setting. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information with priority given to the last accepted setting operation (latest setting operation). For example, even if the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5(1) to 5(3). If set, information on the number of prizes won is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). Also, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 5(1) to 5(3) are set so that the winning number information is not displayed, the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is then set to the second position (display position). If so, the winning number information is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). On the other hand, even if the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. If so, the winning number information is not displayed (the display control in FIG. 44 is executed). In addition, Fig. 5 (1) ~
Even if it is set to display the winning number information on the player setting screen of (3), if the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) after that, the winning No number information is displayed (the display control in FIG. 44 is executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the display changeover switch 32 is operated by the store clerk of the game arcade to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 . By operating , it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 . While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5, the player cannot set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 (for example, FIG. 5 (1) to (3) It is also possible not to provide a setting screen on the player side. In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 only on the gaming arcade side.

Conversely, by operating the operation button 30, the player (and the store clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5. It is also possible to omit the means for enabling the setting of whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 only on the side (for example, omit the display changeover switch 32). In the case of such a configuration, the player and the store clerk of the game hall can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). . In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a setting operation common to the player and the game arcade.

(10) Winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described in FIG. is displayed on the display position (second position) only in the maintenance mode, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is set to the non-display position (first position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 5 . That is, it may be handled in the same way as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG. 3(a).

In this way, winning number information related to the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described in FIG. It may be information that can be displayed on the image display device 5 only when the game is performed, and that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state in which a player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed), a state in which the game end determination is not performed (a state in which a special game is being executed, a normal game, etc.) is being executed, and a jackpot game state), etc., the information is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the demo screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the start of power supply to the gaming machine. (before power supply to the game machine), or it may be possible to display only for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when an operation is performed to stop the power supply to the gaming machine. good.

(11) In addition, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) explained in FIG. It is also possible to display on the image display device 5 in the mode of . In the case of such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only the first area α The winning number information may be displayed. In other words, the display area of the winning number information may be made different between the period in which no game is played and the period in which the game may be played.

In addition, in the maintenance mode, the information on the number of winnings for all items that have been aggregated is displayed, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the game center side or by the player's operation, or Winning number information of a predetermined main item) may be displayed.
In other words, the items of winning number information to be displayed may be different between a period in which no game is played and a period in which a game may be played.

(12) In addition, in the game mode, while the demo screen is displayed due to the determination of the end of the game, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β. On the other hand, it is also possible to display the winning number information only in the first area α during a period in which the game end determination is not performed and the game is determined to be in progress. In other words, the display area of the win number information may be made different between the period during which it is determined that no game is being played and the period during which it is determined that the game is being played.

In addition, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the determination of the end of the game, the information on the number of winnings for all items that have been aggregated is displayed. During the period when it is determined to be medium, the win number information of some items (items set by the operation of the game arcade or the player, or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the items of winning number information to be displayed may differ between the period during which it is determined that no game is being played and the period during which it is determined that the game is being played.

(13) In the above embodiment, a specific image (error message, fourth pattern, decorative pattern,
and pending information), the display position and display range (image size) are not changed between the setting to display the winning number information (FIGS. 42 and 43) and the setting not to display the winning number information (FIG. 44) ( On the other hand, for other images (background images), the visible range is set to differ depending on whether the winning number information is displayed or not. Regardless of the form, as shown in FIG. 47, setting to display winning number information (FIG. 47(a))
Even if the display position and display range (image size) of all images including the background image other than the winning number information are shared with the setting not to display the winning number information (Fig. 47(b)) good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load due to the display/non-display setting of the winning number information.

(14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (image size) of the decorative pattern are
Setting to display winning number information (FIGS. 42 and 43) and setting not to display winning number information (FIG. 44)
), but the display position and display range of the decoration pattern may be changed according to the display/non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the decorative pattern display area 5 in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 48(a))
In the setting (FIG. 48(b)) in which the winning number information is not displayed at intervals of L, 5C, and 5R,
The intervals between the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be widened. In other words, when the winning number information is not displayed, the decorative symbols may be variably displayed using the entire screen. In this example, the decoration symbol display area 5L in which the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. In this way, when the winning number information is not displayed, the first
It is also possible to allow variable display or stationary display of decorative patterns in the area α. In this way, the entire screen may be used to perform the effect, thereby increasing interest.

(15) In the above embodiment, the game machine errors include magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, and radio wave anomaly. (abnormal prize balls, etc.), fraudulent prize winning abnormality in the big winning slot (abnormality in which a winning to the big winning slot is detected even though the big winning slot is not open), or malfunction of various parts of the pachinko machine 1 etc.

[Other Modifications]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. note that,
The control and configuration of the game machine shown in each of the above presentation forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the game machine shown in each of the above production forms and the following modified examples are shown. You may make it combine control and a structure of a game machine arbitrarily.

In the above-described embodiment, game balls that do not pass through the gate 41B are displaced from the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the members that define the flowing direction of the game ball. It shall be possible to win any prize. With such a configuration,
Even when the game ball does not pass through the gate 41B in the probability variable state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect the prize to be awarded to a general prize winning port provided downstream of the gate 41B, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game. Also, game balls that do not pass through the gate 41B may win either the third general prize winning port 50C or the fourth general prize winning port 50D at a higher rate than the game balls that pass through the gate 41B. . By adopting such a configuration, even when the frequency of the game ball passing through the gate 41B is low in the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize to be won in a general prize winning port provided downstream of the gate 41B. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Furthermore, by executing a specific effect based on winning a prize in a general winning slot, the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the above embodiment, executing a specific effect at a different rate depending on the game state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain game state and not executing the specific effect in other game states. . Further, in the above embodiment, the execution of the specific effect at different ratios according to the game period means that the specific effect can be executed only during a certain game period,
It also includes not executing a specific effect in other game periods.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to execute the production at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state, the production can be executed only in the first state. , which also includes not executing the effect in the second state. Here, the division between the first state and the second state is, in addition to the division according to the game state described above, the division according to the number of reserved memories, the division according to the execution period of the special game (special game classification of whether or not variable display is being executed), classification according to the type of variation pattern (for example, classification of whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect, or , classification of whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effect),
Classification according to specific production timing (for example, before the establishment of the reach state in the variation pattern with the reach production or after establishment, or before the execution of the pseudo continuous production in the variation pattern with the pseudo continuous production or after execution).

In the first to twelfth presentation modes, the specific presentation may be executed only in either one of (1) normal state and (2) probability variable state or time saving state. For example, (1
) Only in the normal state, the specific effect may be executed, and (2) in the variable probability state or the short working time state, the specific effect may not be executed. In addition, in the 13th to 24th production forms, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, and (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, either A specific effect may be executed only in one case. For example, (1) only in the period after the reach state establishment in reach fluctuation, specific effects can be executed, (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or in the period before reach state establishment in reach fluctuation, specific It is also possible not to execute the production.

In the first production form to the 12th production form, the gaming state is (1) normal state, or (2) depending on whether it is a variable probability state or a short time state, the execution ratio of the specific production, and the execution Although the type of the specific effect is different, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state, based on the effect execution conditions common to when the game state is the normal state, whether or not the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect to be executed The type may be determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the specific performance and the type of the specific performance to be executed may be determined based on the performance execution condition common to the variable probability state or the time saving state. . In addition, the classification of the game state is not limited to (1) normal state, (2) probability variable state or time saving state, for example, (1) high base state, (2)
It may be classified as whether it is in a high base state, (1) whether it is in a jackpot game state,
(2) The classification may be whether or not it is in a jackpot gaming state.

In the thirteenth production form to the twenty-fourth production form, the game period is (1) the period after the reach state establishment in the reach fluctuation, or (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state establishment in the reach fluctuation Depending on whether it is a period, whether or not to execute a specific effect and the type of specific effect to be executed are determined.
(1) Whether the number of retained memories is 1 or less, (2) Whether the number of retained memories is 2 or more,
(1) Is it a period during which the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed?
(2) The classification may be whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of decorative symbols is not executed.

Also, (1) a period during which variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed, or (2) a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is executed, It may be a division. Also, it may be divided into (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effect is performed, or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effect is performed. . Furthermore, whether it is (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect good.

In the first to fourth production forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth production forms, only one of the specific production A and the specific production B can be executed as the specific production, but both the specific production A and the specific production B may be executable. That is, when the winning condition is met, one of the variable result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect that meets the predetermined condition is executed (for example, if the number of pending memories is 1 or less, the variable result notice effect is executed. However, if the number of pending memories is 2 or more, the pre-reading announcement effect is executed), or both of them may be executed at the same time. For example, if the pre-reading announcement effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the display information (display part) corresponding to the pending memory, the above-mentioned variable result announcement effect (only voice effect, or voice effect and character effect) The look-ahead foretelling effect can be executed at the same time, and the player can grasp that both the variable result foretelling effect and the look-ahead foretelling effect are executed. Also, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display or the determination result at the time of start winning. For example, if the display result of the variable display that is executed when the winning condition is met is a big hit pattern, the variable result notice effect is preferentially executed, and the display result of the variable display that is executed when the winning condition is met. If there is a reserved memory that is determined to be a big hit in the determination at the time of start winning although it is a missing symbol, it is preferable to preferentially execute the look-ahead notice effect.

In the above-described embodiment, it is set whether or not to display the number of prizes won by the operation button 30 only during the period when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the player is in a non-gaming state (only when the demo screen is displayed). Although a possible example has been described, this is not limited to such a form, regardless of the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state), and the execution status of the special symbol game (special symbol Whether or not the variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the special game), the execution status of the general pattern game (whether the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the general pattern game ), it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of prizes won by the operation button 30 . That is, even during a period during which a game is played, for example, during a period during which variable display of decorative symbols is executed or during a period during which a jackpot game state is controlled, the operation button 30 can be used to determine whether or not to display the number of winnings. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, regardless of the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state), Game execution status (
Whether the variable display of special patterns is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the special game), the execution status of the general pattern game (whether the variable display of normal patterns is being executed, the reservation of the general pattern game The total number of wins in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of stored prizes.

In the above-described embodiment, there is no limitation on the period during which the display changeover switch 32 can be operated. , It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings. It is also possible to limit the period during which the setting operation is possible on the game arcade side without being limited to such a form. For example, as a configuration without the display changeover switch 32, even when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the game hall side, the setting screens shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) It is assumed that the operation buttons 30 are used for selection and determination. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of the special symbol game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed) , the number of reserved memories of the special game) and the execution status of the normal game (whether variable display of normal patterns is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal game), Fig. 5 (1) ~ The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled, the period during which the variable probability state or the time saving state is controlled, the period during which the special game is executed, the period when the reserved memory number of the special game is not 0, etc. The setting screens shown in 5(1) to (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operations on the game arcade side may be prohibited.

In the above embodiment, by switching the display changeover switch 32 that cannot be operated by the player, only when the setting is made to display the number of winnings to the general winnings on the game hall side (the operation unit is set to the second position) , a setting screen ((1) to (3) in FIG. 5) is displayed so that the player can set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings. Regardless of the form, both the player side and the game hall side can set whether or not to display the number of prizes won in the general winning opening as a configuration without the display changeover switch 32 that can be operated only by the game hall side. Common setting screen (similar to (1) to (3) in FIG. 5) for selecting and determining whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winnings by operating the operation button 30 screen) may be displayed. In the configuration for displaying such a common setting screen, even if the game hall clerk sets the display of the number of winnings to the general winnings not to be displayed, after that, the player can set the number of winnings to the general winnings. If it is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 5 by applying the received setting later.

In addition, by switching the display changeover switch 32 that can be operated only on the game hall side, the number of winnings to the general winnings is displayed (setting the operation unit to the second position). Common information (for example, the number of winnings to each general winnings slot and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting is made to display the number of winnings to the winnings slot. You can let them do it. In such a configuration, the display changeover switch 3
2, even if the common information is set not to be displayed by switching 2, if the common information is set to be displayed by operating the operation button 30 after that, the later received setting is applied. Thus, common information may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

In the above embodiment, the period (game state) in which the number of winnings in the general winnings can be displayed may be limited. For example, during the period in which the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the number of winnings to the general winning openings may not be displayed during the period from the establishment of the ready-to-win state to the derivation display of the fixed decorative patterns. . Further, in a predetermined game state such as a variable probability state or a time saving state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side determines whether the number of winnings in the general winnings opening can be displayed or not in which period (game state). It may be settable, or may be settable by the player's setting means (for example, the operation button 30).

In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player inputs the player ID (for example, the ID of the recording medium owned by the player or the personal identification ID registered on the website) with the operation buttons 30. By doing so, the game data including the number of winnings to the general winning slots after the input of the player ID can be aggregated, and the operation button 30 can be operated when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is finished. Then, the game data collected after the input of the player ID may be output to the image display device 5 as a two-dimensional code. A player captures a two-dimensional code (information that can specify a player ID and game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, and an information management server connected to the information terminal and the Internet. and the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code, and the information management server The game data managed by is updated. The player
The information terminal can be used to access the information management server and check the stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), so as a result, it is possible to grasp the number of prizes won in the general prize pool. becomes. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 5 is determined by setting means (for example, the display switch 32
), or may be set by the player's setting means (for example, the operation button 30).

In such a form, a privilege may be awarded to the player according to the number of wins in the general winning slots stored for each player ID in the information management server. for example,
When the number of prizes won in the general prize pool exceeds a predetermined number, a background image, application software, etc. that can be used on the information terminal may be given as a privilege to the player with that player ID. . Also, points corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning slot may be awarded to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points possessed by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be allowed to exchange part or all of the owned points for benefits.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained an example in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed. It may be something to report what has been done. For example, at the timing when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, a winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 5, and a winning notification sound effect or voice may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. You can do it. In the case of such a configuration, as in the above-described embodiment, setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side sets whether or not to notify that the game ball has won the general winning hole. It may be made possible, or may be set by the player's setting means (for example, the operation button 30).

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is also possible to notify the state of winning to the general winning hole. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the frequency of winning (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls to the game area, or the general winnings per hour). The number of winnings to the general winnings) may be displayed, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed according to the number of winnings to the general winnings or the frequency of winning. Also, when a prize is awarded to the general prize-winning slot, the winning to the general prize-winning slot may be announced by voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. Such voice notification makes it easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning prizes in the general prize winning openings. Also, when a prize is won in the general prize-winning slot, the hitting operation handle, the operation button 30, etc. may be vibrated. Such bodily sensation notification makes it easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning prizes in the general prize winning openings.

The number of winnings and the frequency of winnings in each general winning slot can be displayed on the image display device 5, and also output to a management device such as a hall computer communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to manage the number of prizes awarded to each general prize gate for each machine. This information can be used, for example, for maintenance of the gaming machine.

(2) In the pachinko game machine 1, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a prize in a general prize-winning hole, and a different sound effect than when a game ball wins a prize in another prize-winning hole such as a starting prize-winning hole. should be output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be made different for each of the general winning openings. Further, in such a configuration, when a specific general winning slot is won, the sound effect may not be output.

(3) In the pachinko game machine 1, it is also possible to change the execution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning hole. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning hole,
It is preferable that the execution ratio and effect mode after the change are continued until the execution ratio and effect mode of the advance notice effect change and are executed for a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable number of times of display.

(4) In the pachinko game machine 1, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decoration pattern variable display that is executed after the game ball has won the general prize winning opening, and the music is changed for a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined number of times of variable display. Until then, it is preferable to continue the music after the change. Further, when the number of winnings to the general winning openings reaches a predetermined value, a specific song (for example, a song during the jackpot) may be output. Also, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a general prize-winning slot or the number of game balls that have won a prize in a general prize-winning slot has reached a predetermined number, a player reproduces a plurality of music pieces (BGM). Music (BGM) may be selectable.

Further, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole, the music being reproduced may be continuously output. For example, when the big win game state is controlled, based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning hole, the music during the big win may be continuously output even after the big win game state is over. Also, a stage change may be executed to change the background image of the decoration pattern and the music (BGM) based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning slot. It should be noted that the destination stage (background image and music) may be changed according to which one of the plurality of general prize gates the player has won.

(5) In the above embodiment, the specific effect executed based on the winning of the general winning slot is the variable result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect related to the display result of the special game. The specific effect is not limited to such a form, and may be an effect unrelated to the display result of the special game. For example, an effect may be such that a general winning hole in which a game ball has not won is displayed among a plurality of general winning holes, and a character appears when a game ball wins in the general winning hole.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, although game balls are being shot into the game area,
When a game ball does not enter the general winning hole for a predetermined period of time, or when the frequency of winning the general winning hole is less than a threshold value, the image display device 5 displays that no winning of the general winning hole occurs. You may make it perform specific information, such as doing. In addition, in spite of the fact that the game ball is launched into the game area, if the game ball does not win a prize only in a specific general prize winning port among a plurality of general prize winning ports for a predetermined period of time, or if the game ball does not win a prize in a specific general prize winning port When the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying on the image display device 5 that no winning to the specific general winning slot has occurred may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko game machine 1, when simultaneous performance is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), according to the number of winnings to the general winning openings until the simultaneous performance is executed, or all at once A specific effect may be executed according to the winning in the general prize winning slot during the effect period. again,
The decoration design may be changed, the stop design may be changed, or a sliding effect may be executed according to the winning in the general winning opening during the variable display of the decoration design.

(8) In the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 is
The number of objects displayed in . Further, in the pachinko game machine 1, only the number of prize balls put out based on the winning to the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning to the general winning opening is accumulated. reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying on the image display device 5 "Over 100 shots!" may be executed. In addition, if the timing when the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the general prize hole reaches a predetermined number is the period during which the gaming machine error is notified based on fraud detection or failure detection, The notification of the game machine error is displayed with priority over the specific performance, and the reserved specific performance is executed after the end of the notification of the game machine error.

(9) In the pachinko game machine 1, a winning sound is output every time a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, and when a game machine error is informing, the game machine error notification sound is output rather than the winning sound. You may make it output preferentially. In addition, every time a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole, the image display device 5 displays a winning prize, and during notification of a game machine error, the display of the game machine error is given priority over the winning display. You can let them do it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the big winning opening and the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 5 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state]. In such a configuration, the displayed
When the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening is added to [the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state], the game to the general prize opening is also added. It is preferable that the number of winning balls to be paid out is added based on the winning of balls. In other words, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be increased apparently. In addition, according to the winning timing of the game ball to the big winning opening, [the number of winning balls paid out in the jackpot game state] is updated, and according to the winning timing of the game ball to the general winning opening, [in the big winning game state The display may be updated according to individual winning timings, such as updating the number of awarded balls].

(11) In the pachinko game machine 1, the number of winning balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, when the game balls enter the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B of the left gaming area 10A, 10 winning balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening of the right gaming area 10B When game balls enter 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko game machine 1, an effect may be executed to encourage a game ball to enter the general winning hole. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings, such as the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the 14th effect form, the plurality of An image display device 5 informs a general winning hole in which a game ball has not won out of the general winning holes, and executes an effect suggesting the player to aim at the general winning hole in which the game ball has not won. It's good to be Further, in a form in which a specific effect is executed based on the fact that game balls enter a plurality of winning holes in a specific order, such as the eighth effect form and the sixteenth effect form, the winning hole to be awarded and the It is preferable that the image display device 5 informs the player of the order in which the prize should be awarded so that the player can understand it. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, "Aim for the first general prize opening!"
After confirming the winning of the general winning opening 50A, next, "Aim for the first starting winning opening!" Aim for the general winning slot!" is displayed, and after the winning to the second general winning slot 50B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) In addition, if the game area 10 is provided with a guide path for the game ball heading for the general winning opening, and the entry sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. Alternatively, based on the detection of the game ball by the entry sensor, an effect may be executed to notify in advance that the game ball will enter the general prize winning opening. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole. In addition, a certain period of time is secured from the entry of the game ball into the general winning slot until the prize ball is dispensed,
An effect based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening may be executed within that period.

(14) When a stage on which game balls can roll is provided below the image display device 5, an entrance to a general winning opening and a guidance route leading to the general winning opening is provided on the stage. It may be configured such that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general prize winning opening or the entrance to the guide route.

(15) An effect may be executed in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 5 is updated each time a prize is won in the general prize pool. For example, the character grows each time a prize is won in the general prize pool, and when a predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the character has grown to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (grant of benefits, etc.) is executed. You can do it. In addition, each time you win a prize in the general prize gate, an effect that increases the gauge will be executed, and when the predetermined number of wins is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (a privilege will be given) etc.) may be executed. In such a form of presentation, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. You can let it be.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect to be executed (fluctuation result notice effect, pre-reading notice effect) differs depending on the game state when the winning condition is met, and the effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although an example with different sounds has been described, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed according to the game state without being limited to such a form. In addition, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, compared to the normal state, the production by the game effect lamp 9 and the played music are often flashy to improve interest, so the mode of the specific production is also more. It may be arranged in a flashy manner so that it is easy for the player to understand.

(17) Even though a certain number of game balls have been shot into the game area 10, if the number of winnings in the general winning openings and the winning frequency do not meet the reference value, the player is usually informed. Information of a game machine that is difficult to control, for example, a latent probability variable state, a limiter, etc., may be reported.

(18) In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is met has been described. When the winning condition is established in the state where the sum of the number and the second reserved memory number) is also 0, neither the variable result announcement effect nor the look-ahead announcement effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect unrelated to the display result of the special game (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of a specific music) as the specific effect.

(19) In addition, when the winning condition is established in a state where the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 0 Execution of the specific performance may be suspended, and thereafter, the specific performance may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed or at the timing when the number of reserved memories becomes 2 or more. That is, the specific effect is not executed immediately based on the establishment of the prize winning condition, but the specific effect that has been withheld based on the establishment of the condition for starting the special game or the establishment of the condition for starting the special game is executed. You can make it run.

(20) In the above embodiment, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the fact that the game balls do not win to the general winning openings (for example, "the number of winnings to the general winning openings is small too much.”) may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, the general It is preferable to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball will not win a prize in the winning hole. The store clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings by shooting the game balls into the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. Regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number, the image display device 5 displays that the game balls will not win to the general winning openings. You can do it. In addition, similar to the display control of the number of winnings to the general winning opening, based on the settings of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number in a predetermined period, the general The image display device 5 may display that the game ball will not win in the winning hole.

(21) In the above embodiment, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings in a predetermined period is greater than the predetermined number, it indicates that the game balls are excessively winning to the general winning openings (for example, "the general winning opening The number of prizes won is too large.”) may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, the general It is preferable to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball has won excessively in the winning hole. The store clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning state of the game balls into the general winning openings by shooting the game balls into the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 12 is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game information management device that manages the game information. The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a general winning signal when detecting the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (for example, a 1-pulse signal is output for each winning) ), the game information management device may manage the number of winnings to the general winning openings for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device stores, as game information, the number of wins to general winning holes per predetermined period (for example, one hour) and the number of winnings to general winning holes per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Alternatively, the winning rate to the general winning openings (the number of winnings to the general winning openings/the number of driven balls) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 increases the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 5 each time a prize is won in the general prize winning slot. The mode of the object displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed each time a prize is won in the winning slot. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winnings.

(24) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is set, the information of the number-of-winnings management table is displayed on the image display device 5 as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning slot). Although the example in which the notification is given by the speaker 8 is not limited to such a form,
Notification may be made by sound using L/8R, or by lighting/extinguishing control of the game effect lamp 9, decorative LED, and 7 segments. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which all the information in the winning number management table is notified, and only the information of the winning openings where the number of payouts, the winning rate, etc. are not within a predetermined reference range (or are within the reference range) are notified. You can do it.

(25) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is in effect, the information in the winning number management table is stored as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning slot) as shown in FIG. Although the example of notifying (displaying) in a manner unrelated to the effect executed in the game has been described, it is not limited to such a form, and even if it is notified in a manner corresponding to the manner of the effect executed in the game good. By notifying in a mode corresponding to the mode of presentation, it is possible to simply check the mode of notifying which type of model the information is, compared to the case of notifying only with table data as shown in FIG. can be easily comprehended. Note that the effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demonstration screen effect, a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, a jackpot effect, etc., and is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 5. Or it may be directed by a lamp. In addition, to notify in a manner corresponding to the aspect of the presentation means, for example, displaying or outputting a voice such that a character appearing in the announcement presentation or the ready-to-win presentation reads out the information in the winning number management table, or depending on whether or not there is a change. Regardless, the resident character displayed on the image display device 5 to give an advance notice or explain the game may output a display or a sound such that the information in the winning number management table is read aloud. In addition, the information of the prize number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game without being limited to the character image.

(26) In the above-described embodiment, information for store clerks (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning slot)
A mode changeover switch 31 operated to display the information of the prize number management table as
An example has been described in which the operating means such as is provided at a position where the player cannot operate and only the game hall clerk can operate. It may be provided at a position that is inoperable and that only relevant personnel such as inspectors, inspectors, and manufacturers of the gaming machine can operate. Also, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with ten counters of a maximum of 2 bytes was used as a storage area for storing information related to game wins. can also be set. At this time, the display monitor 29 described above displays two types of the above-mentioned role ratio (%) and the role ratio (continuation ratio) (%) from the total number of winning balls of the game media (prize balls) paid out from the game machine. The calculation method for doing this is not limited to the method described above, but may be as follows. A counter configured with a maximum of 4 bytes as shown in FIG.
When tallying the total number of winning balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls, the top 16
Calculations may be performed using bits. By the way, with a 4-byte counter, 4294836225 (4 bytes)/30
000 (number of balls won per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075/
365 days = about 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG.
may be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a main board 11C not provided with a display monitor,
A display substrate 11D may be provided separately from the main substrate 11C, the main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D may be connected by a harness 11E, and the display monitor 29 may be provided on the display substrate 11D. In this case, the main substrate 11C receives the calculation of the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 and the data used for these calculations. The main board 11C transmits the calculated role series (series ratio) and role ratio, as well as information on the control for displaying them, to the display board 11D via the harness 11E.
Send via The display board 11D may display the combination (continuation ratio) and the role ratio on the display monitor 29 based on the data transmitted from the main board 11C.

Further, the main board 11C and the display board 11D are mounted in a board case 201 which is a crimped board case.
Stored in A. A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201A, like the board case 201 shown in FIG. 51(A). By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D are completely enclosed in the substrate case 201A, thereby preventing fraudulent acts on the main substrate 11C. Also, the substrate case 201A is provided with holes and heat dissipation holes, and is provided with a predetermined seal, similarly to the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51(A). These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 77B, the display substrate 11D may be provided outside the substrate case 201B, which is a caulked substrate case, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display board 11D is connected to the main board 11C by a harness 11E.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77(C), the display substrate 11D may be enclosed in the substrate case 201C, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display board 11D is connected to the main board 11C with a harness 11E. Moreover, the substrate case 20
1C is also provided with a hole portion and a heat radiation hole, and a predetermined seal is provided in the same manner as the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51(A). These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29 . Note that the substrate case 20 that encloses the display substrate 11D
1C may not be a crimped board case or may be a crimped board case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a label is affixed to the surface of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. good too. Here, the label 11R may be arranged at a position that hides part of the display monitor 29 . As described above, since a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden by the label 11R, for example, when the glass door frame 3a is opened, the player cannot easily visually recognize the role combination (relation ratio) and the role ratio. can be Also, even when the label 11R is attached, it may be attached at a position that does not hide the display monitor 29 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable accessory is a large prize-winning opening (
Attacker) and the second starting prize gate (electric chew) are used, but instead of these electric accessories, so-called mechanical accessories that open and close by the weight of the game ball are used as movable accessories. good too. A 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 29.
A dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7 segments. Also, instead of the LED,
A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used. In addition, the display monitor 29 is provided with four-digit display portions of the first display portion 29A to the fourth display portion 29D, but the number of digits is not limited to four digits, and other numbers of digits may be used. For example, it may be 2 digits, 8 digits, or 10 digits.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 can be opened regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, such as the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the ratio of roles. You may need to take measures such as removing errors. For example, in order to pay out game balls, a replenishment mechanism for replenishing game balls (replenishment balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 2 . In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball jam occurs, the glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 may be opened to eliminate the ball jam and cancel the error. In the case of releasing the error by opening the glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 irrespective of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, it is necessary to etc. may not be displayed.

Also, at this time, in order not to display the yakuren (continuous ratio), the yaku ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29, an error in the display of the yakuren (continuous ratio), the yaku ratio, etc. should not occur. may be used as a condition. Errors in the display of role ratios and role ratios here are, for example, FIG.
Detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S101 shown in 3, acquisition of prize winning information during business hours determined in step S104, and detection of a predetermined number or more of prizes for an attacker per unit time determined in step S106. good. By making it a condition that no error has occurred in the display of such a combination of roles (repeated ratio) and role ratio, etc., the player can
It is possible to suppress the situation where information such as consecutive ratio) and role ratio is seen.

In addition, regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 is opened to cancel the error. It is also possible to wait for a predetermined period of time, for example, one minute, until the role ratio and the like are displayed, and then display them after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. After the occurrence of the error is canceled, it is often the case that the cause of the error occurrence cannot be completely removed, and similar errors continue to occur. By displaying the combination of roles (repeated ratio), the role ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the information of the combination of roles (repeated ratio), the role ratio, etc. can be displayed to the player even when such an error occurs. You can prevent the situation from being seen. The predetermined period can be arbitrarily set, and may be longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Also, the predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of failure of the image display device 5, the predetermined period for the ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

Further, the main substrate 11 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 29, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying an error. This error indicator is preferably located remotely from the display monitor 29 . Specifically, the display monitor 29 is arranged on the right ⅓ position of the main board 11, and the error indicator is located on the main board 1.
1 may be arranged at the left ⅓ position of 1. In addition, in order to make the display monitor 29 easier to understand, the display monitor 29 may be printed on the substrate case 201 with characters indicating where the display monitor 29 is located on the main substrate 11, or a sticker may be pasted on the substrate case 201. You can leave it. Moreover, the display monitor 29 may be provided on a payout control board which is a part of the main board 11 .

(29) In the above embodiment,
Taking the pachinko machine as an example, we explained how to calculate the role ratio (%) and the consecutive ratio (%) and display them on the display monitor.
) or a value corresponding to the winning combination (running ratio) (%), and these values may be displayed on a display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, like the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 described above.

A role ratio or a role ratio (ream ratio) in a slot machine is, for example, a payout of game value (game value, hereinafter also referred to as "medals") accompanying the progress of the game of the slot machine. is in operation, and whether or not the slot machine is loaded with any accessory other than the first class special accessory.

For example, as accessories, a first class special accessory, a second class special accessory, and a normal accessory are set,
If the slot machine is not equipped with a first-class special accessory as an accessory and only other accessories such as normal accessories are installed, the role ratio is the operation of the accessory with respect to the total number of medals paid out. It is calculated by the number of medals paid out in the middle. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the first class special accessory as accessories and no accessory other than the first class special accessory is installed, the winning combination (continuation ratio) is the total payout of medals. It is calculated according to the number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory for the number.

An example of a method for calculating the winning combination (running ratio) (%) in the slot machine will be described below. Here, an example will be described in which only the first class special accessory is mounted as the special game state with the first class special accessory as the special game state. In the slot machine, when the number of bets is set, the variation of the symbols can be started, and a prize is generated according to the result of the variation of the symbols. Winning in the slot machine includes granting prizes accompanied by the granting of game values, replay winnings that allow the start of symbol fluctuations without setting the number of bets, and shifting to a special game state in which the occurrence probability of granting prizes is increased. There are bonus prizes. Here, the winning combination (continuation ratio) (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of gaming value ( Equivalent to the total number of winning balls in the pachinko machine described above), the cumulative total of gaming value obtained by winning prizes as a result of symbol changes during the period when the special game state is entered (the above-mentioned (equivalent to the number of consecutive winning balls in a pachinko game machine). For example, if the number of medals, which is an example of the game value obtained during the period of 6000 symbol changes, is 16000, prizes are awarded during the transition to the special game state. If the number of medals obtained by
0.56 obtained by dividing by 16000 is Yakuren (run ratio) (%).

Also, the main board in the slot machine is provided, for example, in the back of the outer frame. Therefore, when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the appearance of the main board is different from that of the game machine 1 when the main board is viewed from the outside of the slot machine. Since reels and the like are housed in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than that of the pachinko game machine. Further, due to its structure, the main board of the slot machine is often attached to the back of the outer frame (the inner surface of the plate material on the back side). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, the light may not reach the main board sufficiently. Numerical values, characters, etc.) are preferably displayed brightly with a large amount of light.

Further, in the slot machine, the display monitor is arranged so that it can be easily viewed from an oblique direction with respect to the main board provided at the back of the outer frame. An arrangement that facilitates visual recognition from an oblique direction is, for example, an arrangement in which, when the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the opening between the door frame and the outer frame faces the front. By arranging the display monitor in this way, the clerk, etc.
When confirming the consecutive (continuous) role ratio, the clerk or the like can confirm the consecutive (continuous) role ratio only by opening the game machine frame 3 slightly without opening it greatly. . Therefore, it is possible to easily perform confirmation work of the consecutive roles (consecutive ratio) role ratio.

When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, when the door frame is opened from the outer frame, as an arrangement facing the front when viewed from the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, it has an inclined surface like the base member 129A shown in FIG. The display monitor may be attached to the inclined surface of the base member whose surface faces the opening between the door frame and the outer frame.
Alternatively, the inclined surface may be an embedded inclined surface formed in the main substrate. In addition to these, a display monitor may be provided on a base member such as one of the base members 129A to 129I on which the display monitors 130A to 130I are provided. Further, when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board and the main board and the display monitor may be housed in the board case, or the display monitor may be placed outside the board case housing the main board. may be provided.

Further, these display monitors may be provided in adjusting means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitors with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. Since the display monitor is provided in the adjustment means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, the adjustment according to the wishes of the game hall where the slot machine is installed is possible. It can be carried out. Also, the adjusting means may be manual or electric.

Although the main board of the slot machine is provided in the back of the outer frame, it may be provided in another position. For example, it may be provided on the right side or left side of the outer frame when viewed from the player side. When the display monitor is provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. be able to.

Further, in the slot machine, as in the pachinko game machine, the main board may be provided on the back side of the door frame. However, slot machines do not have a game board equivalent to a pachinko game machine, and the door frame is provided with a viewing window for viewing the reels.
The main substrate may be provided at a position avoiding this viewing window. Also, in a pachinko game machine, instead of providing the main board on the back side of the game board, the main board may be provided on the back or on the left and right sides of the outer frame like a slot machine.

In addition, although an example of displaying the calculated role ratio (%) and role consecutive (continuous ratio) (%) on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided on the main board is shown, the payout control is not limited to this. A display monitor may be provided on another substrate such as a substrate, a game board surface, a game machine frame (underframe), or the like. In addition, it is not limited to providing a dedicated display monitor for displaying the role ratio (%) and the role ratio (continuation ratio) (%), and an existing display device (for example, the image display device 5, for displaying an error 7-segment display, credit display or payout number display in a slot machine, etc.) may be used to display predetermined information such as win ratio (%) and win ratio (combination ratio) (%).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine described above, the predetermined information is the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination (cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) and cumulative winning combination), but other information may be used. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the predetermined information may be the number of game balls paid out (=the number of prize balls). Also, in the slot machine, the machine split (= (the number of medals paid out / the number of medals inserted)
×100) or the difference between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals. Further, these numerical values may be information calculated for each predetermined number of games or for each predetermined number of inserted medals. In addition, predetermined information such as role series (representative ratio), role ratio, machine allocation, etc. is stored for a predetermined period of time, for example, 400 games or 60 games.
It may be calculated for 00 games and the predetermined information for each number of these games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may also be displayed.

Some slot machines are provided with so-called settings. A setting is a numerical value that divides the probability in a slot machine into stages, for example, setting 1 to setting 6
Steps are provided. Information such as role ratios and role ratios displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each setting, or when displaying for each setting, the settings may also be displayed. good too.

Also, some slot machines allow one game to be executed with different numbers of inserted medals (number of bets). For example, the number of insertions (number of bets) for executing one game is 1 to 3
One game can be executed by selecting one of the medals and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as winning combination (running ratio) and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each number of inserted coins (number of bets). There are also slot machines in which the required number of inserted coins (the number of bets) varies depending on the game state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of inserted coins is two when the game state is bonus, and the required number of inserted coins is three when the game state is not bonus. In such a slot machine, it may be possible to display information such as winning combination (running ratio) and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the gaming state and the number of inserted coins.

In addition, in the slot machine, the predetermined information includes, for example, a winning combination (repeated ratio) and a winning ratio calculated based on the normal bonus and the special bonus, and for example, an advantage other than during a bonus in the game state of the slot machine. When a section and a non-advantageous section are set, the ratio between the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section is displayed. good too. The display monitor also displays, as predetermined information, the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as "the number of games in the advantageous section"), the number of games in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section, in addition to the role ratio. A ratio (hereinafter referred to as “advantage/non-advantage ratio”) may be displayed.
The number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the advantageous/non-advantage ratio may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the role ratio (repeated ratio), or may be displayed with a time difference using a common display monitor. good.
For example, using a common display monitor, the number of games in the advantageous section → the ratio of advantageous/non-advantageous → short-term (
consecutive ratio)→short-term winning ratio→accumulated consecutive winnings (continuous ratio)→accumulated winning ratio→advantage zone game number→ . . .

Further, the number of games in the advantageous interval may be the number of games in the ongoing advantageous interval while the advantageous interval is continuing, or may be a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000G in the past. Alternatively, it may be the number of games in the advantageous section played during a predetermined period, for example, on the current day. The advantage/non-advantage ratio may be the number of games per 3000 G in the past for a predetermined number of games, for example, or may be the advantage/non-advantage ratio for a predetermined period of time, for example, on the current day.

Also, the ratio between the difference between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the advantageous section and the number of difference between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the non-advantageous section may be displayed. The point is that the ratio between the medals paid out in the advantageous section and the medals paid out in the non-advantageous section should be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section. By lowering the medal payout ratio in the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce fluctuations in the increase or decrease of medals. In addition, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, the advantageous section may be limited to certain limits, such as a predetermined number of games, an upper limit on the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section, or a machine discount during the advantageous section. .

The advantageous section is a section in which the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of inserted medals (mechanical rate) is higher than that of the non-advantageous section. Since the machine rate is high, it is an advantageous section for the player. Advantageous sections are during the bonus period when the regular and special accessories are in operation, during the replay time (RT), during the assist time (AT),
For example, during assist replay time (ART). The machine ratio in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but it may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT
etc). If the machine rate in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the more the game is continued, the more medals are consumed. be advantageous.

During the replay time means, for example, a state in which the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay is higher than in the state other than during the replay time. During the replay time, since the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, the consumption of medals can be reduced, so the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

"During the assist time" means, for example, a state of navigating the operating procedure when a conditional device is established in which a winning combination is displayed on the activated line when a prescribed condition such as a prescribed operating procedure is satisfied. . Navigation of the operation procedure includes, for example, navigation of the stopping order when three reels are stopped in a predetermined stopping order, or navigation of a predetermined symbol when stopping and displaying the symbol. It happens. During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated in a state other than during the assist time, so it is uncertain whether or not the operation procedure will be executed. However, during the assist time, the operation procedure is navigated. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the activated line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

During the assist replay time means a state in which the replay time and the assist time are executed at the same time. The slot machine is designed to progress the game by increasing or decreasing medals by combining these advantageous intervals and non-advantageous intervals. Here, each advantageous section such as during the bonus, during the replay time, during the assist time, and during the assist replay time is more advantageous than the non-advantageous section, but the degree of advantage may be small.

All or part of these may be used as the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information. For example, in a slot machine in which a plurality of advantageous intervals are provided as advantageous intervals, the advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be limited to only the advantageous intervals in which the machine discount exceeds 100%. Further, even if the same type of advantageous section is used, whether or not it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be changed depending on the transition condition. For example, in a slot machine that shifts to a replay time immediately after the bonus period ends and after a predetermined number of games, for example, 1000 games have passed since the bonus period ends, the replay shifts immediately after the bonus period ends. The time period is regarded as an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information, and the ratio displayed as the predetermined information is calculated during the replay time, which is shifted after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus period. It may not be set as an advantageous section for

During the replay time that shifts immediately after the end of the bonus period, it is a so-called chance replay time in which the player who has obtained many medals during the bonus period is given a chance to obtain further medals. On the other hand, during the replay time, which shifts after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus period, it is a so-called relief replay time in which a player who has lost many medals is given relief for the lost medals. The chance replay time is defined as an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information, and the remedial replay time is defined as an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information. You can choose not to.

In addition, in calculating other numerical values such as a combination of roles (relationship ratio), role ratio, or machine ratio in a slot machine, one game is executed with a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals being inserted for replaying. , the calculation may be performed assuming that three medals are paid out. Alternatively, for replays, it is considered that the game has not been played, and
, role ratio, or other numerical values such as machine division may be performed.

Also, in the ring buffer provided in the RAM 102 in the pachinko game machine, 600
It memorizes the number of prize balls by winning to each prize opening for every number of 0 prize balls. On the other hand, in the ring buffer of the slot machine, for example, the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section for each predetermined number of medals to be paid out may be stored. The number of medals to be paid out for the section and the non-advantageous section may be stored. The predetermined number here is, for example, 50
It may be 0 sheets or 1000 sheets. Any other appropriate number of sheets may be used. Also, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. Assuming that the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is 15, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in 400 games is 6000. For this reason, the maximum number of payouts in 400 games is 2.
It can be stored with a margin in a byte storage area.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the production control board (sub side) of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of ready-to-win production and the presence or absence of pseudo consecutive, one fluctuation when starting the fluctuation Although an example of transmitting a pattern designation command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the production control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the main board (main side), in the first command, determines whether or not there is a pseudo run, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc. before reaching reach (if not reaching reach, so-called before the second stop)
Send a command (e.g., previous variation pattern specification command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (e.g., previous variation pattern), and in the second command, the type of reach and whether or not there is a re-lottery effect, etc. After becoming a reach ( If the reach does not occur, a command (for example, post-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, post-fluctuation pattern) after the so-called second stop may be transmitted.

In this case, the effect control board may control the effect in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the main board may notify the variation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board may select the specific variation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. ), the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands in this manner, the amount of data that must be stored as variation pattern specifying commands can be reduced.

During the variable display of the special symbols, only one type of missing symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. . Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the image display operation of the image display device for executing the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation of the speaker, and the lighting operation of the game effect lamp and the decorative LED can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but is a gaming machine that encloses game media and pays points based on the occurrence of winning. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that provides

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Alternatively, the software may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

Also, in the above embodiment, the first starting opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) to be tallied
The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), and the number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls) will be recorded in the ring buffer. It has a recording capacity for at least 11 sets, and is designed to be updated for each set. It can be a form with a kind. Specifically, RWM 10000 for total cumulative storage and RWM 1000 for total cumulative storage
1, consecutive ratio (synonymous with “role ratio (continuity ratio)” in the above embodiment), information on game winning to display the role ratio (first start opening (navel) and general winning opening (so The number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), and the number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls)) by winning a prize in De) are accumulated in RWM 10000 and 10001. to memorize it. Furthermore, by deleting the information on the winning of the game from the RWM 10000 for storing the total cumulative total at a predetermined timing, the continuous ratio calculated based on the tally from the time when it was deleted to the present,
The role ratio can be displayed as a short-term continuous ratio and a short-term role ratio.
The continuous ratio and the winning ratio calculated based on the tally of 1 can be displayed as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative winning ratio. By adopting such a configuration, it is sufficient to have a plurality of storage areas for simply accumulating and storing information relating to game wins, and it is not necessary to store and update a certain amount of information like a ring buffer. It is preferable because

Note that the predetermined trigger can be, for example, the turning on or off of the power supply.
According to this, it is possible to aggregate the information about the winning of the game from the time the power is turned on, that is, to display the consecutive ratios and role ratios of the day as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term consecutive ratios. Also, in this case, save the accumulated value of the RWM 10000 for total accumulated storage when it is erased.
If an RWM 10002 is provided and the accumulated value of this RWM 10002 is displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term role ratio, the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term role ratio for one day before power-on can be displayed, which is preferable. By using a real-time clock or the like at a predetermined timing, for example,
It is also possible to accurately aggregate short-term continuous ratios such as one hour and short-term role ratios.

The predetermined trigger may be a game-related trigger such as setting change, door opening, or touch sensor detection of a steering wheel. According to this, even if it is not a period of one day like when the power is turned on, the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term continuous ratio are determined in a predetermined period (between setting change to setting change, door opening to door opening, etc.). It is preferable because the role ratio can be displayed. As the predetermined trigger, the same effect can be obtained even if the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of hits reaches a predetermined number.
It should be noted that two areas may be formed in the RWM area of the memory space instead of having two RWMs like the RWMs 10000 and 10001 .

Further, in the above embodiment, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79 may be used in place of the ring buffer format. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, an area 20000 for aggregating information on game wins, an area B1 for storing the accumulated results of information on game wins for the 6000th game, and an accumulated result for the 12000th game are stored. region B2, 1
8000...A region B1 for storing the cumulative result of the information regarding the winning of the 60000th game
0 is set. In the area 20000, information related to the winning of the game is added and updated. Information (number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), special electric prize balls number (attacker's award number of balls)) is stored in area B1. Furthermore, on the condition that the number of prize balls reaches 12000, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2,
The information on the winning of the game cumulatively stored in the area 20000 is stored in the area B1. In this way, the information of the area 20000 is put into the area B1 every 6000th, and the information of the other areas is shifted. Also, after the number of prize balls reaches 66000, area B1
The information about the winning of the game stored in 0 is erased, and the information in the area B9 is controlled to move to the area B10.

By configuring in this manner, the continuous ratio and the winning combination calculated based on the aggregation of the area 20000 can be displayed as the accumulated continuous ratio and the cumulative winning combination. Further, by subtracting the value of area B10 from area 20000, it is possible to display the latest 60000 (that is, approximately 10 hours) consecutive ratios and role ratios as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term role ratios. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 20000, it is possible to display the last 6000 consecutive ratios and role ratios (for approximately one hour) as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term role ratios.

Also, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 79, only the area B10 may be provided as shown in FIG. According to this, it is not possible to obtain detailed continuous ratios and role ratios for about one hour, but it is possible to display the latest 60000 short-term continuous ratios and short-term role ratios (for about 10 hours), so the capacity is also large. As little as possible is preferable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81 can be used in place of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it has an RWM 30000 for total cumulative storage and an RWM 30001 for total cumulative storage, and information (first
Number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), number of special electric prize balls (attacker's prize) number of balls)) to RWM3000
0 and 30001 are accumulated and stored.
The total cumulative storage RWM 30000 accumulates and stores the number of prize balls from the first, while the total cumulative storage RWM 30001 waits without storing the number of prize balls from the first to 60000. The number of prize balls is accumulated and stored from the 60001st prize ball. According to this, the difference between RWM 30000 for total cumulative storage and RWM 30001 for total cumulative storage is 60000.
By subtracting the RWM 30001 for total cumulative storage from the RWM 30000 for total cumulative storage, 60,000 consecutive ratios and role ratios can be displayed as short-term continuous ratios and short-term role ratios. In addition, the continuous ratio and role ratio calculated based on the sum total of RWM 30000 for total cumulative storage,
It can be displayed as a cumulative consecutive ratio and a cumulative winning ratio.

Also, in the above embodiment, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 82 may be used in place of the ring buffer format. Specifically, total counters 40000, 40001 and a total total counter 40002 are provided, and the total total counter 40002 contains information related to the winning of the game (first starting port (navel) and general The number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls)) It is made to accumulate and memorize from the first number. total cumulative counter 4
The continuous ratio and the winning ratio calculated based on the aggregation of 0002 can be displayed as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative winning ratio.

On the other hand, two counters of cumulative counters 40000 and 40001 are used to obtain 600
00 consecutive ratios and role ratios are displayed as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term role ratios. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 40000 starts tallying from the first prize ball, and clears when the number of prize balls reaches 60000. On the other hand, the accumulative counter 40001 starts tallying from the 30000th ball, and clears when the 90000th prize ball is reached. Then, when trying to calculate the short-term continuous ratio and short-term role ratio for 60000 pieces, for example, in the 30001st to 60000th pieces, the calculation is based on the tally of the cumulative counter 40000, and the 60001st to 9000th pieces
For the 0th item, calculation is performed based on totalization of the cumulative counter 40001 .
In this way, since the cumulative counters 40000 and 40001 tally the number of winning balls so as to be shifted by 30000th, when trying to display the short-term consecutive ratio and the short-term winnings ratio, it is possible to display the short-term consecutive ratio and the short-term winning ball ratio within at least 30000. That is, it is possible to display the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term role ratio within 5 hours ago. According to this, it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity and to display the relatively recent short-term consecutive ratio and short-term winning ratio, which is preferable.

(Performance display)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, performance information (described later) can be displayed in place of or in addition to the display of the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the ratio of roles. Hereinafter, displaying performance information is also referred to as performance display. In the gaming machine 1, for example, a display monitor (display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110) provided on the main substrate 11
etc. (described later) to display the performance.

83 and 84 are explanatory diagrams related to performance information. FIG. 83A shows an example of performance information items displayed by the gaming machine 1 . The gaming machine 1 can display a real-time base value and a previous total base value as performance information, as shown in the item name column of FIG. 83(A). The real-time base value of the item number “bL” is the base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the number of game balls used (fired) in the normal state, up to 60000 (0 to 5
9999), which indicates the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls being measured. The previous cumulative base value of the item number “b6” is the base value (previously measured cumulative value) for every 60000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls used (shot) in the normal state, which is the number of 60000 game balls measured last time. .

The normal state in performance display is a state managed or controlled by the game state flag described above. Specifically, it is a state in which both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off (except for the state in which the round playing flag is on). That is, in the performance display, the state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are off is referred to as the normal state. The probability variation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation state. A time saving flag is a flag which shows whether it is a time saving state. The in-round game flag will be described later.

In addition, although the normal state in the performance display has been described as a state where all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are off, other displays (the main board 11 side and the effect control board side 12
In the display related to the number of prize balls, etc.), the state when all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are in the off state may be the normal state. For example, Figure 45
The items of B1 to B4 in , may be tallied when any of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are in an off state. Also, for example, in connection with FIG. 51 (B), it was explained that the combination of roles (continuation ratio) and the role ratio may be calculated in consideration of the game state, but for example, the normal state (probability variation flag, time saving flag, It is also possible to calculate and display the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio in the state where all of the round game flags are off.

FIG. 83(B) shows values totaled (updated) by the game control microcomputer 100 for performance display. The base values shown in FIG. 83(A) are calculated based on the values shown in FIG. 83(B). Specifically, the above-mentioned base value is the number of winning balls by all winning holes (the number of winning balls by winning the first general winning hole 50A, the number of winning balls by the second general winning hole 50B, and The number of prize balls, the number of prize balls from the third general prize gate 50C, the number of prize balls from the fourth general prize gate 50D, the number of prize balls from the first start prize gate, the number of prize balls from the second start prize gate, It is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls by the big winning opening. That is, in the gaming machine 1, in the normal state, each value shown in FIG. 83(B) is aggregated, and the aggregated value is used to calculate the real-time base value and the previous accumulated base value shown in FIG. 83(A). Calculate and display.

FIG. 83C shows how performance information is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, the performance information is displayed on the display monitor provided on the main board 11 in the display mode shown in FIG. 83(C). Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 1 displays (blinks or lights up) "bL." ,
A number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "--" is displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of the total four digits. Note that the lower 2 digits of the total 4 digits are the original real-time base value, but the upper 2 digits are
Display of all four digits including digits is sometimes referred to as real-time base value display. Further, when displaying the previous cumulative base value, the gaming machine 1 displays (blinks or lights up) “b6.” indicating that it is the previous cumulative base value in the upper two digits of the total four digits. A number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "--" is displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of the total four digits. note that,
The lower two digits of the total four digits are the original previous cumulative base value, but the display of all four digits including the upper two digits may be referred to as the display of the previous cumulative base value.

FIG. 84(A) shows sections (aggregation section, evaluation section) according to the total number of outs (total number of shots). The "factory shipment test section" in FIG. 84A is a section in which the total number of outs is less than 300. The “first interval” is the first interval among the intervals managed for every 60000 total outs (0 to 59999). "Second section" is the second section of the above sections. "Third section" is the third section among the above sections. In FIG. 84(A), subsequent sections are omitted.

FIGS. 84(B) to 84(F) show how performance information is displayed according to each section (and the number of pieces in each section). In each of FIGS. 84(B) to 84(F), the left side shows the display mode of the real-time base value, the right side shows the display mode of the previous accumulated base value, and the double-headed arrow in the center shows the real-time base value and the previous accumulated base value. It indicates that it will switch.

FIG. 84(B) shows a display mode of performance information displayed in the factory shipping test section shown in FIG. 84(A). In the factory shipment test section, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a real-time base value whose upper two digits are “bL. The previous accumulated base value whose two digits are "b6. (blinking)" and the lower two digits are "-- (lighting)" are alternately displayed every five seconds. Note that the radial highlighting shown in the upper two digits "bL." on the left side of FIG. 84(B) and the upper two digits "b6." It indicates the purpose. Figure 84(C), Figure 84(D), Figure 8
4(E), FIGS. 105 and 106 are the same.

FIG. 84(C) shows that the total number of outs in the first section shown in FIG. 84(A) is 0 to 599.
The display mode of the performance information displayed when the number of items is up to nine is shown. When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. (%) lighting (“32 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 84 (C)), and the upper two digits are “b6.
” and the lower two digits of which are “-- (lit)” are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 84(D) shows that the total number of outs in the first interval shown in FIG. 84(A) is from 6000
The display mode of the performance information displayed when the number is up to 59999 is shown. When the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the first section, FIG. 84 (
D), the upper two digits are "bL. (lighting)" and the lower two digits are lighting of numerical value (%) ("33 (lighting)" in the example of FIG. 84 (D)) The base value and the previous cumulative base value whose upper two digits are "b6. (flashing)" and whose lower two digits are "-- (lighting)" are
It is displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

FIG. 84(E) shows that the total number of outs is 0 to 5 in the section after the second time shown in FIG. 84(A).
The display mode of the performance information displayed when the number of items is up to 999 is shown. When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections, the upper two digits are "bL. (flashing)" and the lower two digits are "bL. Numerical value (%) lighting (Fig. 84
In the example of (E), the real-time base value is "34 (lit)", and the upper two digits are "b6.
(lighting)" and the lower two digits are numerical values (%) (in the example of FIG. 84 (E), "33 (lighting)
”) is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 84(F) shows that the total number of outs is 600 in the section after the second time shown in FIG.
The display mode of the performance information displayed when the number is 0 to 59999 is shown. 2
When the total number of outs in the section after the first time is 6000 to 59999,
As shown in FIG. 84(F), the upper two digits are "bL. (lighting)" and the lower two digits are numerical values (%
) lighting (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 84 (F)) and the lighting of the upper two digits of “b6. (lighting)” and the lower two digits of numerical value (%) ("33 (lights on)" in the example of FIG. 84(F)) and the previous accumulated base value are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

The configuration and the like of the gaming machine 1 when performance display is performed will be described below. FIG. 85 is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 86 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 for performing the performance display described above may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, for example.

In FIG. 85, reference numeral 700 near the tip of the guide rail (near the exit of the game ball) is a shot ball detector equipped with a shot detection sensor 700A (see FIG. 86). FIG. 85 shows an example in which the ball detector 700 is arranged near the exit of the guide rail. location), a location closer to the ball launcher on the guide rail (near the entrance, etc.). Note that the game effect lamp 9, operation button 30, and other parts of the appearance are different, but FIG.
5, the same components as those in FIG. 1 are given the same reference numerals as in FIG.

In FIG. 86, reference numeral 1130 denotes a display monitor that displays performance information. sign 700
A is the launch detection sensor. In addition, in FIG. 86, the same configuration as in FIG.
9 are assigned, and description of the configuration (the same configuration as in FIG. 49) is omitted.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 1 when performance is displayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94. FIG.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol processing (also called special symbol process processing). In the special figure process shown in FIG. 87, the CPU 103 executes the state control process (step S1101A). State control processing will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes start winning determination processing (step S1102). In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU
103, for example, based on the detection signals from the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, determines whether or not there is a starting prize, determines whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is executed, and outputs various commands (hold Memory number notification command, start winning judgment result specification command, etc.) transmission setting.

Following the start winning determination process in step S1102, the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 (R
Depending on the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit in AM102,
One of the processes of steps S1110 to S1117 is selected and executed.

The special symbol normal process of step S1110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal process, the first
It is determined whether or not to start a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable display result is to be a "jackpot" using a random number for determining the special symbol display result, and if it is determined to be a "jackpot", the random number for determining the jackpot type is used. It determines which jackpot type to use and the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal process, when it is determined that the variable display result is "big win", the big win flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting section in the RAM 102) is set to ON state and "big win". Then, a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored in a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting section in the RAM 102). In the special symbol normal process, for example, when a fixed special symbol is determined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process of step S1111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In the variation pattern setting process, a process of determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random number for determining the variation pattern is performed. In the variation pattern setting process, for example, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process of step S1112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In the special symbol variation process, the process of varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, etc. are performed. . In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of step S1113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In the special design stop processing, in the first special design display device 4A and the second special design display device 4B, the fixed special design that results in variable display of the special design is stopped for a predetermined time (special design fixed display time). etc. In the special symbol stop processing, when the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "0" or "4" by referring to the jackpot flag.
Specifically, when the jackpot flag is on (when the confirmed special pattern is a jackpot pattern), clear the jackpot flag to turn it off, and change the value of the special pattern process flag to "4
". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (when the finalized special symbol is a lost symbol), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S1114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In the jackpot opening preprocessing, a process of waiting until the waiting time (waiting time for jackpot start performance) until the execution time of the fanfare performance (also referred to as jackpot start performance) to be executed on the side of the performance control board 12 elapses. Also, setting for opening the big winning opening after the elapse of the waiting time for the performance at the start of the big win is performed. In the big hit opening preprocessing, when the setting for opening the big winning opening is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process during jackpot opening of step S1115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In the jackpot opening process, a process for determining whether or not the conditions for returning the jackpot to the closed state from the open state have been established (elapse of the jackpot opening upper limit time, or the winning of the upper limit number of prizes);
After the conditions are established, settings are made for returning the big winning opening to the closed state. In the jackpot open process, if you set to return the jackpot to the closed state, the value of the special process flag will be set to "
Update to 6".

The jackpot open post-processing of step S1116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In the jackpot opening post-processing, processing for determining whether or not the number of times of execution of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a predetermined number is performed. In the jackpot open post-processing, if the number of round execution times has not reached a predetermined number, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", and if the predetermined number of times has been reached, the value of the special process flag is changed to "7". update to.

The jackpot end processing of step S1117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In the jackpot end processing, a process of waiting until the waiting time (waiting time for jackpot end effect) until the end of the execution time of the ending effect (also referred to as the effect at the end of the big win) executed on the side of the effect control board 12 elapses, etc. is done. In the jackpot end processing, when the waiting time for the performance at the end of the jackpot has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing an example of the state control process executed in step S1101A of FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 88, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S2001). step S2
When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in 001 (step S2001; YES)
, CPU 103 determines whether or not a round game flag provided in RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in RAM 102) is ON (step S2002). The in-round game flag is one of the flags that define the normal state, as described above. If the round playing flag is on at step S2002 (step S2002; YES),
End the state control process.

On the other hand, if the round playing flag is off at step S2002 (step S20
02; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching wait flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting section in the RAM 102) is ON (step S20
03). The state change switch wait flag is a flag provided for setting a state change switch wait time (described later) only once when the round playing flag is off.

If the state change switching wait flag is off in step S2003 (step S2003
; NO), the CPU 103 sets a state change switching wait time (step S2004).
Specifically, the CPU 103 has a RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102)
A predetermined state change switching waiting time is set as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer provided in the . step S20
The state change switching waiting time set in the process of 04 is a time shorter than the jackpot start effect waiting time set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 89). Although the details will be described later, time T1 in FIG.
2 is the state change switching waiting time.

After step S2004, the CPU 103 sets the state change switching wait flag to the ON state (step S2005). Then, the state control process ends.

If the state change switching wait flag is ON in step S2003 (step S2003
; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2006). In the process of step S2006, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S2004 has timed out (whether the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Just do it. Step S2006
If the state change switching waiting time has not passed in (step S2006; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S2006 (step S2006
; YES), the CPU 103 clears the state change switching waiting flag to turn it off (step S2007), and sets the round playing flag to the on state (step S2008).
).

Following step S2008, the CPU 103 performs setting for ending the time saving state and the variable probability state (step S2009). In the process of step S2009, the CPU 103
Execute processing such as clearing the time saving flag and the probability variation flag to turn off. In addition, in the process of step S2009, when a value (value other than 0) is set to the probability variable number count value which is the stored value of the probability variable number counter provided in RAM102 (game control counter setting unit in RAM102) may execute a process of initializing the probability variation count value to "0".
In addition, in the process of step S2009, when a value (value other than 0) is set to the time saving number count value which is the stored value of the time saving number counter provided in the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 102) may perform a process of initializing the time saving frequency count value to "0". It should be noted that the time-saving number counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of times of execution or the number of times remaining) of the special game in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed. The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the number of remaining times) of the special figure game in which the probability variation control is performed.

Following the processing of step S2009, the CPU 103 moves from the main board 11 to the effect control board 1.
2 to transmit a game state designation command (step S2015).
Thereby, the change (transition) of the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the state control process ends.

In the state control process shown in FIG. 88, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not.
For example, the game state designation command may be transmitted only when changing from the time saving state or the variable probability state to the normal state. Note that the effect control board 12 side specifies the current game state based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but instead of this,
The current game state may be specified based on a hit start designation command or the like. The same applies to the state control processing shown in FIG.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S2001 (step S20
01; NO), CPU 103 determines whether the value of the special process flag is 7 (
step S2010). When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S2010 (step S2010; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S2010 (step S201
0; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round playing flag is on (
step S2011). If the round playing flag is off at step S2011 (
Step S2002; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the round playing flag is on at step S2011 (step S2011;
YES), the CPU 103 clears the in-round game flag to turn it off (step S2013).

Following step S2013, the CPU 103 performs setting for starting the time saving state and the variable probability state (step S2014). In the process of step S2014, the CPU 103
Depending on the jackpot type (value stored in the jackpot type buffer; jackpot type buffer value), the variable probability flag and time saving flag are set to the ON state, and the initial value is set to the variable probability count value and time saving count value according to the jackpot type. set. For example, in the case of a variable probability big hit in which the variable probability state and the short time state continue until the next big win after the end of the big win, the variable probability flag and the short time flag are set to the ON state. Also, for example, after the end of the big hit, until the next big hit or 1
In the case of a probability variable jackpot in which the probability variable state and the time-saving state continue until the 00th special game is completed, the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to the ON state, and the probability variable number count value is set to 100 as an initial value. , 100 is set as an initial value to the time saving frequency count value. Also, for example, after the end of the big hit, the variable probability state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit or until the 30th special game is completed, and furthermore, after the 31st special game, until the next big hit 10
In the case of a probability variable jackpot in which the time saving state continues until 0 times of the special game is completed, the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to the ON state, the probability variable number count value is set to 30 as an initial value, and the time saving number of times. 100 is set as the initial value for the count value. Also, for example, in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot where the time saving state continues until the next big win after the end of the big win or until the 100th special game is finished, the time saving flag is set to the ON state, and the time saving number of times. 100 is set as the initial value for the count value. Also, for example, in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot that does not become a variable probability state or a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot, nothing is done (neither the probability variable flag nor the time-saving flag is set to the on state, and the probability variable number count value No value is set for the count value).

After step S2014, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S2015 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing executed in step S1113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 89, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol fixed display flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting section or the like is ON (step S2291). Here, the special figure confirmed display flag corresponds to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result in the special figure game, and is displayed in step S22.
It is set to the ON state by the processing of 95.

When the special figure confirmed display flag is off at step S2291 (step S22
91; NO), the CPU 103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol (step S2292). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S2293). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the special figure confirmation display time, which is the stop display time of the confirmation special symbol (step S2294).
Specifically, the CPU 103 has a RAM 102 (a game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102)
Set a predetermined special figure confirmation display time as the timer initial value of the special figure confirmation display time timer value which is the stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in.

Following the process of step S2294, the CPU 103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the ON state (step S2295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

At step S2291 when the special figure confirmed display flag is on (step S22
91; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S2296)
. In the process of step S2296, for example, in step S2294 whether the special figure confirmation display time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out (the special figure fluctuation time timer value is 0
) can be determined. If special figure decision display time has not passed in step S2296 (step S2296; NO), special design stop processing is ended.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S2296 (step S2296;
YES), after clearing the special figure confirmed display flag and turning it off (step S2297
), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S2298). If the jackpot flag is ON (step S2298; YES), the waiting time for the effect at the start of the jackpot is set (step S2299). Specifically, the CPU 103 is provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102) as the timer initial value of the production waiting time timer value at the start of the big hit, which is the stored value of the production waiting time timer at the start of the big win. A predetermined performance waiting time at the start of a big win is set. Following the processing of step S2299, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2300). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag to turn it off (step S2301), and sets the big hit start time flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting section in the RAM 102) to the on state (step S2302). and,
The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S2305), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

If the jackpot flag is off at step S2298 (step S2298; N
O), it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state and probability variation state (step S2306). In the process of step S2306, the CPU103 updates the respective count values depending on whether or not a value (value other than 0) is set to the probability variable number count value and the time saving number count value, and the time saving state and the probability variable state It is determined whether or not to terminate. For example, if a value is set in the time-saving number count value (for example, the time-saving state continues until the next big hit or until the 100th special game is completed). is 100 times or less), the time saving number count value is decremented by 1 and updated. In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving frequency count value after updating matches the time saving end determination value (for example, "0"), and when the time saving frequency count value after updating does not match the time saving end determination value determines not to end the time saving state. Also, for example, if a value is set for the probability variable number count value and the time saving number count value When the special game played after the big hit is 100 times or less, etc., the probability variation number count value is updated by subtracting 1, and the time reduction number count value is updated by subtracting 1. In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether the probability variable number count value after updating matches the probability variable end determination value (for example, "0"), and if the probability variable number count value after updating does not match the probability variable end determination value is determined not to end the probability variable state, and if it matches, it is determined to end the probability variable state, and the time saving count value after the update is the time saving end judgment value (
For example, "0"), and if the updated time saving frequency count value does not match the time saving end determination value, it is determined not to end the time saving state. When the CPU 103 determines to end the variable probability state, it clears the variable probability flag to turn it off, and when it determines to end the time saving state, it clears the time saving flag to turn it off.

Following the processing of step S2306, settings are made for transmitting the game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated (initialized) to "0" (step S23
08), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

It should be noted that, in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 89, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state changes or does not change, but when the game state changes (for example, time saving state or when the state changes from the variable probability state to the normal state, etc.), the game state designation command may be transmitted. On the side of the effect control board 12, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but instead of this, the effect is controlled independently of the side of the main board 11. The current game state may be specified by counting the number of times the variable display is executed on the board 12 side.

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening pre-processing executed in step S1114 of FIG. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 90, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (step S2131). here,
The jackpot start time flag is set to the ON state in response to the jackpot flag being ON in the special symbol stop processing (step S2302 in FIG. 89).

If the jackpot start time flag is ON in step S2131 (step S2131;
NO), the large winning opening determination process (see FIG. 92) is executed (step S220), and step S2
Proceed to 138. Thus, in addition to the process during the jackpot opening of step S1115, step S
By executing the big winning opening determination process in the jackpot opening post-processing at 1114, it is possible to suitably detect a winning exceeding the winning upper limit determination value (over winning). For example, it is possible to preferably detect over winning during the next open standby (during step S2138 (YES)). Incidentally, the big winning opening determination processing will be described later.

In addition, although it has been explained that the addition of the number of prize balls is excluded when more than the predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole per unit time, over winning is not excluded. In other words, even if there is a prize that exceeds the above-mentioned "prize upper limit judgment value", if the number of excess prizes is within the range that is generally assumed to be over prize (for example, up to about +3), prize balls (actual payout , reflected in performance information). Excluded from the addition of the number of winning balls is due to cheating, and when the number of excess winnings is outside the range generally assumed as over winning.

If the big hit start time flag is ON in step S2131 (step S2131; Y
ES), it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big hit has passed (step S2132)
. In the process of step S2132, for example, whether or not the waiting time timer at the start of the big hit in which the timer initial value is set at step S2299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the waiting time timer value at the start of the big hit is 0 or not).

If the waiting time for the performance at the start of the big win has not passed (step S2132; NO), the pre-processing for opening the big win is ended.

If the waiting time for the production at the start of the jackpot has passed (step S2132; YES), the CPU
103 clears the jackpot start flag (step S2134). Next, CPU1
03 clears the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening (step S2135). in particular,
Initialize the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening to "1". Subsequently, the CPU 103 reads the jackpot type buffer value (step S2136), and sets the opening control pattern corresponding to the read jackpot type buffer value (step S2137). That is, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is set according to the jackpot type determined in the special symbol normal process. In the opening control pattern, for example, an upper limit time for opening the big winning opening for each round is set.

After the process of step S2137 or the process of step S220, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is waiting for the next opening (step S2138). That is, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval period until the opening of the big winning opening as the next round. step S2
In the process of 138, for example, it is determined whether or not the round start waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S2366 of the jackpot opening process has timed out (whether the round start waiting time timer value has become 0). Judge. If it is waiting for the next opening (step S2138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the big hit opening preprocessing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is not waiting to be opened next time (step S2138; NO), that is, if the interval period has ended, the CPU 103 controls the start of opening the big winning hole (step S2138; NO).
2139). For example, the CPU 103 sets the opening time for opening the large winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S2137 and the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter, and also sets the opening time of the large winning opening. set as in particular,
In the process of step S2139, for example, the CPU 103 controls the RAM 102 (RAM 102
(game control timer setting unit in the game control timer setting section) of the corresponding round in the opening control pattern set in step S2137 as the timer initial value of the opening time timer value which is the stored value of the opening time timer (upper limit time for open state) is set. Further, in the process of step S2139, by transmitting a solenoid driving signal through the solenoid circuit 111 or the like, the solenoid 28 for the big winning entrance door may be set to be in an ON state. In addition, in the case of the first round (when the big hit opening pre-processing is executed following the special symbol stop processing), since the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), the step In the process of S2138, it is immediately determined that the next opening standby is not in progress.

Following the process of step S2139, the CPU 103 sets the effect control board 12 to transmit a notification command during opening of the big winning opening (step S2140). and,
The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" (step S2141), and the big hit opening pre-processing is ended.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing an example of the process during jackpot opening executed in step S1115 of FIG. In the process during the opening of the big win shown in FIG. 91, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the upper limit time for opening the big winning opening has passed (step S2121). If the large winning opening opening upper limit time has not elapsed (step S2121; NO), a large winning opening determination process is executed (step S220).

FIG. 92 is the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S1114) in FIG. 90, the jackpot opening process (step S1115) in FIG. 91, the jackpot opening post-processing (step S1116) in FIG. 93, and FIG.
4 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening determination process executed in the jackpot end process (step S1117) of 4. FIG.

In the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 103 first
3 is turned on (step S221).
If the count switch 23 is not ON (step S221; NO), the big winning opening determination process is terminated.

When the count switch 23 is ON (step S221; YES), transmission setting of a large winning opening winning notification command for notifying the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening is performed to the effect control board 12. (Step S222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is "5" which is the value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S223). If the value of the special figure process flag is not "5", which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening process (step S223; NO), the big winning opening determination process is terminated.

If the value of the special figure process flag is "5" which is the value corresponding to the process during jackpot opening (step S223; YES), the winning number counter provided in the RAM 102 (game control counter setting section in the RAM 102) is stored. The winning prize number count value, which is the value, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S224). Then, the big winning opening determination process is terminated. When the process of step S244 is performed in the big winning opening determination process, the prize ball payout process is performed in the prize ball process. In addition, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), probability variation flag, time saving flag,
If all of the round-playing flags are in the OFF state, the number of prize balls by the big winning opening is updated in relation to the performance display. However, as shown in FIG. 88, at least during the period from the start of the 1st round (closed to open the door of the big prize winning gate → open) to the end of the final round (open to close the door of the big prize winning gate)
Since the in-round-game flag is in an ON state rather than an OFF state, the number of prize balls by the big winning opening is not updated during this period.

Return to FIG. Following the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (for example, "10") (step S2).
126). If the winning upper limit judgment value is not reached (step S2126; NO), the process during big hit opening is terminated.

On the other hand, if the upper limit time for opening the big winning opening has passed in step S2121 (step S2
121; YES), when the winning upper limit determination value is reached in step S2126 (step S2126; YES), the end of opening the big winning opening is controlled (step S2127). That is, the CPU 103 determines to end the current round game, and sets the big winning opening to be in a closed state. For example, it may be set to stop transmission of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 . Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the winning number counter and initializes the winning number count value to "0" (step 2128). Then, set the value of the special process flag to "6
” (step S2129), and ends the big hit opening process.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot opening post-processing executed in step S1116 of FIG. In the process after opening the jackpot shown in FIG. 93, the CPU 103 first executes the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92 (step S220). In this way, in addition to the process during the opening of the jackpot in step S1115, by executing the big winning opening determination process in the process after opening the jackpot in step S1116, winning exceeding the winning upper limit determination value (over winning) is suitably detected. be able to.

After executing the large winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 103 updates the large winning opening opening number count value by 1 (step S2364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened after the update reaches the maximum value (step S2365).
.

In addition, in step S2365, the "maximum value" to be compared with the updated count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. In other words, the count value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened to be compared with the "maximum value" is the one after the update (step S2364
), since the initial value of the count value for the number of times the big winning opening is opened is “1” (S2135 in FIG. 90),
The above "maximum value" must be the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of a 6-round jackpot (when the upper limit number of rounds is 6), the above "maximum value" is "7", and in the case of a 16-round jackpot (when the upper limit number of rounds is 16), The "maximum value" is "17". In addition, instead of the post-update count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened, the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened before the update may be compared with the "maximum value". In that case, the "maximum value" should be set as the upper limit of the number of rounds.

If the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is other than the maximum value (step S2365; NO), the round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S2366). Specifically, for example, the CPU 103, RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102)
A predetermined round start waiting time is set as the timer initial value of the round start waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the round start waiting time timer provided in .

Following step S2366, the CPU 103 sets the effect control board 12 to transmit a notification command after opening the big winning opening (step S2367). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S2368), and the process after opening the jackpot is terminated. Thus, steps S1114 to S1116 shown in FIG.
By repeatedly executing the process of (1), it is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened in the big winning game state. Also, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S2366, the
, etc., because it is waiting for the next opening (step S in FIG. 90).
2138; YES), the next round can be started after the desired interval period.

At step S2365, if the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the maximum value (step S2
365; YES), the waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot is set (step S2369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 103 is provided in the RAM 102 (the game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102), and is the stored value of the waiting time timer at the end of the big hit, which is the timer initial value of the waiting time timer value at the end of the big hit. , a predetermined performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot is set.

Following step S2369, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S2370). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" (step S2371), and the process after opening the big hit is ended. In this way, by setting the waiting time for the effect at the end of the big hit in the process of step S2369, according to the end of the ending effect executed on the side of the effect control board 12 (Fig. 94
step S2321; YES), the special symbol normal process of step S1110 shown in FIG. 87 can be executed.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process executed in step S1117 of FIG. In the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 94, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the jackpot end effect has passed (step S2321). In the process of step S2321, for example, whether or not the waiting time timer at the end of the jackpot, in which the timer initial value is set at step S2369 of the processing after the opening of the jackpot, has timed out (the waiting time timer value at the end of the jackpot has become 0) or not). Step S2321
If the waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed (step S2321; NO), the big win opening determination process shown in FIG. 92 is executed (step S220), and the jackpot end process is finished. In this way, in addition to the process during the opening of the big win in step S1115, by executing the big winning opening determination process also in the big win end process of step S1117, it is possible to preferably detect the winning exceeding the winning upper limit judgment value (over winning). can be done.

When the waiting time for the production at the end of the big hit has passed at step S2321 (step S2
321; YES), update the value of the special figure process flag to "0" (step S2325),
Execution of the jackpot ending process is ended.

87 to 94, the operation and the like of the gaming machine 1 when performing the performance display have been described. According to the flow charts shown in FIGS. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is controlled to the jackpot game state.
The in-round-game flag is turned on before the opening of the round. A detailed description will be given below.

(A) End of fanfare effect→first release of special variable winning ball device After the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmation display time), the CPU 103 determines the execution time of the fanfare effect in the special symbol stop processing. Waiting time (waiting time for the start of big hit) is set (step S2299 in FIG. 89), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". In addition, the CPU 103 opens the big winning opening (step S2139 in FIG. 90) after the waiting time elapses (step S2132 in FIG. 90; YES) in the big hit opening pre-processing. That is, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state before the end of the fanfare effect, and is in an open state for the first time after the end of the fanfare effect.

(B) Set the round game flag to the ON state → End the fanfare effect Also, when the value of the special process flag is updated to "4", the CPU 103 sets the state change switching waiting time (Fig. 88 Step S2004), after the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2006 in FIG. 88; YES), the round playing flag is set to the ON state (step S2008 in FIG. 88). As described above, the state change switching waiting time is shorter than the waiting time for the big win start effect (execution time for the fanfare effect). That is, before the end of the fanfare effect, the in-round-game flag is turned on.

From the above (A) and (B), the round game in-progress flag is set to the ON state→the end of the fanfare effect→the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened for the first time. In other words, the in-round-game flag is turned on before the opening of the first round.

Also, as described above, the game state in which the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are collected for performance display is called a normal state. This is a game state in which all medium flags are off (see FIG. 83). Therefore, at least when the round playing flag is on, it does not correspond to the normal state, so at least when the round playing flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not collected for performance display.
That is, at least when the round game in-progress flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not reflected in the performance display.

According to the above (A) and (B), since the round game flag is turned on at the stage before the opening of the first round, the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit from a certain stage before the opening of the first round at the latest The number is not reflected in the performance display (more precisely, it is not reflected). In addition, the expression "at the latest" means that the game state during the execution of the special game before the special game that stopped displaying the jackpot pattern was a probability variable state or a short time state (that is, at least the probability variable flag or the short time flag If one is on), the stage before the above "a certain stage before opening the first round" (for example, the stage during execution of the special game before the special game in which the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed) ), the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls have not already been reflected in the performance display.

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram for explaining state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of game balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5 . The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 shows, from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the shot ball detector 700 (shot detection sensor 700A), the state (open state) of the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning entrance door) , closed state), and the winning timing to the big winning opening (the detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 23).

As shown in FIG. 95, a jackpot pattern (shown as a fixed decorative pattern "777" on the image display device 5 in the figure) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern in the special game (in more detail, shown in FIG. 89). When the special figure confirmation display time has passed) and the waiting time for the start of the big hit (illustrated as a fanfare effect in the same figure) ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 opens for the first time (1R opening in the same figure) ) is performed. It should be noted that the big-hit performance in the image display device 5 is a performance performed during execution of the big-hit opening process (FIG. 91). In addition to the effect performed during the execution of the process during the opening of the big win (Fig. 91), the effect performed during the process after opening the big win (Fig. 93) may also be referred to as the big win effect.

The timing t1 shown in the lower part of FIG. 95 is the timing when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game. Timing t3 is the timing at which the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened for the first time after the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win is over. The time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is the waiting time for the big hit starting effect set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop processing (FIG. 89). Note that the timing t
2 etc. will be described later.

Also, FIG. 95 shows three game balls (game ball a, game ball b,
It schematically shows how the game ball c) is detected by the launch detection sensor 700A. The game ball a is detected by the launch detection sensor 700A at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t1 (for example, during a ready-to-win effect), and is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, the closed state of the big winning entrance door). A game ball or the like that has flowed down the front side). The game ball b is detected by the launch detection sensor 700A at timing t2, and at timing t3 (
It is a game ball that is picked up by the big winning opening door and detected by the count switch 23 at the moment it is opened. The game ball c is detected by the launch detection sensor 7 at a timing slightly later than the timing t2.
This game ball is detected by 00A, picked up by the winning entrance door at a timing slightly later than timing t3, and detected by the count switch 23.

Time T2 between timing t1 and timing t2 is the state change switching wait time set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88). In addition, the game ball b detected by the launch detection sensor 700A at the timing t2 flows down the game area 10 at the slowest possible flow speed after being detected by the launch detection sensor 700A, and the large winning entrance door immediately after opening It is assumed that the game ball is picked up by the player and detected by the count switch 23 .
In other words, the game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 23. In other words, at timing t2, the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment it is opened is detected by the launch detection sensor 700.
The earliest timing that can be detected by A.

That is, there are game balls detected by the count switch 23 among the game balls detected by the launch detection sensor 700A before the opening of the big winning entrance door (for example, during the execution period of the fanfare effect). A game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 700A at any timing of the time T3, such as the ball c), and a game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 700A before the opening of the big winning gate door, are counted by the count switch 23. In order not to reflect the game balls that can be detected in the performance display, the in-round game flag is set to the ON state at timing t2 (when time T2 has elapsed) (step S2008 in FIG. 88).

It should be noted that, hypothetically, if the in-round game flag is set to the ON state at timing t3 (if it is not reflected in the performance display from the opening timing of the big winning door)
, for example, the game ball c, at any timing of time T3, the discharge detection sensor 700A
The game balls detected by are reflected in the performance display as the number of hit balls, but the number of prize balls in the case of winning the big prize opening is not reflected in the performance display. I can't do it. On the other hand, if the round game in-progress flag is set to the ON state at timing t2 (when time T2 has elapsed), the above-described problem is resolved.

Although timing t2 is the earliest timing at which a game ball picked up by the grand prize door at the moment of opening can be detected by launch detection sensor 700A, timing t2 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t2 may be the average timing at which the game ball picked up by the large winning entrance door at the moment it is opened is detected by the launch detection sensor 700A, or may be the timing later than the average timing. may That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88) takes into account the game ball flow time (fired ball detector 700→special variable winning ball device 7). If it is However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to use the timing t2 as the earliest timing. The same applies to FIG. 98 as well.

[Modified example of launch ball detector]
FIG. 96 is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 97 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 for performance display may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, for example.

In FIG. 96, reference numeral 701 above the first passage gate 41A indicates the first firing detection sensor 7.
01A (see FIG. 97). All gaming balls passing through the left gaming area 10A pass through the first shot ball detector 701. That is, the first launch ball detector 701 (
The first shot detection sensor 701A) detects all game balls passing through the left game area 10A. Reference numeral 702 above the second pass gate 41B is a second projectile ball detector comprising a second projectile detection sensor 702A (see FIG. 97). All game balls that pass through the right game area 10B pass through the second shot ball detector 702 . That is, the second shot ball detector 702 (second shot detection sensor 702A) detects all game balls passing through the right game area 10B.

FIG. 96 shows an example in which the launch ball detectors 701 and 702 are arranged above the passage gates 41A and 41B, but if all game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, the passage gate 41
A, below 41B, etc.). In FIG. 96, the same components as in FIG. 85 are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIG. 85, and descriptions of the components (same configurations as in FIG. 85) are omitted.

In FIG. 97, reference numeral 701A is the first firing detection sensor. Reference numeral 702A is the second
A launch detection sensor. In FIG. 97, the same components as in FIG. 86 are assigned the same reference numerals as in FIG. 86, and descriptions of the components (same configurations as in FIG. 86) are omitted.

The operations shown in FIGS. 87 to 94 are also applied to the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. In other words, the special figure processing when performance is displayed in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. It is common to the figure processing.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 98, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of game balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5 . Below the display of the image display device 5 are, in order from the top, launch ball detectors 701 and 7
02 (fire detection sensors 701A, 702A) detection timing of game balls, state (open state, closed state) of special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning gate door), winning timing to big winning gate (by count switch 23) game ball detection timing).

Also, FIG. 98 shows three game balls (game ball a, game ball b,
It schematically shows how the game ball c) is detected by the first ejection detection sensor 701A (or the second ejection detection sensor 702A). The game ball a is detected by the first firing detection sensor 701A (or the second firing detection sensor 702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t1, and is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, the game ball is in a closed state. A game ball or the like that has flowed down on the front side of the big winning entrance door). The game ball b is detected by the first launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A) at timing t2, is picked up by the big winning entrance door at timing t3 (moment of opening), and is detected by the count switch 23. It is a game ball that is played. The game ball c is the first ball at a timing slightly later than the timing t3.
This game ball is detected by the launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A), is picked up by the winning entrance door at a timing slightly later than timing t3, and is detected by the count switch 23.

Note that the first shot ball detector 701 (first shot detection sensor 701A) and the second shot ball detector 7
02 (second firing detection sensor 702A) can detect game balls at the same time, but even if they detect game balls at the same time, each game ball detected at the same time is captured (counted) as the number of hit balls. ) is possible. For example, for one of them, by shifting the execution timing of the processing executed after detection (processing to count), each game ball detected at the same time may be captured as the number of hit balls.

The arrangement position of the ball detector 700 shown in FIG. 85 and the first ball detector 7 shown in FIG.
01 and the second shot ball detector 702 are different, as shown in FIGS. The time until detection by the detector 701 (or the second ball detector 702) is shown in FIG.
86, the game ball shot by the shot ball shooting device is detected by the shot ball detector 700, which is longer than the time. 96 and 97, the time required for the game ball detected by the first ball detector 701 (or the second ball detector 702) to reach the position of the special variable winning ball device 7 is Compared to the time required for the game ball detected by the shot ball detector 700 to reach the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the configuration of FIGS. 85 and 86, it is shorter.

Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 98) set in the configuration of FIGS. 96 and 97 is equal to the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG.
5 is longer than the time T2).

In addition, the first ball detector 701 and the second ball detector 702 (or the part including the first ball detector 701 and the second ball detector 702 (referred to as part A)) are attached to the game board 2. It may be detachable. Also, the game board 2 may be composed of a part A and one or more parts other than the part A, and the part A may be detachable from the one or more parts other than the part A. For example, in FIG. 96, the portion including the first shot ball detector 701 and the second shot ball detector 702 (the portion above the broken line P in the figure) may be detachable.

[Modification using out-sphere detector]
FIG. 99 is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 100 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Game machine 1 when displaying performance
may have the configurations shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, for example.

In FIG. 99, reference numeral 710 within a dashed line is an out-ball detector including an out-ball detection sensor 710A. The out ball detector 710 is arranged at a position that cannot be visually recognized from the front side, but is illustrated using a broken line in FIG. 99 for convenience of explanation. Moreover, the code|symbol 52 is an out port. Winning mouth (first general winning mouth 50A, second general winning mouth 50B, third general winning mouth 50C,
A game ball that does not enter the fourth general winning hole 50D, the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, or the big winning hole is taken into the out hole 52.例文帳に追加

The out-ball detector 710 detects all game balls shot into the game area 10 by the hitting ball shooting device. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 10 is the winning opening (the first general winning opening 50
A, 2nd general winning opening 50B, 3rd general winning opening 50C, 4th general winning opening 50D, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, big winning opening) or do not enter the winning opening , it is taken into the out port 52 immediately. Both the game balls that have entered the winning hole and the game balls that have been taken into the out hole 52 are finally collected in one path on the back surface (or inside) of the game board 2.例文帳に追加Since the out-ball detector 710 is arranged on the path, the game area 10 is detected by the batted ball launcher.
Detect all game balls launched to.

FIG. 99 shows an example in which the out-ball detector 710 is placed in the center in the left-right direction (below the out port). The out-ball detector 710 may be arranged on the left side in the left-right direction, etc.). In FIG. 99, the same components as in FIG. 85 are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIG. 85, and descriptions of the components (same configurations as in FIG. 85) are omitted.

In FIG. 100, reference numeral 710A is an out ball detection sensor. 100, the same components as in FIG. 86 are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIG. 86, and the description of the components (same configurations as in FIG. 86) is omitted.

99 and 100, the state control process of step S1101B (FIG. 10) is replaced with the state control process of step S1101A (FIGS. 87 and 88).
1) is executed. It should be noted that other special figure processing (each processing shown in FIGS. 89 to 94) is also applied to the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of state control processing executed in the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 101, the CPU
103 first determines whether the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S20
21). When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S2021 (step S2021; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round playing flag is on (step S2022). If the round playing flag is off at step S2022 (step S2022; NO), the state control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the round playing flag is ON in step S2022 (step S20
22; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching wait flag is ON (step S2023).

If the state change switching wait flag is off in step S2023 (step S2023
; NO), the CPU 103 sets a state change switching wait time (step S2024).
Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S2024 is the process after the jackpot opening (
It is a time shorter than the waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot set in step S2369 of FIG. 93). Details will be described later, but the time T4 in FIG.
Time T5 in FIG. 102 is the state change switching waiting time.

After step S2024, the CPU 103 sets the state change switching wait flag to the ON state (step S2025). Then, the state control process ends.

If the state change switching wait flag is ON in step S2023 (step S2023
; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2026). In the processing of step S2026, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S2024 has timed out (whether the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Just do it. Step S2026
If the state change switching waiting time has not passed in (step S2026; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S2026 (step S2026
; YES), the CPU 103 clears the state change switching wait flag to turn it off (step S2027), and clears the round playing flag to turn it off (step S20).
28).

Following step S2028, the CPU 103 performs setting for starting the time saving state and the variable probability state (step S2029). Note that the process of step S2029 is the same as the process of step S2014 of the state control process (step S1101A) shown in FIG.

Following step S2029, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2035). Thereby, the change (transition) of the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the state control process ends.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S2021 (step S20
21; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the special process flag is 4 (
step S2030). When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S2030 (step S2030; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S2030 (step S203
0; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round playing flag is on (
step S2031). If the round playing flag is on at step S2031 (
Step S2032; YES), the state control process is terminated.

If the round playing flag is off at step S2031 (step S2031;
NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big hit has elapsed (step S2032). In the processing of step S2032, the jackpot opening pre-processing (
Like the process of step S2132 of step S1114), it may be determined whether or not the waiting time timer at the start of the big hit in which the timer initial value is set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 89 has timed out. . At step S2032, if the waiting time for the performance at the start of the big hit has not passed (step S2032; NO), the state control process is terminated.

At step S2032, if the waiting time for the production at the start of the jackpot has passed (step S20
32; YES), the CPU 103 sets the in-round-game flag to the ON state (step S2033).

Following step S2033, the CPU 103 performs setting for ending the time saving state and the variable probability state (step S2034). Note that the process of step S2034 is the same as the process of step S2009 of the state control process (step S1101A) shown in FIG.

After the process of step S2034, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S2035 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 102, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of game balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5 . The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 shows, from the top, the state (open state, closed state) of the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening door), the timing of winning the winning opening (game by count switch 23) detection timing of the ball), the detection timing of the game ball by the out ball detector 710 (out ball detection sensor 710A).

As shown in FIG. 102, the special variable winning ball device 7 completes the final opening (shown as final R opening in the same figure), and a big hit end effect (shown as the ending effect in the same figure) is performed.

Timing t4 shown in the lower part of FIG. 102 is the timing when the final opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 ends (the timing when the big winning opening door is closed). In addition, the timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. Timing t6 is the ending timing of the ending effect. Time T4 between timing t4 and timing t6 is
It is the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot set in step S2369 of the jackpot opening post-processing (FIG. 93). Timing t5 and the like will be described later.

Also, FIG. 102 shows three game balls (game ball d, game ball e
, and game balls f) are detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A. The game ball d is picked up by the big winning door at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t4, detected by the count switch 23 at a timing slightly later than the timing t4, and detected by an out ball detection sensor at a timing earlier than the timing t5. A game ball detected by 710A. The game ball e is picked up by the big winning entrance door at timing t4 (the moment it closes),
This game ball is detected by the count switch 23 at a timing later than the timing t4, and is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at the timing t5. game ball f
is a game ball that is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, a game ball that has flowed down on the front side of the closed large winning opening door), and at a timing later than timing t5 (further than timing t6) It is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A.

Time T5 between timing t4 and timing t5 is the state change switching wait time set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101). Note that timing t4
The gaming ball e picked up by the big winning door at , after being picked up by the big winning door, moves at the slowest possible speed to the position detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A (the count switch 23 ) and detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A. In other words, the game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at a timing later than the timing t5 is not detected by the count switch 23. In other words, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment it closes can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A.

In other words, there are game balls detected by the count switch 23 among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A after the closing of the big winning entrance door (for example, during execution of the ending effect). A game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at any timing of time T5, such as the game ball d), and a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A after the closing of the big winning entrance door, the count switch In order not to reflect the game balls that can be detected by 23 in the performance display, the in-round game flag is cleared to the off state at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed) (step S2028 in FIG. 101). That is, until timing t5 (time T5)
maintains the in-round-game flag in an ON state and does not reflect it in the performance display.

Incidentally, hypothetically, if the round game in progress flag is cleared to the OFF state at timing t4 (if the performance display is reflected from the closing timing of the big winning entrance door),
Before timing t4, enter the big winning mouth, and after timing t4, out ball detection sensor 71
When a game ball detected by 0A (a game ball fired at a slightly earlier timing than game ball d) enters the big winning slot, the number of prize balls is not reflected in the performance display, but the number of hit balls is is reflected in the performance display, making it impossible to display the performance accurately. on the other hand,
If the round game in-progress flag is cleared to the off state at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed), the above-described problem is resolved.

Although timing t5 is the latest timing at which a game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment it closes can be detected by out ball detection sensor 710A, timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t5 may be the average timing at which the game ball picked up by the large winning entrance door at the moment it closes is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A, or may be the timing earlier than the average timing. There may be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101) is the movement time of the game ball (special variable winning ball device 7→out ball detector 71
0) can be used. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to use the timing t5 as the latest timing.

FIG. 103 is a configuration example of an out-sphere detector. The out-sphere detector 710 described above may be, for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A). Out ball detector 710 shown in FIG. 103(A) includes main body 720 and harness 730 . The main body 720 includes an opening (passing portion) 721 through which a game ball that has entered one of the winning openings or a game ball taken into the out opening 52 passes, and an out ball detection that detects a game ball passing through the opening 721. a sensor 710A;
and a connecting portion 722 . The harness 730 includes a signal line 734 to which connection portions (connection portions 732 and 733) are connected at both ends, and a connection portion (
connector) 732 and a connecting portion (connector) 733 for connecting to a predetermined connecting portion (not shown) provided on the main substrate 11 side. FIG. 103(A) (similar to FIG. 103(B)) shows a state in which the main body 720 and the harness 730 are connected. Note that the out ball detector 710 (harness 730
) and the main board 11 are detachable. Moreover, at the connecting portions (connecting portions 722 and 732),
Main body 720 and harness 730 may be detachable.

The game balls that have entered one of the winning holes or the game balls that have been taken into the out hole 52 are finally collected in one path and all pass through the opening 721 . When the game ball that has passed through the opening 721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball has been detected is output to the main board 11 side via the harness 730 . Note that the out ball detector 71
Since game balls detected by 0 are totaled (counted) as the number of hit balls, the out ball detection sensor 710A may be called a count switch.

Note that the out-ball detector 710 detects when the harness 730 is disconnected from the main body 720 (when the connecting portion 722 on the main body 720 side and the connecting portion 732 on the harness 730 side are not properly connected), and when the harness 730 If there is a disconnection (intermediate disconnection of the signal line 734, disconnection between the signal line 734 and the connection part 732, disconnection between the signal line 734 and the connection part 734, etc.), the ON signal is always turned on. It is configured to output to the substrate 11 side. Therefore, CPU1
03 can detect the disconnection of the harness or the like by monitoring the signal input from the out ball detector 710 in the error detection process described above. For example, the CPU 103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the ON signal is continuously input for a predetermined time or longer.

At least part of the detection signal output by the out-ball detector 710 when the game ball passes through the opening 721 may be composed of a predetermined on/off pattern. When at least part of the detection signal is composed of a predetermined on/off pattern, the CPU
103 can detect signal corruption due to noise or the like by monitoring the signal input from the out-ball detector 710 .

The out-sphere detector 710 may also include a clasp 740 having a screw hole 741, as shown in FIG. 103(B). Alternatively, the out-sphere detector 710 (body 72
0) may be attachable with a clasp 740 . It should be noted that the clasp 740 is attached to the main body 72
This is an example of a fixing member for fixing 0 to the gaming machine 1 or the like, and any member may be used as long as it can fix the main body 720 to the gaming machine 1 or the like.

Moreover, the harness 730 (at least part of the connection portions 732, 734 and the signal line 734) may be protected by a cover or the like. Also, the main body 720 and the harness 730 may be separate bodies. That is, the main body 720 of the out-ball detector 710 is separated from the harness 73.
0 may be connectable.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of error notification processing for errors related to performance display. FIG. 105 is an example of a display mode for announcing an error related to performance display. Figure 1
04, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the out ball detector 710 is detected (step S1200).
.

If there is an abnormality in the out-ball detector 710 (for example, missing harness, disconnection, garbled signal, etc.), the CPU 103 detects an out-ball in a process (error detection process described above) different from the error notification process. A reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the device 710 is detected. For example, the CPU 103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the ON signal continues for a predetermined period of time. At least part of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 710 is made up of a predetermined on/off pattern, and the CPU 103
may determine that the signal is garbled when a received signal different from a predetermined on/off pattern is input.

If reception abnormality is not detected in step S1200 (step S1200; NO)
, CPU 103 determines whether or not a reception error flag provided in RAM 102 (for example, game control flag setting unit) is ON (step S1201). Step S1201
If the reception error flag is on (step S1201; YES), the CPU 103 clears the reception error flag to turn it off (step S1202).
Go to 05. If the reception error flag is off in step S1201 (step S12
01; NO), skipping the processing of step S1202 and proceeding to step S1205.

If reception abnormality is detected in step S1200 (step S1200; YES),
The CPU 103 determines whether or not the reception error flag is ON (step S1203).
). If the reception error flag is off in step S1203 (step S1203; N
O), CPU 103 sets the reception error flag to ON state (step S1204).
, the process proceeds to step S1205. If the reception error flag is ON in step S1203 (step S1203; YES), the process of step S1204 is skipped and step S12 is performed.
Go to 05.

step S1201 (NO), step S1202, step S1203 (YES),
Following any processing in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S1205).

If the reception error flag is off at step S1205 (step S1205; NO
), the CPU 103 controls so that the performance is displayed in the normal mode (normal mode) (step S1206). In the process of step S1206, the CPU 103
) to FIG. 84(F) so that the performance is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. Then, the error notification process ends.

If the reception error flag is ON at step S1205 (step S1205; YES
S), the CPU 103 controls to display an error notification mode (step S1
207). In the process of step S1207, for example, the CPU 103 performs control so that the display mode shown in FIG. 105A is displayed. In the display mode of FIG. 105A, the upper two digits are "--(flashing)" and the lower two digits are "--(lighting)". Then, the error notification process ends.

It should be noted that when there is an abnormality in the reception of the detection signal by the out-ball detector 710, the number of hit balls (FIG. 83(B)) is not updated, but the number of prize balls in each winning hole ( Figure 83 (B
)) is also not updated. In other words, the CPU 103 controls the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, as in the case of the combination of roles (continuous ratio) and role ratio related processing (FIG. 61, etc.).
, the count switch 23, and the first general winning opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning opening switch 24D to acquire the respective winning information by detecting the game ball (
received), but in a situation where the number of hit balls is not updated, the number of winning balls addition processing based on the winning information is not performed.

According to the error notification process shown in FIG. 104, normally the upper two digits are displayed as "bL. (flashing, lighting)" or "b6. (flashing, lighting)" (Fig. ~ Figure 84 (F
)), and when reception is abnormal, "--(lit)" is displayed (FIG. 105(A)). In other words, when the reception is abnormal, the upper two digits are displayed in a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal.

Note that the display mode shown in FIG. 105A is an example. For example, in the process of step S1207, control may be performed so that display is performed in the display mode of FIG. 105B instead of the display mode of FIG. 105A. Similar to FIG. 105(A), the upper two digits of FIG. 105(B) are
This is a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal.

Further, for example, in the processing of step S1207, control may be performed so that display is performed in the display modes of FIG. 105C and FIG. 105D. If the upper two digits of FIG. 105(C) "E.
(blinking)” and the upper two digits of “Er. (blinking)” in FIG. 105(D) remind us of “Err”. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits (or the upper two digits), the abnormality can be easily recognized.

Also, in FIGS. 105A to 105D, the lower two digits are "-- (lighting)", but the lower two digits may be "-- (blinking)" or other indications. It may be an aspect.

In addition, when it is normal, that is, in the display by the processing of step S1206, FIG. 84 (
The display contents change as shown in FIGS. 84(B) to 84(F) according to the interval shown in A) and every 5 seconds. The display contents do not change at all times (that is, even if reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 84(A), or even if 5 seconds have passed since the start of display). That is, the display when there is an abnormality is simpler than the display when it is normal. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that something is not normal (or that something is wrong) without causing confusion or extra burden.

FIG. 106 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to performance display. 105(A) to 105(D) described above are displayed even if reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. Even if the contents do not change but are abnormal, the data may be changed according to the interval shown in FIG.
As shown in (A) to (E) of FIG. 106, the display contents may be changed. Fig. 106(A) ~
In the display mode of FIG. 106(E), the point where the lower two digits are blinking is that of FIGS.
) display mode is different. According to the error notification mode of FIG. 106, since the display contents change according to the section, in addition to the fact that it is not normal, the section (the section shown in FIG. It is also possible to recognize the real-time base value at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous accumulated base value.

In addition, in order not to show the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lower two digits indicating the real-time base value in FIGS. , 106(D) and 106(E), the lower two digits indicating the previous cumulative base value may be, for example, "Er. (flashing)". That is, in FIGS. 106A to 106E, the lower two digits may be "--(blinking)" or "Er.(blinking)".
According to the display mode, in addition to not being normal, the section (Fig. 84
section shown in (A)) can be recognized.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 104, when the error (abnormality) is resolved, the display returns to the normal mode (step S1206). The mode display (step S1207) may be continued. Further, when the error is resolved, the normal mode display may be resumed, but the error may continue to be notified.

As a first example, after the error is resolved, the display in the normal mode (FIGS. 84(A) to 84(F)
), the lowest (fourth digit) dot may blink (or light up). 2 again
As a third example, a display monitor different from the display monitor 1130 (for example, one digit) is arranged on the main substrate 11, and after the error is resolved, the display monitor 1130 is returned to the normal mode display, A display monitor different from the display monitor 1130 may continue to report that an error has occurred (for example, "E. (flashing)").

In addition, the first example above is exactly the same as the display in the normal mode when the error is resolved (except for the blinking (lighting) of the lowest dot that indicates that an error has occurred). However, in the display mode of the first example, in order to provide information that is provided (displayed) in the display in the normal mode (other than the lowest dot is the display in the normal mode. (because they are the same), it was expressed as returning to the normal mode of display. In addition, the display monitor (display monitor different from the display monitor 1130) that notifies that there is an error in the second example is configured so that the display is not cleared when the power is turned off due to a power failure, as with the display monitor 1130. do. In other words, the information indicating that an error has occurred is not cleared due to a power failure such as a power failure.

In addition, in the mode of displaying the performance information as well as in the mode of displaying the role series (run ratio) and the role ratio described above, a clear switch is connected to the main substrate 11, and by operating the clear switch, the RAM
Data used for performance display stored in 102 may be cleared. The clear switch in the mode of displaying the performance information is operated when the calculation of the performance information has to be redone, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the performance information. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data, as in the mode of displaying the consecutive ratio and the role ratio.

When the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying performance information,
As in the case where the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the role ratio (FIGS. 61 and 62), the warning display is displayed in a mode different from the display mode of the error display (the display mode shown in FIGS. 105 and 106). is performed. Further, when the clear switch is operated when reception is abnormal, both the error display and the warning display may be performed. For example, an error display and a warning display may be displayed in order. Incidentally, when the performance is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 106, for example, error display (real-time base value), error display (
previous cumulative base value), and warning display in order.

Also, in the aspect of displaying the performance information, in addition to the display monitor 130, an error indicator may be provided on the main board 11 in the same manner as in the aspect of displaying the role series (continuation ratio) and the role ratio described above. good. If an error indicator is provided separately from the display monitor 130 on the main substrate 11 , the error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 29 . In addition, in the configuration in which the display monitor 130 and the error indicator are provided on the main substrate 11, when a reception abnormality occurs, information indicating the reception abnormality is displayed on the error indicator, and the display monitor 130
may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 105 and 106.

In addition, in the case of abnormal reception, for example, by performing a predetermined error display in the second special symbol display device 4B or the like to the first special symbol display device 4A, it is possible to recognize that the reception is abnormal. can be Further, a predetermined error display may be performed on the image display device 5 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command designating that a reception abnormality has occurred, or the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined sound (including voice) may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R.
In addition, by transmitting information to the effect that a reception error has occurred, an information display device (for example,
In the display device of the card unit provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 1, the call lamp device provided above the pachinko game machine 1, etc.) and the information management device (hall computer, etc.),
It may be possible to recognize that reception is abnormal.

In addition, other devices (error indicator, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, information display device, information management device etc.), the display monitor 1
At 30, the display may be cleared. In other words, when a reception abnormality occurs, for example, all four digits of the display monitor 130 are extinguished (the "extinction" does not mean non-display in "blinking", but always means non-display). Alternatively, one digit (or two or three digits) of all four digits on the display monitor 130 may be turned off. In other words, the display when the reception is abnormal (display by the processing of step S1207) is at least limited to the display when the reception is normal (display by the processing of step S1206). It is acceptable if the performance display is restricted by using a specific function, or the performance display is restricted by erasing part or all of the performance display.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing (game control timer interrupt processing) performed by the CPU 103 . In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 107, the CPU 103 first executes an error detection process (step S10), and an error (abnormality)
is detected, an error is notified (step S11). In the processing of steps S10 and S11, for example, the CPU 103 monitors the signal output from the out ball detector 710,
An abnormality in the reception of the signal output from the out-ball detector 710 is detected (step S10), and when the reception abnormality is detected, the display monitor 1130 or the like notifies it (step S11).

After step S11, the CPU 103 executes random number update processing (step S12
). In the random number update process of step S12, the CPU 103 updates, for example, game random numbers used on the main board 11 side (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for judging big hit types, random numbers for judging variation patterns, etc.). After step S12, the CPU 103 executes special symbol processing (special symbol process processing) (step S13). In the special figure process of step S13, C
The PU 103 executes various processes shown in FIGS. 87 to 94, 101, etc., for example.

After step S13, the CPU 103 executes performance information update processing (step S
14A, S14B). Details of the performance information update process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes performance information display processing (step S15). In the performance information display process of step S15, the CPU 103 displays, for example, the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S14A and S14B) on the display monitor 1130 as shown in FIG.

After step S15, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing (step S16).
In the prize ball processing of step S16, the CPU 103, for example, calculates the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of various switches, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of game balls are paid out. Following step S16, the CPU 103 performs normal pattern processing (normal pattern process processing)
is executed (step S17). In the normal pattern process of step S17, the CPU 103, for example, controls the variable display of normal patterns in the normal pattern display device 20 and the operation of the movable wing pieces in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. After step S17, the CPU 103 executes information output processing (step S18). In the information output process of step S18, the CPU 103
For example, an information display device (for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 1, a call lamp device provided above the pachinko game machine 1, etc.) or an information management device (hall computer, etc.) It outputs various information such as information, start information, probability fluctuation information, and abnormality information. Then, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, the processing of steps S10 to S18 shown in FIG. 107 explains a part of the processing executed in the game control timer interrupt processing, and the CPU 103 performs steps S10 to S18 in the game control timer interrupt processing. Other processing (for example, switch processing to input (determine) the state of the detection signal input from various switches, processing to transmit the production control command from the main board 11 side to the production control board 12 side, etc.) can be executed. be.

In addition, in the case of the configuration of FIG. 86, in the switch processing, the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning switch 24A.
The CPU 103 receives detection signals from the fourth general prize winning port switch 24D, the launch detection sensor 700A, and the like.
output to In the case of the configuration of FIG. 97, the detection signals of the first ejection detection sensor 701A and the second ejection detection sensor 702A are output to the CPU 103 instead of the ejection detection sensor 700A. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 100, instead of the firing detection sensor 700A, out ball detection sensor 710
A detection signal is output to the CPU 103 .

Also, the execution order of each process of steps S10 to S18 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 107 is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 103 may execute the information output process prior to the random number update process, or may execute the normal figure process immediately after the special figure process.

Also, the grouping of each process (unit of each process) such as the error detection process (step S10) and the error notification process (step S11) is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 103
, error notification processing (step S11) and performance information display processing (step S15)
and may be executed as one process. It should be noted that the processing of step S1206 in the error notification processing of FIG.
It corresponds to the performance information display process (step S15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG.

The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 107 and the error notification process of FIG. 104 will be supplemented. As described above, the error notification process of FIG. 104 may be regarded as a combination of the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) of FIG. , for the convenience of explanation (for the purpose of explaining that the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 1130 differs depending on the presence or absence of an abnormality), it may be regarded as one. .

Further, FIG. 107 shows the game control timer interrupt processing in the case of displaying the performance information, but the same applies to the game control timer interrupt processing in the case of displaying the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio.
That is, the performance information update process (step 14A) of FIG. 107 is a process for updating the combination of roles (continuous ratio) and the role ratio, and the performance information display process (step 15) is configured to display the combination of roles (continuous ratio) and the role ratio. It should be processed. It should be noted that the relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 107 and each process shown in FIGS. The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the control timer interrupt process and the error notification process in FIG. 104 is the same.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S14A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. FIG. 109 shows the
07 is a flowchart showing an example of performance information update processing (step S14B) executed in the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

CPU 103 executes the performance information update process (S14A) of FIG. 108 in the mode of executing the state control process (step S1101A) of FIG. That is, the performance information update process (S14A) in FIG. 702 (second fire detection sensor 702A). On the other hand, the CPU 103
The performance information update process (S14B) of FIG. 109 is executed in the aspect of executing the state control process (step S1101B) of FIG. 101 . That is, the performance information update process (S1
4B) is performed in a configuration with an out-ball detector 710 (out-ball detection sensor 710A).

In the performance information update process (S14A) of FIG. 108, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S20). If the variable probability flag is not on in step S20 (step S20; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step S21).

If the time saving flag is not ON in step S21 (step S21; NO), CPU 1
03 determines whether or not the round playing flag is on (step S22). In addition, in the case of the start of the jackpot game state shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the round game flag is
State change switching waiting time (
Figure 95, Figure 98 time T2) in step S2008 after the lapse of OFF state → ON state, so the processing of step S22, at the start of the jackpot gaming state, state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses It can also be said that it is determining whether or not it is later.

If the round playing flag is not ON at step S22 (step S22; NO)
That is, before the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses, the CPU 103 adds the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls to calculate a base value, which is performance information (step S23). In the process of step S23, for example, the CPU 103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (Fig. 83(B)), Based on the detection result (detection signal) such as 700A, the number of hit balls is added (FIG. 83(B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous accumulated base value are calculated (FIG. 83(A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S14A) ends.

On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is on at step S20 (step S20; YES), or the time saving flag is on at step S21 (step S21; YES), or if the round playing flag is on at step S22 ( Step S22; YES), the performance information update process (step S14A) is terminated without performing the process of step S23.

In the performance information update process (S14B) of FIG. 109, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S30). If the variable probability flag is not ON in step S30 (step S30; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S31).

If the time saving flag is not ON in step S31 (step S31; NO), CPU 1
03 determines whether or not the round playing flag is ON (step S32). In addition, when the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 102 ends, the round playing flag is set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101).
In step S2028 after the time T5) in 2), the state changes from ON to OFF.
It can be said that the process of step S32 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed at the end of the jackpot game state.

If the round playing flag is not ON at step S32 (step S32; NO)
That is, after the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 103 adds the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls to calculate a base value, which is performance information (step S33). In the processing of step S33, for example, the CPU 103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 83(B)), and detects out balls. Add the number of balls to be driven based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 710A (FIG. 83(B)),
After that, the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 83(A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S14B) ends.

On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is on at step S30 (step S30; YES), or the time saving flag is on at step S31 (step S31; YES), or if the round playing flag is on at step S32 ( Step S32; YES), the performance information update process (step S14B) is terminated without performing the process of step S33.

Performance information update processing (step S14A) in FIG. 108 and performance information update processing (step S14A) in FIG.
According to step S14B), when all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the in-round game flag are in the OFF state, the number of winning balls and the number of hitting balls, which are the basis of the performance display, are added. In addition, Fig. 1
08 and as shown in FIG. 109, performance information update processing (step S14A) in FIG. 108;
The performance information update process (step S14B) in FIG. 109 refers to the states of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag, adds the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls, and adds the base value, which is performance information. are the same in terms of calculating , but both are different in the relationship between the state of the round game flag and the state change switching waiting time (specifically, the performance information update process of FIG. 108 (
In step S14A), before the time T2 elapses, the in-round game flag is in the OFF state, as shown in FIG.
In the performance information update process (step S14B), after the time T5 has elapsed, the round game in-progress flag is turned off), which has been described with reference to separate drawings.

In addition, the processing shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 is the detection result by the switch processing when the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all in the off state (output results of various switches of various winning openings, launch detection sensor 700A, etc.) is reflected (added) as performance information,
When at least one of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag is in the ON state, it is a process of not reflecting the detection result by the switch process as the performance information. In other words, the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, and it is determined whether or not the detection result is reflected as the performance information according to the state of the flag. However, when all of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are in the off state, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are reflected as performance information, and the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round playing flag are reflected as performance information. Other processing may be used as long as the processing does not reflect the number of prize balls or the number of hit balls as performance information when at least one of them is in the ON state. For example, when the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, switch processing related to the number of hit balls (shooting detection sensor 700A, first shooting detection sensor 701A, second shooting detection sensor 702A, out ball detection Detection by the sensor 710A) is executed, and when at least one of the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag is on, the switch processing regarding the number of hit balls may not be executed. In other words, it may be a process of judging whether or not to execute the switch process regarding the number of hit balls according to the state of the flag. In addition, regarding the switch processing related to the number of prize balls (detection by the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning switch 24A to the fourth general winning switch 24D, etc.) 107 to 109, the flag indicates whether or not the detection result is to be reflected in the performance information. You may judge according to a state.

FIG. 110 is an example of an arrangement position of the out-sphere detector. FIG. 110(A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 is released from the outer frame 3A. A main board 11 and the like are mounted on the back side of the game board 2 . A base member 1129 is provided on the main board 11 and a display monitor 1130 is provided on the base member 1129 . Display monitor 1
130 is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 1129 and the main board 11 .

Note that the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110A (the display monitor 11 in FIG. 110B)
30) is arranged at the center in the horizontal direction and on the upper side in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the main substrate 11 as shown in the figure, but the display monitor 1130 may be arranged at another position on the rear surface. For example, on the rear surface of the main substrate 11, it may be arranged in the center in the horizontal direction and on the lower side in the vertical direction. In addition, when it is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the main substrate 11, it is convenient that the display contents are easy to see when the salesclerk or the like checks the display contents while standing. Moreover, when it is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main substrate 11, it is convenient that the display contents are easy to see when the salesclerk or the like sits down or bends down to check the display contents. Various wiring (signal lines) may exist above the main board 11 of the game board 2 . And it is assumed that such wiring bends, or bundled things come off, and the main board 11 is covered. When the display monitor 1130 is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 11, it is less likely that the display monitor 1130 will be covered by the bent wiring, which is convenient compared to when it is arranged on the upper side. Also, although related to the above, the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110A (the same applies to the display monitor 1130 in FIG. The mode of arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 1130 and the mode of arrangement on the main board 11 are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, display monitor 1130 may
0 to display monitors 130B, 130C, 130D, 130E, 130F and 1 shown in FIG.
Appearances such as 30G, 130H, and 130I may be used.

In FIG. 110(A), the game board 2 (for example, the bottom of the game board, the lower part, etc.) has a winning opening (
1st general winning opening 50A, 2nd general winning opening 50B, 3rd general winning opening 50C, 4th general winning opening 50D, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, big winning opening) Out port 52
An opening (a game ball exit hole) 2A is provided for discharging the game ball taken in to the outside. Passages a, b, and c indicated by dashed lines are passages (ball recovery passages) through which game balls that have entered the prize winning opening and game balls taken into the out opening 52 pass. Even if the game ball enters the winning hole or is taken into the out hole 52, it passes through one of the passages a, b, and c, and is finally discharged to the outside from the opening 2A. be done.

The out ball detector 710 is provided on the game board 2 side, as shown in FIG. 110(A). Specifically, the out-ball detector 710 is provided at a position capable of detecting a game ball ejected from the opening 2A. In other words, like the opening 2A, the out-ball detector 710 is provided in a flow path for discharging the game balls that have entered the winning opening or the game balls that have been taken into the out-opening 52 .

A game ball detected by the out ball detector 710 is recovered by a ball receiving member 1700 provided on the outer frame 3A side (game island side). Also, the signal line 7 of the out ball detector 710
34 is connected to the main board 11 . That is, the game ball ejected from the opening 2A of the game board 2 passes through the opening 721 of the out ball detector 710 and is recovered by the ball receiving member 1700 to the game island. A game ball passing through the opening 721 is detected by an out-ball detection sensor 710A, and a detection signal is output to the main board 11. FIG.

The bottom of the ball receiving member 1700 (the part on which the game ball rides) is provided with an opening (hole for the exit of the game ball) 1701. Although not shown, the bottom is inclined toward the opening 1701. are doing. That is, the game ball reaching the ball receiving member 1700 from the gaming machine 1 (opening 721) passes through the opening 1701 and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 1700.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 110(B), the out ball detector 710 is positioned on the outer frame 3A side (game island side).
may be set to In the example of FIG. 110(B), the out ball detector 710 is provided at a position capable of detecting a game ball ejected from the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 .
In other words, like the opening 1701, the out ball detector 710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game balls that have entered the winning opening or the game balls taken into the out opening 52, and the opening of the ball receiving member 1700. A game ball ejected from 1701 is detected. In addition, in FIG. 110(B), the clasp 7
The illustration of 40 is omitted.

FIG. 110A shows an example in which out-ball detector 710 is installed using clasp 740, but out-ball detector 710 may be installed using a fixing member other than clasp 740. FIG.
The same applies to the example of FIG. 110(B).

Also, in FIGS. 110A and 110B, the out-ball detector 710 is an external component, but the game board 2 and the like may be provided with the out-ball detector 710 from the beginning. For example, FIG. 110(A)
Then, an out ball detector 710 may be provided below the opening 2A of the game board 2 (the same position as in FIG. 110(A)). Also, the out ball detection sensor 710A may be provided in the opening 2A of the game board 2 (the opening 2A of the game board 2 may be the opening 721 of the main body 720).
equivalent to ). The same applies to the example of FIG. 110(B).

Although three passages (passages a, b, and c) are shown in FIG. 110(A), the game ball entering the winning opening and the game ball taken into the out opening 52 finally reach the opening 2A. However, the number and shape of the passages are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 110(A). The same applies to the example of FIG. 110(B).

Note that the state change switching waiting time (
Time T5) in FIG. 102 is the required time until the game ball picked up by the big winning door is detected by the count switch 23, and the game ball detected by the count switch 23 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A. is affected by the time it takes to Specifically, the shorter the required time, the shorter the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be (not necessarily shortened).

Therefore, for example, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), FIG.
In the configuration of (1), the time until the game ball detected by the count switch 23 is ejected from the opening 2A may be shortened. Specifically, the length of the passage through which the game ball detected by the count switch 23 passes (for example, passage a) is shortened, and the game ball passing through the passage is inclined to immediately enter the opening 2A. or guidance may be provided. In the configuration of FIG. 110(B), instead of or in addition to the above, the time required for the game ball ejected from the game machine 1 (opening 721) to reach the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 is short. You should make it so that As an example, the inclination of the bottom of the ball receiving member 1700 may be increased.

In addition, the opening 2A of the game board 2 and the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 may be widened so that the game balls do not get clogged and the game balls flow quickly. A plurality of openings may be provided, or the ball receiving member 1700 may be provided with a plurality of openings.

When widening the opening 2A of the game board 2, a plurality of out ball detectors 710 (out ball detection sensors 710
A) may be provided. The same applies to widening the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 . Also, when a plurality of openings are provided in the game board 2, a plurality of out ball detectors 710 ( An out ball detection sensor 710A) may be provided. Ball receiving member 1
The same is true when multiple openings are provided in 700 .

When a plurality of out-ball detectors 710 (out-ball detection sensors 710A) are provided, the game balls can be detected at the same time. , and each game ball detected at the same time may be captured as the number of hit balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A shooting device (for example, a batted ball shooting device, etc.) for shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball, etc.) to a game area (for example, the game area 10, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is established (for example, the first, second Derivation display of confirmed special symbols that are big hits and small winnings on special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, derivation display of confirmed decorative symbols that are big hit combinations on image display device 5, passage of game balls in specific areas, etc.) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) based on
Detecting means capable of detecting the game medium shot into the game area (for example, a shot ball detector provided on the guide rail (FIG. 85), shot ball detectors 701 and 702 (see FIG. 85) provided in the game area.
Figure 96) etc.) and
variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which game media launched into the game area can win;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A serving as the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D serving as the general winning areas, and the big winning hole payout means (e.g., ball payout device, payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 or the like for determining whether or not the game state based on the probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.),
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, an information display means (for example, the display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 83),
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the big winning opening at timing t3 based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol at timing t1 door changes from closed state to open state, etc.),
The determination means is
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, FIG. 95, FIG. 98
, the timing t2, which is a time T3 before the timing t3 at which the large winning opening door changes from the closed state to the open state, is determined to be in the advantageous state (for example, in the state control process of FIG. 88 As shown, timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses
, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball (for example, the game ball in FIG. 95 c, etc.) from the calculation of the performance display, an accurate base value can be calculated.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 described above
A variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc.) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display result is provided,
The state (for example, the state at timing t2) before the change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the image display device 5 is performing a fanfare effect, etc.) is.

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, the predetermined information is displayed without including the game balls (such as game balls c shown in FIGS. 95 and 98) that are shot after the fluctuation is stopped (after the stop display) and has the possibility of winning the special variable winning ball device 7. (performance information) can be calculated.

In the above-described embodiments (FIGS. 88, 95, 95, etc.), the in-round-game flag is turned on from the off state during the execution of the fanfare effect after the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed. Before the execution of (during execution of ready-to-win effect, etc.), the round game in-progress flag may be changed from the off state to the on state. For example, if the execution time of the fanfare effect is short (for example, 2 or 3 seconds), the game ball that has the possibility of winning the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by the launch detection sensor before the start of the fanfare effect. 700A and the first launch ball detector 701 (
Special variable winning ball device 7
The in-round-game flag may be changed from off to on before execution of the fanfare effect so as not to include game balls that have the possibility of winning in the performance display. Specifically, for example, with reference to the special symbol fluctuation time, it is sufficient to set the in-round game flag to the ON state at the timing before the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol. It should be noted that the in-round-game flag may be turned on from the off state at the start of execution of the fanfare effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means can be detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 96, a first ball detector 701 and a second ball detector 702 can The part above the dashed line P including is detachable, etc.).

As a result, it is possible to cope with a case without a detection means. Moreover, maintenance becomes easy.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means is
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2) that forms a game area (for example, the first ball detector 701 and the second ball detector 702 are shown in FIG. 96). is constructed as a unit above the dashed line P).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
In the game area,
There are a left game area (for example, left game area 10A, etc.) and a right game area (for example, right game area 10A, etc.) as areas through which the game medium ejected by the shooting device can pass,
The unit (for example, the portion above the dashed line P in FIG. 96) is
Left detection means (for example, the first shot ball detector 701, etc.) for detecting game media passing through the left game area, and right detection means (for example, for detecting game media passing through the right game area)
second firing ball detector 702, etc.).

Thereby, it can be detected even if it is shot to any of the game areas.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means is
Any winning area provided in the game area is provided on the upstream side in the flow path of the game medium (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, the shot ball detector 700 may It is provided above the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning ports 50A to 50D, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, as shown in FIG.
The shot ball detector 702 includes the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the general winning hole 50.
A to 50D, provided above the special variable winning ball device 7).

This enables reliable detection.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display explained in FIGS.
A shooting device (for example, a batted ball shooting device, etc.) for shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball, etc.) to a game area (for example, the game area 10, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is established (for example, the first, second Derivation display of confirmed special symbols that are big hits and small winnings on special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, derivation display of confirmed decorative symbols that are big hit combinations on image display device 5, passage of game balls in specific areas, etc.) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) based on
variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which game media launched into the game area can win;
Variable winning control means (for example, CPU 103 etc. for executing special figure processing shown in FIG. 87) capable of performing a predetermined number of round games for changing the variable winning means to the open state;
A game medium (first general winning port 5
0A, 2nd general winning opening 50B, 3rd general winning opening 50C, 4th general winning opening 50D, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) 110(A) for discharging game media (such as game balls taken into the out port 52) that have not passed through the winning area (for example, the opening 2A of the game board 2A as shown in FIG. 110A) 110(B), the opening 170 of the ball receiving member 1700 as shown in FIG. 110(B).
a detection means (for example, an out-ball detector 710, etc.) provided at a position capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the flow path, etc., and capable of detecting a game medium passing through the flow path;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A serving as the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D serving as the general winning areas, and the big winning hole payout means (e.g., ball payout device, payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 or the like for determining whether or not the game state based on the probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.),
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, an information display means (for example, the display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 83),
The variable winning control means is
Starting the round game based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, controlling the large winning entrance door from the closed state to the open state based on the stop display of the big win symbol),
The determination means is
Until a predetermined period of time elapses after the predetermined number of round games are completed and the variable winning means changes to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, the large winning entrance door changes from the open state to the closed state from timing t4 to timing t5 when time T5 has passed), it is determined that the state is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 101, the timing when the state change switching waiting time (time T5) passes At t5, the in-round game flag is cleared to the OFF state, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, by not including the game ball detected by the out ball detector 710 at any timing of the time T5 (for example, the game ball d in FIG. 102, etc.) in the calculation of the performance display, an accurate base value can be calculated.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The state when the predetermined period of time elapses (for example, the state at timing t5) is
This is a special state after the predetermined number of round games have been completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, an ending effect is being executed on the image display device 5, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, even if the game ball is detected by the out-ball detector 710 during the ending effect, the game ball (such as the game ball d shown in FIG. 102) that has the possibility of winning the special variable winning ball device 7 , is not included in the calculation of the predetermined information (performance information), it is possible to calculate accurate predetermined information.

In the above embodiment (FIGS. 101, 102, etc.), the round playing flag is turned off from the on state during the execution of the ending effect after the final round, but after the execution of the ending effect (no time saving During the first variable display in the normal jackpot, etc., the round-playing flag may be changed from the on state to the off state. For example, if the execution time of the ending effect is short (for example, 2 or 3 seconds), the game ball that has the possibility of winning the special variable winning ball device 7 will be detected by the out ball detector 710 after the ending effect ends Since there is a possibility of being detected by the special variable winning ball device 7, the in-round game flag is changed from the on state to the off state after the execution of the ending effect so as not to include the game balls that have the possibility of winning in the performance display. may Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S2024 of FIG. 101 may be longer than the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit. It should be noted that the in-round-game flag may be turned off from the on state at the end of execution of the ending effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means is detachable (for example, the out-ball detector 710 is detachable with a clasp 740 as shown in FIG. 103(B)).

As a result, it is possible to cope with a case without a detection means. Moreover, maintenance becomes easy.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means is
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2) that forms the game area (for example, the out-ball detector 710 is arranged on the game board 2 as shown in FIG. 110(B). It is configured as a unit that can be placed in the

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display explained in FIGS.
A gaming machine capable of executing a game and being controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player,
Detecting means (for example, the out-ball detector 710 shown in FIGS. 103, 110, etc.) capable of detecting the game medium (for example, the game area 10, etc.) used in the game;
A signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, a signal line 7 shown in FIG. 103).
34 etc.) and
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main substrate 11, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 11 side, etc.);
Abnormality detection means (for example, CPU 103 or the like that executes the error notification process in FIG. 104) capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A serving as the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D serving as the general winning areas, and the big winning hole payout means (e.g., ball payout device, payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.;
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, normal state, etc. Specifically, the probability variable flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag are all off, etc.) ( predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (e.g., the number of winning balls by winning in each winning hole, etc.) For example, an information display means (for example, the display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 83),
When the abnormality detection means detects an abnormality in the reception state, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, performance display is restricted, etc.).

This prevents the information display means from displaying incorrect information.
For example, if the harness 730 (connecting portion 732,
733) is performed, at least the performance display by the display monitor 1130 is restricted, thereby preventing a situation in which the figures due to the fraudulent act are displayed as if they are valid. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display mode of the information display means is changed (for example, a display mode as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106) , etc.).

As a result, confirmation can be made without providing a new display means.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The abnormality detection means can detect disconnection of the signal line (for example, it can detect by monitoring a signal input from the out ball detector 710),
An external device (for example, game effect lamp 9, speaker 8L) that the disconnection of the signal line is detected
, 8R, card unit display device, call lamp device, hall computer, etc.).

As a result, it is possible to recognize the door without opening the door.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out ball detector 71
0 is configured as a unit that can be placed on the game board 2 as shown in FIG. 110(B)).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Also, in FIGS. 83 to 110, a pachinko game machine is shown as a game machine that displays performance.
A predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated (reels are rotated) according to the operation of the control lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player. A slot machine (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (e.g., big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ ( It is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.).

For example, a slot machine that displays performance is a slot machine that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, bonus etc.) that is advantageous to the player. etc.), and a signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, a slot for detecting a detection signal from an inserted medal sensor, etc.). a signal line output to the main board side of the machine, etc.), receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board of the slot machine, a predetermined connection section provided on the main board side, etc.), and the detection signal Abnormality detecting means (for example, CPU of the main board of the slot machine, etc.) capable of detecting abnormalities in the reception state of the slot machine, and predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the combination (role) of specific symbols on each reel is stopped, etc.) Payout means (for example, a hopper motor or the like for paying out medals stored in a hopper tank from a medal payout opening) for paying out game media based on the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state. Information capable of displaying predetermined information (e.g., information indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of insertions, etc.) calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state. display means (for example, a display section provided on the main board of the slot machine), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, display by the information display means is restricted (for example, error and limit the display of information indicating the above ratio, etc.) It may be a slot machine.

1 … Pachinko machine
2 … game board
3 … Frame for game machine
3a... Glass door frame
3A... Outer frame 4A, 4B... Special pattern display device
5... Image display device
6A... Ordinary winning ball device
6B... Ordinary variable winning ball device
7 … Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R … Speaker
9 … Game effect lamp
11... main board
12 ... production control board
13... Audio control board
14... Lamp control board
15... relay board
20 … Normal pattern display
21... gate switch 22A, 22B... starting port switch
23 … Count switch
29 ... display monitor
30... Operation button 100... Game control microcomputer 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit 1000... Movable accessory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a shooting device for shooting game media into a game area and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on establishment of an advantageous condition,
a detection means capable of detecting a game medium launched into the game area;
variable means capable of changing to an open state in which game media launched into the game area can enter;
a payout means for paying out game media based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not it is in the advantageous state;
A display capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state an information display means having an area;
variable display means for performing variable display and deriving and displaying a display result,
The variable means changes to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition,
The determination means determines that the state is in the advantageous state from a predetermined period before the variable means changes to the open state,
The state before the predetermined period is a special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed, and a state in which a specific period has passed since the start of the special state. and
The information display means is
Having a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area as the display area,
A plurality of types of predetermined information corresponding to each of a plurality of calculation periods can be displayed in the first display area as the predetermined information,
Period information indicating which of the plurality of calculation periods is a calculation period can be displayed in the second display area at the same time as the predetermined information,
displaying special information in the first display area and the second display area without displaying the period information and the predetermined information when a predetermined error occurs;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images